JP2020103911A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can prevent players from getting tired of playing a game early.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: display control means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information and second identification information simultaneously on display means; first dynamic display period determining means for determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information; and second dynamic display period determining means for determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information. When identification information indicating a specific first determination result or a specific second determination result is stop-displayed on the display means, a specific game corresponding to each of the results is executed. The game machine comprises: game mode setting means that sets a second game mode in which the specific game based on the second determination result tends to be executed when a first condition is satisfied, and sets a first game mode when a second condition is satisfied in the second game mode; and performance execution means that suggests a period when the second game mode may be continuously set on the basis of the information of the first dynamic display period when the second game mode is set.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 5

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the winning or failure of the game is drawn by lot, and a dynamic display of a special symbol for informing the lottery result is displayed. Executed in. If the lottery result is a win, after the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, the lottery of whether or not to shift to the high-probability game state in which the probability of being judged to be high becomes a starting opening It is executed based on the fact that a game ball has entered. When the high probability game state is set, if it is decided in the high probability game state that it is decided to shift to the normal probability game state, it is proposed to shift to the normal probability game state. ing.

JP, 2005-319221, A

By the way, in such a gaming machine, in order to provide the player with a fair game, it is necessary to set a constant probability that the game state will shift to a high-probability gaming state when entering the starting opening. In the above case, since the probability of shifting to the high-probability game state is always constant, there is a problem that the game is not sharp and the player gets tired of the game early.

It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which can prevent the player from getting tired of the game early in the gaming machine.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 executes a win/loss judgment of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition, and a second win based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition. The win/loss determination means for performing the win/loss determination of the lottery game, and the first identification information indicating the win/loss determination result of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means are dynamically displayed in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied. The first display means and the second display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination means, in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied, and The display control means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, respectively, and the hit determination result by the hit determination means. A bonus game that gives a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information on the first or second display unit in a display mode indicating a hit Execution means, and until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition. , A dynamic display start condition for holding the right to execute the first lottery game and starting the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition Until the establishment of the dynamic display start condition, the holding means for holding the right to execute the second lottery game and the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the first win/fail judgment condition are satisfied. Is determined on the basis of the number of holdings held in the holding means, and the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the second win/fail judgment condition is set to meet the dynamic display start condition. As a trigger, the dynamic display mode determining means for determining based on the number of holds held in the holding means, and each hold held in the holding means each time a predetermined determination condition is satisfied. And a case where the advance dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode based on the number of holdings by the holding means when the determination condition is satisfied and the first or second win/fail determination condition are satisfied. In addition, until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, the order in which the win/fail judgment conditions that are the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions that have been met are met, and the pre-dynamic display mode determination means determines. Holding information storing means for storing holding information having at least information regarding the displayed dynamic display mode, and the holding information. While distinguishing the holding information of the first winning/disabling judgment condition and the second winning/failing judgment condition stored in the information storage means, the winning/damaging result in which the first winning/damaging condition and the second winning/damaging condition are combined for each holding information. Each time the determination condition is satisfied, the hold display means is displayed in a distinguishable hold display mode, and each time the determination conditions of the preliminary dynamic display mode determination means are satisfied, the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means. Based on the dynamic display mode determined by the advance dynamic display mode determination means for each hold information and the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed, for each hold information Start time information updating means for deciding or updating time information until the first or second identification information becomes the dynamic display start and storing it in the holding information storage means, and that a predetermined condition is satisfied. On the occasion, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is rearranged in the order of starting the dynamic display based on each time information stored in the hold information storage means by the start time information updating means. And rearranging means.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the determination means executes the determination of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first lottery condition, and the determination of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second lottery condition. To be executed. The display control means simultaneously displays the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game by the determination means and the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game on the display means. The first dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the display control unit are respectively selected from the plurality of dynamic display periods by the dynamic display period determining unit. It is determined. After the first identification information or the second identification information is displayed with the determination result indicating the hit, at least the first benefit that is advantageous to the player and the second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit. The privilege determination means determines whether or not to grant one of them. The second privilege is more easily determined by the privilege determination means when the second identification information is displayed as a hit than when the first identification information is displayed as a hit. A plurality of first dynamic display period groups configured by a plurality of dynamic display periods are stored in the storage unit as the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination unit. One first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determination unit from the plurality of first dynamic display period groups stored in the storage unit. The plurality of first dynamic display period groups includes a long first dynamic display period group configured so that the dynamic display period determining means can easily determine the first dynamic display period having a long dynamic display period. The long first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determination means based on the determination result determined by the determination means.

Thereby, it is possible to provide a novel game play. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired early.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the dynamic display period determination means determines the first dynamic display period when the first dynamic display start condition for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is satisfied, The second dynamic display period is determined when the second dynamic display start condition for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is satisfied. The effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means.

Thereby, a novel effect can be given to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired early.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, it is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the determination means determines that the hit or the specific determination result is obtained. Since the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means, there is an effect that the player can expect more than hit.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the display mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the probability variation game state displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the probability variation game state displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the time of the probability variation upper limit in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the composition of various counters in a 1st embodiment, a special design reservation sphere storage area, a special design reservation sphere execution area, a normal design reservation sphere storage area, and a normal design reservation sphere execution area. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the jackpot random number table in 1st Embodiment typically, (C) is a diagram schematically showing the jackpot type table in the first embodiment, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing a random symbol per ordinary symbol in the first embodiment. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the variation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the variation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the variation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of RAM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, and (b) of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of RAM223 typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the addition time selection table 222b in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the rearrangement reservation storage area in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the subordinate rearrangement storage area in 1st Embodiment typically. .. It is the figure which showed the processing of the rearrangement of the pending symbol display in a 1st embodiment typically. It is the figure which showed the processing of the rearrangement of the pending symbol display in a 1st embodiment typically. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st pre-reading processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st pre-reading update processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd pre-reading processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd pre-reading update processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the through gate processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the change monitoring processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the illegality monitoring processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows probability change setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation quantity display renewal processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 1st execution form. 6 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a variation update process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a probability variation period notification process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process according to the present invention. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the change pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing according to the present invention. FIG. 9A is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 9B is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing an error command process performed. 6 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed the content typically in the small hitting random number table set to ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment, and (b) is the small hitting selection table in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically, (c) is the figure which showed the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table in 2nd Embodiment typically. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation start processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 63, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63a, 63b, 67, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front surface area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front surface area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the rear surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface and protruding toward the front, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when rearranging the reserved symbol displays (Ds1 to Ds8) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 which incorporate a light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when a jackpot or a reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right decorative portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more brilliance.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thus the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

In the present embodiment, the configuration described above is used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the main control device 110 and other control devices detect a game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a, and a solenoid of the ball launch unit 112a. May be configured to detect that a game ball has been launched. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a “dollar box”) placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and has a large number of nails and windmills for guiding balls and rails 61 and 62, a first starting opening 63a, and a first starting opening 63a. The second start port 63b, the first variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The first starting port 64, the second starting port 640, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed with wood screws. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted. At the inner position of the outer rail 62, a band-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear surfaces are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a winning opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down. In addition, the game area includes all areas where the game balls that have passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flow down until they pass through the outlet 66 and the winning port.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

On the right side of the center of the game board 13, a normal symbol starting port 67 is provided. The normal symbol starting port 67 is composed of a gate type starting port having a sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery performed for the game ball passing through the normal symbol starting port 67, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is hit.

When the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is selected, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display section 88 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and "○" and "x" are displayed. After the symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), a normal symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○" or "x") indicating the lottery result is stopped (lighted). When the sphere passes through the normal symbol starting port 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display portion 88, the number of passages is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol display device 37. Displayed by.

When it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, the symbol "○", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a winning symbol, is lit and displayed on the second symbol display portion 88. When the winning symbol is displayed, the normal electric accessory 640a is activated, and the normal electric accessory 640a, which is normally maintained in an upright position, is rotated counterclockwise from the upright position. A state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting port 640 by rotating the angle (40 degrees in the present embodiment) and guiding the game ball to the second starting port 640 by the ordinary electric accessory 640a (special State). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is off, the symbol "x", which is a symbol indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been off, is lit on the second symbol display portion 88. At this time, the normal electric accessory 640a is not operated, and the variation of the next normal symbol (second symbol) is executed.

The first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2) A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a is the number of balls (holding balls) for which variable display has not been executed among the balls won in the first starting opening 64, the second starting opening 640, and the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67. The number of balls is indicated by a lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds in a big hit and an error display are also indicated by a corresponding lighting state.

The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. The left 7 segment LED, the first special symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game is variably displayed (dynamic display). Specifically, the variable display is displayed until the variable time (dynamic display time), which is determined based on the winning of the first start opening 64, elapses (in the present embodiment, the central segment of the 7 segments is displayed in blinking). After that, it is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the determination result. When the determination result is out, a symbol "-" indicating that the central one segment is lit and displayed is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a hit, a symbol different from the symbol indicating the deviation such as the symbols “3” and “7” corresponding to the hit is displayed. The second lottery game is also configured similarly to the first lottery game. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

Further, the variation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, but a variation time is set for each variation mode, and corresponds to a dynamic display mode regarding time information. Furthermore, the variation pattern can be divided into a variation pattern with reach and a variation pattern with non-reach, a long-term variation pattern with a relatively long variation time and a short-term variation pattern with a relatively short variation time. In this way, even when sorting is performed based on a fixed time standard (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds or not)), the dynamic information regarding the time information is determined. It corresponds to the display mode.

Further, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, long reach 1 to 4 are set as the long time variation pattern. For this long reach 1 to 4, set as a variation pattern that can be selected in the case of a wrong judgment result in the high probability state (during probability change) with respect to the first special symbol (special diagram 1) Has been done.

Further, as will be described later, the time information until the fluctuation start time also corresponds to the time when the accurate fluctuation starts, and the time information of the rough fluctuation pattern described above (for example, whether it is a long time fluctuation pattern or not) Information about time information (for example, the number of long-time fluctuation patterns performed before the start of fluctuation) determined based on whether or not) is also applicable.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the winning of the first start opening 64 or the second start opening 640, the jackpot judgment is performed (big hit lottery), and the jackpot type is also determined. To do. As the jackpot type determined here, two types of jackpot A (15R jackpot) and jackpot B (14R jackpot) are set as jackpot types of the first special symbol. Further, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, one type of jackpot C (15R jackpot) is set (see FIG. 10(c)).

Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged as the winning devices that are operated in the open state during the big hit game. The first variable winning device 65 is operated such that the first specific winning port 65a is opened for the 1R (round) to 14R of the big hits A to C. In addition, the second variable winning device 650 is operated such that the second specific winning port 650a is opened at the 15th R of the big hit A and the big hit C.

In the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot is controlled to shift to the high probability state (probably changed state) by winning the second specific winning port 650a during the jackpot game. That is, in the jackpot B, since the second variable winning device 640 is not operated, it is configured not to shift to the high probability state. In addition, the jackpot A and the jackpot C are jackpots that can be shifted to a high probability state.

Further, based on the winning in the first start opening 64, if the executed winning/judgment determination result is a big hit, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in a grid pattern. Then, it is reported that it was a big hit. However, from the third pattern, it is difficult to determine whether the jackpot type is a jackpot A or a jackpot B, and the player, while playing the jackpot game, is the jackpot being executed. A game will be played with the expectation that it is a big hit A. Then, after the 14th round, the second variable winning device 650 is activated and the second specific winning port 650a is opened, and the player has the jackpot type of jackpot A. By recognizing, the game ball can be inserted into the second specific winning opening 650a, and the game can be performed so as to shift to the high-probability state after the big hit game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot type, it is determined whether or not to give the player a state capable of shifting to the high probability state. Then, the player can play the game by determining to shift to the high-probability state by allowing the player to win the game ball into the second specific winning port 650a. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a fresh game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 79 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) to the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640, while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol (first symbol). A special symbol, a second special symbol) is provided with a third symbol display device 81 constituted by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that the third symbol display device 81 is displayed as shown in FIG. Shows the first special symbol or the second special symbol (depending on the game state) which is one of the third symbols in one display area Dm, left (left display area Dm1), middle (middle display area Dm2) and right (right side) Three symbol rows in the display area Dm3) are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. (Dynamic display).

The third symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is composed of 10 types of special symbols with numbers "0" to "9". .. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbol is aligned (for example, "777"), a variable display is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the end of.

Specifically, in the first display area Dm, three symbol columns L1, L2, and L3 are displayed for each of left, middle, and right. In each of the symbol columns L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol columns L1 to L3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from the top to the bottom with the periodicity for each of the symbol columns L1 to L3. In particular, in the left symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the right symbol column L3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order. On the other hand, in the right side display area Dm2, the second special symbol is displayed in the same manner as the first special symbol, the symbol rows R1, R2 and R3 are displayed, and the variable display is similarly performed.

Further, in the first display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line U1. If the third symbol is stopped in line on the activated line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

A second display area Dn is formed on the upper right of the first display area Dm. In the second display area Dn, a symbol row showing the first special symbol or the second special symbol (depending on the game state) is displayed. In this second display area Dn, two kinds of symbol rows of “◯” and “×” as shown in FIG. 4B are displayed in parallel, and two rows of “◯” are left and right. When displayed in a row, it is configured to inform the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been won.

In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal gaming state), the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display region Dm, and the second display region Dn. The third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. In addition, the game state is a high probability state (probability variation game state), in the case of a time saving game state, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. Then, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn.

In the jackpot gaming state, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in the state that was displayed before the jackpot game was started, and the display state is switched based on the switching of the gaming state after the jackpot game. Can be switched.

In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 4A, a sub display area Ds is formed below the first display area. In the sub-display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 4B, a reserved symbol "●" corresponding to the first special symbol and a reserved symbol "▲" corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed respectively. In the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to four, respectively, therefore, in the sub-table display area Ds, four reserved symbols “●” and the reserved symbol “ Four ▲” are displayed at the maximum. Although described later in detail, the reserved symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds are rearranged and displayed in a variation start order in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are combined.

Here, with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, the display contents during the probability change (during the probability change game state) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 5( a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case where the third symbol and the holding symbol are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the probability change. When the transition to the probability variation game state, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display region Dm (see FIG. 4A), and the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is the second display region. Displayed in Dn. Then, in the first display area Dm, the character "After the probability change ends..." is displayed to notify the shortest time until the probability change game state ends, and the shortest remaining time until the probability change end is displayed below it. It is digitally displayed in the order of minutes, seconds and milliseconds.

Here, the shortest time to the end of this probability change is determined by lottery within the time by determining the time until the big hit B is started in the first special symbol. In addition, it has not yet been determined that the jackpot B will be started in the first special symbol (during the fluctuation, it is determined that the one that has been won in the jackpot B is not set in the lottery of the held first special symbol) In the state, the shortest time is set within the time until the variation of the first special symbol which is the most variation start order of the stored first special symbol is finished. Furthermore, if there is no first special symbol that is changing and there is no lottery for the first special symbol that is being held, the shortest variation time of the first special symbol (3 seconds in this embodiment) is set. ..

Thereby, the probability variation gaming state is a configuration that continues for the player until the big hit B is started in the first special symbol, but the player can be notified of the remaining time of the probability variation gaming state. Therefore, the player can feel as if the period of the probability variation gaming state is set by time, and before the time elapses, the jackpot A or the jackpot C is won to continue the probability variation state. You can play games with the expectation.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 5(a), the first special symbol that is changing and the first special symbol that is stored in reserve are all wrong judgment results, and the first special symbol with the slowest variation start order. The time until the variation of the first special symbol with respect to the reserved ball of the symbol is finished is shown as an example when it is 10 minutes 9 seconds 05 milliseconds or more.

Next, FIG. 5(b) is an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the other case when the game ball enters the first starting opening 64 from the state shown in FIG. 5(a). It is the schematic diagram shown. The reserved symbol “●” of the first special symbol is increased by one and displayed. Here, the newly stored sphere of the first special symbol, the judgment result is wrong, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected that the fluctuation pattern of the deviation (5s) is selected. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 5B, the time until the fluctuation of the currently established first special symbol is finished is added by 5 seconds. Then, the addition timing (established by winning the first start opening 64 in the present embodiment) is established, and 5 seconds is determined by the additional lottery of the notification time (see FIG. 16) described later, and the notification time is set. The character "5 seconds extended!!" indicating that 5 seconds has been added is displayed, and the time when 5 seconds has been added is also displayed on the digital counter.

Next, referring to FIG. 6(b), the first special symbol and the holding ball of the second special symbol are not stored together during the probability change, and the fluctuations of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have stopped. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the state which is a state. In the configuration of the present embodiment, if the variation (lottery) is not started in the first special symbol, there is no chance to win the jackpot B, which is the trigger for ending the probability variation game state, so the probability variation game state continues to be continued. It becomes a state. However, the probability variation game state is informed to the player that it is managed as if it is timed and ends after a predetermined period has passed, so the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not changed. When the state is reached, the subtraction of the digital counter, which gives the notification until the end of the probability change, is stopped, and the character "Timer stopped!!" indicating that the subtraction is stopped is displayed.

As a result, the player can take a break with peace of mind when he/she wants to take a break such as a toilet after interrupting the game. In addition, in this embodiment, when the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are both stopped, it is configured to be set to stop the digital counter, but it is not limited thereto, and during the variation of the first special symbol. If there is no big hit A or big hit B among the pending storage, the subtraction of the digital counter may be stopped based on the fact that the fluctuation of the second special symbol has stopped. In the present embodiment, the player mainly plays the game paying attention to the fluctuation of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. The first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn, which has a small display area. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to notice the variation display, and the player is configured to play the game without paying attention to the variation. There is. Therefore, when the player wins the jackpot B for the first special symbol, it can be difficult to notice that the probability variation game ends.

In such a configuration, the player is paying attention only to the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, so if the variation of the second special symbol ends, then the first symbol Even if the special symbol is fluctuating, he/she has no interest and recognizes that he/she can take a break and interrupt the game. Here, if the subtraction of the digital counter is stopped, the player can stop the game without anxiety. On the other hand, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the subtraction of the digital counter does not stop in spite of the state that there is no holding ball, the player is sure that the period of the probability variation game is subtracted. It is possible to recognize and continue the game without interruption. Therefore, it is possible to let the player recognize whether or not the game such as a break can be interrupted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6(b), an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the probability variation game is completed by winning the big hit B with the first special symbol will be described. In FIG. 6B, the jackpot B is won in the first special symbol, and a symbol combination “◯” indicating that it is a jackpot is displayed in parallel in the second display area Dn. After the jackpot B is executed, the game state shifts to the normal game state. Therefore, the firing handle 51 is operated so as to launch the game ball with the strength to let the game ball flow down to the right side of the variable display unit 80 in the probability variation game state. Operate the firing handle 51 (left-handed game) so as to shoot the game ball with the strength to let the game ball flow down to the left side of the variable display unit 80 from the right-handed game state (left-handed game). The character "Please return to the left" is displayed to inform the player to perform.

Further, the remaining time of the digital counter is displayed as 0, and the character "probability change end!!" indicating that the probability variation game state has ended is displayed. In this case, with the end of the big hit B, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is switched to be displayed in the first display area Dm, and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the second display area Ds. To be

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a calculation method for determining the remaining maximum period of the probability variation game period in the probability variation game state in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 7 shows that three holding balls of the first special symbol have been established, and during the fluctuation, the fluctuation patterns of the holding balls 1 and 2 are out of order (is done), and the holding ball 3 Indicates that the jackpot B is determined to be won. In this case, when the variation of the hold ball 3 ends, the probability variation game state ends, so the maximum period until the probability variation end time is the time until the hold 3 ends the variation. Therefore, the sum of the remaining fluctuation time during fluctuation and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation patterns selected from the hold 1 to 3 is determined as the maximum period until the end of the probability change. When the end of the probability change is determined, the period is set in the digital counter (the difference time is added and displayed during the period being displayed).

In the present embodiment, the winning in the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 640 is withheld up to four times each. When the game ball wins the first starting opening 64 during the variable display of the first special symbol, the start of the first lottery game based on the winning is suspended, and in the display area of the reserved symbol display area of the lower display area Ds. Among the areas in which the reserved symbols are not displayed, the reserved symbol display area of the smallest number (the reserved symbol display area on the left side) displays "●" which is the reserved symbol of the first lottery game.

Further, when the game ball wins the second starting port 640 while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, as in the case of winning the first starting port 640, the "▲" which is the reserved symbol of the second lottery game is down. It is displayed in the reserved symbol display area of the side display area Ds.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 constituted by the first lottery game and the second lottery game has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and three, four, or more lottery games and corresponding start. Of course, each mouth may be provided so that each lottery result can be variably displayed at the same time.

When a game ball wins the first start port 64 and the second start port 640, the first start port switch or the second start port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. Due to the turning on of the first starting opening switch and the second starting opening switch, the main control device 110 makes a big hit lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first starting opening 64 and the second starting opening 640 are also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins.

Either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol showing a big hit, and if the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the measurement of the variation time is interrupted during the big hit period. However, the variable display is continued. After that, when the big hit game ends, the measurement of the fluctuation time is restarted, and the fluctuation display is executed in the remaining fluctuation period.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is hit with one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the measurement of the variation time is interrupted and the variation display is continued. The present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display during the change may be temporarily stopped, and the remaining change time may be changed and displayed after the jackpot is over.

Further, during the interruption, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be displayed in a blinking manner in a state of being stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode "for example, the letter h" in a predetermined cycle. By thus configuring, it is possible to notify the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (during suspension).

On the lower right side of the game area, a horizontally elongated rectangular first variable winning device 65 and a second variable winning device 650 having a width smaller than that of the first variable winning device 65 are arranged. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery related to the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed, it becomes a big hit stop symbol. While turning on the symbol display device 37, a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed in the corresponding display area (first display area Dm or second display area Dn) of the third symbol display device 81, and the jackpot is generated. Shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). It

The first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is closed after a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The order of opening and closing the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650a (opening round) is determined by the determined jackpot type. For example, in the case of jackpot A and jackpot C, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened from the first round to the fourteenth round, and the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in the fifteenth round. Further, in the jackpot B, the first specific winning opening 65a is not opened from the first round to the 14th round, and the second variable winning device 650a is not opened.

In this way, in the jackpot game, since the specific winning opening to be opened is changed to the jackpot type, the jackpot type can be determined by whether or not the second specific winning opening 65a is opened. Therefore, it is possible to let the player recognize the jackpot type through the specific winning opening that is opened, without notifying the player of the jackpot type with a design or the like.

Further, the second specific winning opening 650a is configured as a winning opening that triggers the player to be given the probability variation gaming state after the big hit game. The probability variation game state is set after the big hit game based on the fact that the game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. In addition, when a game ball enters each of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, 15 gaming balls are awarded as a winning ball, as opposed to one gaming ball being entered. It is configured to be paid out by the player.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit, the opening and closing operation based on the jackpot type It is set, and the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the present embodiment, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). To be done.

The first variable winning a prize device 65, the second specific winning a prize device 650, the second variable winning a prize device 650, the horizontal oblong rectangular opening and closing plate which covers the second specific winning a prize port 650a, respectively, and the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis forward And a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open and close. The first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a are normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. , The open state and the normally closed state are alternately repeated.

Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp etc. affixed to the adhesive space K1 is the front frame 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not won any of the winning openings 63 are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the out openings 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is a unit in which a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114) are mounted. The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as required.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

In the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102 or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Be cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the configuration>
A characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, below the variable display unit 80, a first starting port 64 (hereinafter referred to as the left first starting port 64) is provided. The left side first starting opening 64 has an opening of a size that allows one game ball to be inserted into the upper surface, and two nails are slightly smaller than the diameter of the two game balls at a position facing the opening. It is arranged at wide intervals. By adjusting the inclination of the nail, the winning rate of the game play to the left first starting port 64 (for example, when 250 game balls are shot, the number of game balls to win the left first starting port 64) The ratio) is variable.

Further, in the right region of the variable display unit 80, the second starting port 640 and the first starting port 64 (hereinafter, referred to as the right first starting port 64) are arranged in parallel vertically. The second starting opening 640 has an opening on the side surface of the decorative member attached to the game board 60, into which one game ball can enter. On the front side (opposing surface) of the opening, a normal electric accessory 640a associated with the second starting opening 640 is arranged. The ordinary electric accessory 640a has a length of about three game balls and is pivotally supported at one end side so as to be rotatable. Then, based on the fact that the second symbol is a winning, a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, once or twice), a predetermined number of seconds (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds or 1 second) a game ball Is configured to rotate at a predetermined angle (45 degrees in the present embodiment) in a direction in which the guide can be guided to the second starting port 640 (direction away from the opening). The ordinary electric accessory 640a is rotated by a solenoid. In addition, in a normal time (other than when the second symbol hits), the state in which the opening of the second starting port 640a is closed (the state in which it stands upright) is maintained.

In addition, the right side first starting port 64 is arranged below the second starting port 640, as shown in FIG. Then, when the ordinary electric accessory 640a is in the open state (inclined to the horizontal direction side), the ordinary electric accessory 640a is arranged at a position facing the opening of the right first starting opening 64. With this configuration, when the normal electric accessory 640a is in the open state, it is possible to configure a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the right side first starting opening 64.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game state is a high probability state (probability change state) and a time saving game state, it is configured to increase the probability that the second symbol is determined to be a hit. When the gaming state is the low-probability gaming state, the player shoots the gaming ball so that the gaming ball passes the left side of the variable display unit 80, and wins the gaming ball in the left first starting opening 64. Play the game as you would. Then, the third symbol is a hit, and the probability that the second symbol is determined to be a hit when the probability variation game or the time saving game is increased increases, so that the second symbol is easily hit when the game ball passes through the through gate 67. Has been done. As a result, the player executes the game by firing the game ball so as to pass the right side of the variable display unit 80 (right-handed game). In this case, since the probability that the ordinary electric accessory 640a will be in the open state is high, the second starting port 640 is configured to be easily won, while the right first starting port 64 is less likely to be won.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation game state, it is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to win the second special symbol than the first special symbol. Specifically, in the first special symbol, out of the big hits, 50% is a big hit that is likely to be given a certainty after the big hit game, and the remaining 50% is easy to be given a time saving game (low probability game state) after the big hit game ( It is configured so that a jackpot is awarded).

On the other hand, in the second special symbol, in the case of a big hit, the big hit is likely to be given a probability variation game after the big hit game at 100%. That is, it is configured that the probability variation game state is more likely to be given to the person who wins the second special symbol.

Further, the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80, when the normal electric auditors role product 640a is in an open state, the distance between the tip of the normal electric auditors role object 640a and the variable display unit 80 is one game ball or more and less than two balls. The intervals are. The through gate 67 is arranged so that the game ball flowing down the space easily passes through the through gate 67 having a gate type opening. The game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right side first starting opening 64 by the nail arranged on the downstream side of the through gate 67. Specifically, on the exit side (downstream side) of the through gate 67, a game ball flows down to the opening side of the right side first starting opening 64 by a nail arranged above the opening of the right side first starting opening 64. It is configured with a non-interval (less than one game ball), and is configured to flow downward through the wind turbine as it is. That is, when the player wins the right first starting opening 64, it is configured to be limited to the case where the ordinary electric accessory 640a is maintained in a closed state (a state in which it stands up in the vertical direction).

Further, during the probability variation state, the variation time of the second symbol is set as short as 3 seconds, and the normal electric accessory 640a is frequently opened. Therefore, it is configured such that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right side first starting opening 640a during the probability changing state. Therefore, when the probability variation state is reached, the number of times the probability variation state continues can be increased. Therefore, the player's motivation for the game can be increased.

In the present embodiment, when the normal electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the right first starting opening 64 is not won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing down from the exit of the through gate 67 is the first right starting. It may be configured such that the interval is set to allow winning in the mouth 64 and the ratio is reduced so that the right first starting opening 64 can win.

Further, on the lower right side of the game area, a first variable winning device 65 and a second variable winning device 650 are arranged directly below the first variable winning device 65. The first variable winning device 65 is configured such that the first specific winning opening 65a, which is a horizontally long opening into which the game ball can enter, is normally closed by a door member that prevents the game ball from entering the ball. There is. And, when it becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the door member is rotated to a position vertical to the game board 60 with both lower ends as rotation axes, and receives the game ball flowing down by the door member, It is configured to guide the player to the inside of the first specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, the second variable winning device 650 is arranged so that the second specific winning port 650a, which is an opening portion having a width smaller than that of the first variable winning device, is a door member and restricts a game ball from entering normally. Has been done. Then, when the special symbol is a big hit, the door member is rotated about both lower ends of the rotation axis to a position perpendicular to the game plate 60, and is configured to receive the flowing down game ball. By the game ball winning the second specific winning opening 650a, it is determined that the probability change state is set after the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot A that is given when the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is a jackpot and the jackpot C that is given when the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is a jackpot. When is executed, the first variable winning device 65 is operated from the 1R (round) to the 14R, and the second variable winning device 650 is operated only in the 15th round.

On the other hand, in the jackpot B that is awarded when the first special symbol is a jackpot, the first variable winning device 65 operates and the second variable winning device 650 operates from the 1R to 14R. Since it does not exist, the opportunity to win the second specific winning opening 650a is not given, and it is difficult to provide the probability variation state.

In the present embodiment, in the low-probability game state, it is prohibited to play a right-handed game, and when the game ball wins the second start opening 640 in the low-probability game state, abnormal processing is executed, The warning display "please play with left-handed characters" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a similar warning is given by voice. Further, in the low probability game state, when a game ball is won in the second starting port 640, the jackpot may be controlled to be invalid, or an abnormal signal is output to a hall computer or the like. May be.

<Electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display portion 88 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 9) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 9, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, in order to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display unit 88, etc., the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Used in.

For the jackpot lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a special symbol per random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a special jackpot type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol A fluctuation type counter C3 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern and an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the special winning random number counter C1 are used. In addition, a normal hit random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display portion 88), and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the normal hit random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), and some counters are not included in the main process (S1250) (see FIG. 41). It is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for the winning for the first starting opening 64 and each counter value for the winning for the second starting opening 640. The second special symbol reserve ball storage 203b is provided. In the present embodiment, the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640 are respectively provided with up to four holding balls, so that a maximum of eight holding balls can be stored in total. Therefore, when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game, the gaming ball wins during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, and the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 64, each counter value Is stored in the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a, and when the game ball wins the second starting opening 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b. After that, the respective counter values stored in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a are moved to the first special symbol reserved sphere execution area 203c, and various settings for variably displaying the first special symbol (dynamic display) And control processing is executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203b is moved to the second special symbol reservation sphere execution area 203d, various settings and control processing for variably displaying the second special symbol Is executed.

On the other hand, during the period during which the special symbol cannot be selected during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball is the first starting opening 64 or When the second starting opening 640 is won and the number of holdings for the winning opening is less than the upper limit value (four in the present embodiment), each counter value is acquired and the winning opening is won. Is stored in the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203b corresponding to. In addition, when the number of holdings for the winning opening is equal to or more than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (5 game balls in this embodiment) ) Only is treated as an invalid ball that is paid out to the player.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four for each of the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b, but is not limited to this, and may be four for each, or the upper limit value. You may not make money.

Each counter shown in FIG. 9 will be described in detail. The special winning random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1. The special winning random number counter C1 is commonly acquired for the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640.

The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the special winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special winning random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1250) (see FIG. 41).

The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball wins the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 640 (start winning). At a timing, the RAM 203 is stored in the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b corresponding to the winning opening. The value of the random number to be a big hit is set by the big hit random number table 202a (FIG. 10B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is set by the big hit random number table 202a. When the value of the generated random number that becomes a jackpot (in the present embodiment, "7" when the probability is low and "0-9" when the probability is high) is determined as a jackpot.

The special random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this special winning random number counter C1, the number of random number values (hit values) to be a big hit is 1 when the probability is low, the value "7" is 10 when the probability is high, and the value "0-9" is a big hit. It is stored in the random number table 202a.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the big hit type in the case of a big hit, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) to obtain the maximum value (99 in the present embodiment). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching. The value of the special winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball wins the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 640 (starting winning). At the timing, the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203 corresponding to the winning opening is stored.

Here, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, a random number that is out. For example, the variation pattern in the variation display effect and the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) are those at the time of disconnection. On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere execution area 203b is a random number, it is a variation pattern or stop in the variation display effect. The type will be that of a big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The value of the special win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the special jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 10C) stored in the ROM 202. Here, as shown in FIG. 10A, various tables are stored in the ROM 202. 10B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a, and FIG. 10C is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. The big hit type table 202b (FIG. 8C) is a table in which the big hit type and the value of the special hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, the jackpot A and the jackpot B are set as the jackpot type dedicated to the first special symbol, and the jackpot C is set as the jackpot type dedicated to the second special symbol. The jackpot A is a jackpot composed of 15R (round), the first variable winning device 65 is operated from the 1R to the 14R, and the second variable winning device 650 is operated at the 15R. Here, the second variable winning device 650 is operated (opened), the game ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a, and the game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. The gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the probability changing state. As a result, the jackpot A becomes a jackpot type in which a probability variation game can be given. This jackpot A is determined based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting opening 64, and when it is a big hit, the value of the special winning type counter C2 (first starting opening) It is a jackpot type that is determined to be any of 0 to 49 when the player enters the ball 64.

In addition, the big hit B is a big hit type composed of 14R, and the first variable winning a prize device 65 operates from the 1R to the 14R, and the big hit game is executed. Therefore, since the second variable winning device 650 is not operated, the probability changing state is not set after the jackpot B ends. As a result, the jackpot B becomes a jackpot type in which the probability variation state is not given. The jackpot B is determined based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting opening 64, and if it is a big hit, the value of the special winning type counter C2 (first starting opening) It is a jackpot type that is determined to be any of 50 to 99 when the player enters the ball 64.

Similar to the big hit A, the big hit C is a big hit of 15R, the first variable winning device 65 operates from the 1st to 14th eyes, and the second variable winning device 650 operates from the 15th prize. As a result, the jackpot C becomes a jackpot type in which the probability variation state can be set after the jackpot game. The jackpot C is determined based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second starting opening 640, and when it is a big hit, the value of the special winning type counter C2 (the first starting opening). It is a jackpot type that is determined to be any of 0 to 99 when the player enters the ball at 64. That is, in the lottery for the second special symbol, when a big hit occurs, the big hit C is always determined and executed.

In this way, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed based on entering the first starting opening 64, when it is a big hit, big hit A and big hit B are respectively selected with a probability of 50%. On the other hand, in the lottery for the second special symbol executed based on the fact that the player has entered the second starting opening 64, the jackpot C is selected with a probability of 100% when the jackpot is a jackpot. Therefore, the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol, the lottery will be executed. As a result, the player feels that it is more advantageous that the lottery is performed with the second special symbol than the first special symbol, so the player expects to win the jackpot with the second special symbol and play the game. You can

As described above, in the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 10C), the value of the special hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 10C, the jackpot A is associated with the value “0-49” of the special hit type counter C2, and the jackpot B is associated with the value “50-99” of the special hit type counter C2. The value “0 to 99” of the special winning type counter C2 is associated with the big hit C.

When the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is a big hit, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d The jackpot type table 202b determines the jackpot type associated with the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 stored in. For example, if the value of the special winning type counter C2 is "20", if the first special symbol, the big hit A, if the second special symbol, the big hit C is determined.

Returning to FIG. 9, description of various counters will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, reaches a maximum value (that is, 198), and then returns to 0.

The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball wins the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 640 (start winning). At a timing, it is stored in the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

11A and 11B show a variation pattern selection table 202d for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the gaming state is the normal gaming state. It is a schematic diagram. The variation pattern selected in the normal game state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be described.

FIG. 11A shows that the gaming state is the normal gaming state, and the variation patterns for selecting the variation patterns of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set when the result of winning/disagreement determination is out. This is a deviation (normal) common variation pattern selection table 202d. In this outlying (normal) common variation pattern selection table 202d, each variation pattern type is assigned corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, with respect to the value “0 to 100” of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the deviation is constituted by the fluctuation time of 5 seconds (the third symbol is stopped in the display mode of the reach without being in the reach display mode). Display pattern) is set. For “101 to 160”, a variation pattern of normal reach constituted by a variation time of 10 seconds is set. Further, for "161 to 198", a variation pattern of super reach constituted by a variation time of 30 seconds is set. The variation patterns selected here are variation patterns in which the result of the hit/miss determination is incorrect.

In this way, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the win/fail judgment result is out, a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time (5 seconds), which is a variation pattern, is selected at a rate of about 50%. To be done. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a problem that a variation pattern with a long variation time is selected and the game is delayed and the player gets tired early even though the result of the determination is wrong. Further, by making the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol common, the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed evenly.

FIG. 11B is a normal game state in which the game state is a hit state (normal) common variation pattern for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the result of winning/decision determination is a hit. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the selection table 202d typically. In this hit (normal) common variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern of normal reach constituted by a variation time of 10 seconds is set for the value "0-10" of the variation type counter CS1. For "11 to 150", a variation pattern of super reach constituted by a variation time of 30 seconds is set. For “151 to 198”, a fluctuation pattern composed of fluctuation patterns for 60 seconds is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 11(c) to FIG. 12(b), when the game state is a time saving game state, the variation pattern selection of the variation pattern selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The table 202d will be described. As the variation pattern selection table 202d in which the variation pattern selected in the time saving game state is set, the common variation pattern selection that is referred to when the result of the determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a hit (time saving) Table 202d (Fig. 11 (c)) and the first special symbol lottery result is referred to in case of deviation (time saving) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d (Fig. 12 (a)) and second special symbol The deviation (time saving) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d (FIG. 12B), which is referred to when the lottery result is incorrect, is set.

FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning (shortening) common variation pattern selection table 202d. This hit (time saving) common fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is a fluctuation pattern selection table that is selected when the win/fail judgment result in the time saving game state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a hit. In the hit (time saving) common variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern of normal reach constituted by a variation time of 5 seconds is set for the value "0-198" of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the gaming state is a time saving state, the variation pattern of the normal reach is selected in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are hit when the hit/no hit determination result is hit. As a result, in the time saving game state, when the hit determination result is a hit, the change pattern of the normal reach, which is a change pattern of a relatively short change time (5 seconds), is selected. You can move to jackpot games. Here, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the variation display in which the hit/miss determination result is a big hit is started in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation starts later. The special symbol is controlled so that it is forcibly determined to be the hit/miss judgment result. Therefore, when the hit/no hit determination result is a big hit, it is possible to prevent the game from being unnecessarily lengthened by selecting a relatively short variation time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured such that the variable display that is a big hit does not change at the same time, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and it is possible to display a variable display that is a big hit at the same time. When configured, the variable display time that is a jackpot of the second special symbol is shorter than the first special symbol (for example, 5 seconds) or extremely short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the first special The variation time which is a big hit of the symbol may be configured such that a variation time longer than the second special symbol (for example, 60 seconds) or an extremely long variation time (for example, 5 minutes) is selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to postpone the jackpot with the second special symbol which may determine the jackpot B, which is a type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, during which the second special It is possible to make a big hit with a design and give a big hit C to the player. In this case, when the jackpot is started with one special symbol, a configuration is conceivable in which the lottery game being changed with the other special symbol is invalidated. With such a configuration, the jackpot C, which is an unfavorable jackpot type, is given to the player, and the probability variation gaming state is set immediately after the probability variation gaming state is set, so that the probability variation gaming state ends in a short period of time. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the configuration described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed at the same time in a variable display in which the hit determination result is a big hit. In the configuration, the hit determination result in the first special symbol is a deviation. By setting the display time long (for example, 100 seconds), and setting the variation time per hit determination result in the second special symbol to be short (for example, 1 second), the first special symbol during the time saving game The number of times the lottery result is displayed can be reduced (the number of times the first special symbol is variably displayed) can be reduced, and the number of lottery with the second special symbol advantageous to the player can be increased. In addition, when the time saving number is set to be displayed until the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed 100 times, the variation time of the first special symbol is 100 times in succession due to deviation of the second special symbol. It is possible to effectively reduce the number of times the second special symbol is variably displayed during the time saving game by configuring the time longer than the time when the variable display is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12(a), it is one of the variation pattern selection tables 202d in which the variation pattern selected when the result of the determination whether or not the first special symbol in the time saving game state is out is set. The deviation (time saving) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the outlier (shortening) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d. In this deviation (time saving) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a deviation pattern with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds, a fluctuation pattern of normal reach with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, and a fluctuation time The special reach variation pattern configured for 30 seconds and the semi-long variation pattern configured for a variation time of 300 seconds are set by assigning the values of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 50", a far variation pattern is set, and for "51 to 100", the normal reach variation pattern is set. , “101 to 169”, the special reach variation pattern is set, and “170 to 198”, the semi-long variation pattern is set.

Here, in the time saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set high until the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100, and the opening time of the ordinary electric auditors role 640a is long. Ordinarily (0.2 seconds in normal time is extended to 1 second), and the number of times of opening is set to be large (1 time in normal time is 2 times). As a result, as a player, the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player (the jackpot C that can give the probability variation game state when a jackpot is surely decided) is variably displayed as many times as possible. Expect to play games. Therefore, in the outlier (time saving) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d, a special reach or semi-long variation pattern having a relatively long variation time is selected more than in the outlier (time saving) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d described later. It is set easily.

Therefore, the variation pattern of the first special symbol having a long variation time is often selected, and the number of times the first special symbol is varied in the time saving game state can be reduced. Therefore, in the case of a big hit during the time saving game state, the big hit C can be easily given to the player.

In the semi-long variation pattern, the symbol corresponding to the first special symbol keeps fluctuating at high speed for 300 seconds, and then stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the deviation. In addition, since the second special symbol described later is configured to easily select the variation pattern of the throat that is configured by the variation time of 5 seconds if the result of the hit determination is out during the time saving, the maximum is the second. It is possible to start 60 fluctuations with a special symbol. Therefore, the variation (lottery) in the second special symbol can be performed during the shorter time game more.

In the present embodiment, the semi-long variation time is set to 300 seconds, but the variation time is not limited to this, and the second special symbol may be configured to have a variation time that can vary up to a minimum of hourly times in a variation pattern. In addition to the semi-long, a variation pattern having a longer variation time may be set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12(b), the variation pattern selected when the result determination result of the second special symbol in the time saving game state is out (off time saving) special figure 2 variation pattern selection The table 202d will be described. FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (time saving) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 12(b), in the time saving game state, the deviation pattern of the second special symbol is composed of a fluctuation pattern of deviation of 5 seconds and a fluctuation time of 10 seconds. The normal reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern are set. "0-180" is set as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the outlying fluctuation pattern, and "181-198" is set as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the normal reach fluctuation pattern. It is set.

As a result, in the time saving game state, a variation pattern with a probability of 181/199 is selected with a probability of deviation of the second special symbol if the result of judgment is wrong. Therefore, since the variation of the second special symbol can be executed in a short time, more lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. Therefore, by utilizing the time saving game state, it is possible to give the player more advantageous lottery opportunities.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 12(c) to 13(c), a variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation patterns of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the probability variation gaming state will be described.

FIG. 12(c) is a deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table which is a variation pattern selection table 202d for selecting variation patterns when the result of determination of whether or not the first special symbol in the probability variation gaming state is out. It is 202d. FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d. In this deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a fluctuation pattern of deviation in which the fluctuation time is constituted by 5 seconds, a fluctuation pattern of long reach 1 constituted by fluctuation time of 30 seconds, and fluctuation time Of the long reach 2 composed of 100 seconds, the variation pattern of the long reach 3 composed of variation time of 500 seconds, and the variation pattern of the long reach 4 composed of variation time of 1000 seconds, respectively. , The variation type counter CS1 is set. To be more specific, the variation pattern of the variation type counter CS1 is set to “0 to 10”, and the variation pattern of the long reach 1 is set to “11 to 120”. The variation pattern of long reach 2 is set for “121 to 149”, the variation pattern of long reach 3 is set for “150 to 189”, and the variation pattern of “190 to 198” is set. The variation pattern of long reach 4 is set.

As described above, the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d is set so that the variation pattern having the variation time of 30 seconds or more is selected at a ratio of 188/199. Therefore, in the probability variation game state, the variation display of the first special symbol is relatively easy to select a variation pattern of a relatively long variation time (30 seconds or more), and the variation number of the first special symbol is small. In addition, as will be described later, in the probability variation game state, the variation time when the result of the determination whether or not the second special symbol is incorrect is set so that the variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected at a rate of 151/199. It is set so that the variation time extremely shorter than that of the first special symbol is selected.

Therefore, in the probability variation game state, the number of times of fluctuation of the second special symbol is large as compared with the first special symbol. In addition, in the probability variation game state, the normal electric auditors product 640a is set to be easily activated in the second starting opening 640 that triggers the start of variation of the second special symbol (execution of lottery), and thus the game ball is the first. It is configured to be easier to enter than the starting opening 64. Thereby, it is possible to increase the number of times the second special symbol changes more than the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to give many opportunities for variation (lottery) in the second special symbol, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, the probability-varied game state can be continued for a longer period and given to the player.

With reference to FIG. 13(a), a variation (selection variation) special figure 1 variation which is a variation pattern selection table 202d for selecting a variation pattern when the hit determination result of the first special symbol in the probability variation gaming state is a hit. The pattern selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit (probable variation) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d. In this hit (probable variation) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d, a special 1 variation pattern having a variation time of 3 seconds and a special 2 variation pattern having a variation time of 30 seconds are each a variation type counter. It is set corresponding to the value of CS1. Specifically, the special 1 variation pattern is set for the value “0 to 190” of the variation type counter CS1, and the special 2 variation pattern is set to “191 to 198”.

In this way, in the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the probability variation gaming state, either one of the variation time of 3 seconds and the variation time of 30 seconds is configured to be selected. Since the variation time of 3 seconds is mainly selected, if the jackpot B is determined by using these 3 seconds, the ending of the probability variation period that indicates the end of the probability variation gaming state. The display mode is displayed. On the other hand, when the special 2 variation pattern is selected and the big hit B is determined, the effect that the probability variation period remains for up to 30 seconds is executed. Further, in the special 2 variation pattern, the ending effect similar to that of the special 1 variation pattern may be executed when the remaining variation time is 3 seconds.

In addition, when the variation pattern of special 1 and special 2 is selected and the big hit A is determined, the effect indicating that the probability variation gaming state continues is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, an effect in which the counter indicating the remaining time of the probability variation period shown in FIG. 5A is stopped is executed, or an effect is added in which the remaining time of the probability variation period is not 0 seconds. Furthermore, once the ending is executed and the end of the probability variation period is informed, there is a case where a recovery effect is performed to show the player that it is restored and the probability variation period is set again.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13(b), the variation pattern selection table 202d in which the variation pattern to be selected when the result determination result of the second special symbol in the probability variation gaming state is out (displacement) The special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d. In this deviation (probability change) special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a fluctuation pattern of deviation 1 composed of a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds and a fluctuation pattern of deviation 2 composed of a fluctuation time of 3 seconds A variation pattern of normal reach composed of a variation time of 10 seconds and a variation pattern of super reach composed of a variation time of 20 seconds are set corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, a deviation pattern of "1" is set for the value "0-150" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, a fluctuation pattern of "2" is set for "151-170", and a fluctuation pattern of "171-171" is set. The normal reach variation pattern is set for "190", and the super reach variation pattern is set for "191 to 198".

In this way, the variation pattern selected when the hit determination result of the second special symbol in the probability variation gaming state is out, the variation pattern of out of 1 with a variation time of 0.5 seconds at a rate of 151/199 is selected. Will be done. Therefore, in the second special symbol, since the variation pattern of the extremely short variation time is selected as compared with the first special symbol when the result of the hit determination is out, it is configured to be more than the first special symbol. The number of times the second special symbol changes can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chance of lottery with the second special symbol, and increase the chance of being awarded the jackpot C to the player. Therefore, the jackpot C is continuously determined, and the period in which the probability variation gaming state is continuously imparted can be lengthened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13(c), the variation pattern selection table 202d in which the variation pattern that is selected when the result determination result of the second special symbol in the probability variation gaming state is a hit (probability variation The special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit (probability variation) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d. In the hit (probable variation) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern of normal reach composed of a variation time of 10 seconds, a variation pattern of super reach composed of a variation time of 20 seconds, and a variation time of 30 seconds And the variation pattern of the special reach constituted by (1) are set respectively corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the change pattern of the normal reach is set for the value of the change type counter CS1 of "0 to 150", the change pattern of the super reach is set to "151 to 190", and the special pattern is set to "191 to 198". Each reach variation pattern is set.

In this way, in the probability variation game state, when the winning/discarding determination result of the second special symbol is a hit, a variation pattern having a variation time of 10 seconds or more is selected. If the second special symbol is a hit, the jackpot C that can be given the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game is always determined, so using the variation time set in the variation pattern, the probability variation It is possible to perform various notification effects for the period. Specifically, an effect such as temporarily stopping a counter indicating the remaining time (period) of the probability variation period or adding a time of 10 seconds or more, as shown in FIG. 5A, is executed. It Here, if it is a notification effect indicating that the probability variation game state is continued for a long time, it can be appropriately executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be variable at the same time, and when a variation that is a big hit is started in one of them, in the other special symbol. It is configured to start the variable display forcibly being disengaged. In this configuration, when the jackpot in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, by setting to change the selection ratio of the type of jackpot that can be given a probability variation gaming state, For the player in the lottery between the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, the advantage and disadvantage are set to be different, and the deviation variation time of the disadvantageous special symbol is easily set to be long. It is possible to give a lot of advantageous lottery to the player by configuring to execute a lot of lottery in a short time with a special symbol that is advantageous to.

Further, when the probability variation gaming state, one special symbol (in the present embodiment, the first special symbol), the jackpot type to which the normal gaming state is given is set, and the other special symbol (present embodiment) In the form, in the second special symbol), by setting so that the probability variation gaming state is always set, it is possible to vary the period during which the variation of the deviation is executed in the special symbol to which the normal gaming state is given. The player can be notified as a period in which the gaming state continues.

Furthermore, whether or not a holding ball for which a jackpot B (a jackpot type to which a normal gaming state is given) is determined is stored in the holding ball of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a described later. It is possible to determine the time until the big hit B stops changing as the maximum remaining period of the probability variation period, and perform the notification effect to the player for the remaining period of the probability variation within the maximum remaining period. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the probability variation period is preset. In addition, by configuring the notification effect of the remaining time of the probability variation period to be linked with the actual time and subtracted, the player can start changing the special symbol quickly and in a high probability state advantageous to the player. I can get excited to run lots of lottery. Therefore, a novel game effect can be provided to the player. In addition, by giving an effect that the remaining time of the probability variation period is added little by little, or by performing the effect of stopping the subtraction of the remaining time of the probability variation period, it is possible to give the player a sense of security that the probability variation game state continues for a long time. In addition to the jackpot, it is possible to perform an effect that makes the player expect.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the content of the rough fluctuation pattern, reach, non-reach, etc., and also determines the fluctuation time, and the detailed fluctuation pattern contents are Although it is configured to be determined by the MPU 221 of the lamp control device 113, the present invention is not limited to this, and the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 may be configured to determine the details of the detailed variation pattern (display contents of reach, etc.). Alternatively, the main control device 110 may be configured such that the voice lamp control device 113 or another control device executes the determination control for the variation pattern without determining the variation pattern.

It should be noted that "reach" means that there are many things in which the effect contents are different even in each reach.For example, in the super reach, a reach in which the rear image is rapidly changed and displayed, or a certain character is suddenly displayed. There is a reach to be displayed, and in addition to that, a plurality of reach with different effect contents are included, such as one to which a notice effect before the start of variable display is added, and one to which a big hit in re-variable display is added.

Returning to FIG. 9, description of various counters will be continued. The ordinary hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the sphere passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, it is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h (see FIG. 7) of the RAM 203. Then, the value of the random number that is a big hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal symbol per random number table 202c (FIG. 10(d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the normal per random number counter C4 is set. , If it matches the value of the random number that is a hit set by the normal symbol per random number table 202c (FIG. 10(d)), it is determined as the normal symbol hit.

Also, when the normal hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4. The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) in this embodiment, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening 67 (through gate). .. The number of random number values to be won is 24 in the normal gaming state, and the range is “5 to 28”. Further, in the high-probability game state, it is 200, and the range is "5-204". That is, in the normal game state, it is determined that the winning value is the normal random number counter C4 in the range of "5-28", in the high probability game state, the value of the normal random number counter C4 is acquired. Is determined to be in the range of "5-204", the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display unit 88, and the normal electric accessory 640a is displayed. When the blade 640a is in the normal game state, the opening operation is performed once for a predetermined time (1.2 s in the present embodiment), and in the high probability game state, the opening operation is performed twice for the predetermined time (1 s in the present embodiment). Done. The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 41).

When the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being displayed in a variable state, and if each counter value based on the reserved ball is not stored in the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203h, A random number value is acquired from the normal hit random number counter C4 in the normal symbol holding sphere execution area 203i, and is stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203i1. Further, in the case where the normal symbol (second symbol) is being variably displayed or the random number value corresponding to the reserved sphere stored in the ordinary symbol reserved sphere storage area 203h is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment). Is stored in the ordinary hit random number counter storage area 203h1 corresponding to the number of times of holding (normal symbol holding 1 to 4) corresponding to the random number value obtained from the normal hit random number counter C4. In addition, when a random number value is stored in each area, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to ON, the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped based on the random number value, or the previous one is held because the holding is exhausted. It is set to OFF when data is shifted into the area. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the reserved area newly shifted and stored is set to ON. Whether or not data is stored in the holding area, or whether or not the normal symbol is being variably displayed is executed depending on which holding area or the normal symbol flag of the execution area is turned on.

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display unit 88 can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, about the lottery of the first lottery game and the second lottery game, it is configured to select various common counter values, but the first lottery game (first special symbol) and the second lottery With the game (second special symbol), set various dedicated counters, and update different counters by changing the update timing and initial values of the various counters of the first lottery game and the second lottery game. Of course, the counter values may be configured.

By configuring in this way, in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the counter value is acquired at the same trigger, it is possible to acquire the counter value of a different value. It is possible to suppress a variation pattern selected by the 1 special symbol and the second special symbol, and a problem that the determination result of the winning or hitting is synchronized.

Even if the variation patterns are selected from the common variation pattern tables for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation pattern to be selected is prevented from being synchronized with each other, and various effects are produced. It can be performed. Further, it is possible to suppress the storage data of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and to have an inexpensive configuration (using a RAM or the like having a small storage area).

Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 9, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and I/O. And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. It should be noted that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power cutoff (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power-on by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 41), and each value written in the RAM 203 is restored in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 40). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

RAM203, 1st special design reservation sphere storage area 203a, 2nd special design reservation sphere storage area 203b, 1st special design reservation sphere execution area 203c, 2nd special design reservation sphere execution area 203d, 1st special design reservation sphere number Counter 203e, second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f, ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203g, ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203h, ordinary symbol holding ball execution area 203i, ordinary symbol flag 203j, time reduction counter 203k, after jackpot state area , Jackpot flag 203o, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s, rearrangement pending storage area 203t, state setting area 203u, abnormality It has at least a monitoring flag 203v and other memory area 203z.

The first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on winning the first starting opening 64 up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). is there. In addition, the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b stores various counter values acquired based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting opening 640 up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). This is a storage area for

The first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops variable display, the first special symbol When various counter values are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol, and the details are the same as the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. ..

The first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserve sphere execution area 203c, the second special symbol reserve sphere execution area 203d, for the counter with the detection of the start winning The values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired from the buffer (see FIG. 9) are stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first starting opening 64 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), the MPU 201 acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer, and the first The special winning random number counter storage area 203a1, the special winning type counter storage area 203a2, and the variation type counter storage area 203a4 of the holding ball storage area 203a are stored. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second starting opening 640, the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer, and the corresponding values are obtained, as in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. It is similarly stored in each area (not shown).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, it performs the jackpot lottery, the first symbol display device 37 or the process of setting the display of the third symbol display device 81, or the like described above. Among the data (each value of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1) corresponding to each starting winning stored in the special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a and the second special symbol holding sphere storing area 203b, it corresponds to one starting winning. Data is shifted to this special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. The shift in this embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reservation sphere number counter 203e, the second special symbol reservation sphere number counter 203f, the first start detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) that is regularly executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning in the mouth 64 or the second starting opening 640, the number of balls to hold (the number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (the variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed on the first symbol display device 37. Each is a counter that counts up to four times. The first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e and the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203f are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process (FIG. 40, S1242) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the winning a prize for start is detected and the number of balls held in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203a, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed.

Further, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of holding balls) is a counter value in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a based on the game ball winning the first starting opening 64. When is stored, the voice lamp controller 113 is notified by the first special symbol holding ball number command output from the main controller 110. The first special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. Is.

Further, the value of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203f (that is, the number of reserve balls) is based on the game ball winning the second starting opening 640, the counter value in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b When is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f is incremented by 1. Is.

MPU201, when the respective values of the counters C1 to C2, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer are stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, respectively, Data stored in the 1 special symbol reserve sphere execution area 203c or the second special symbol reserve sphere execution area 203d, the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, In S206), the jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, by the control of the main control device 110, a variable display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

The fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, by the control of the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, the variable display effect is performed based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is a game ball passing through the normal symbol starting opening 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) that is regularly executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter, "start prize"). Based on that), the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the second symbol display unit 88 of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display effect performed by the second symbol display device 88). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) up to 4 times each. This normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is a counter that stores the total number of holding balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67. Zero is set as an initial value by the initial setting process (S1242 in FIG. 40) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls held for variable display is increased, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203g is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed (see FIG. 35, S1169).

The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h is a storage area in which the normal hit random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 9) is stored along with the detection of the starting winning into the normal symbol starting opening 67. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), the normal hit random number counter C4 of the counter buffer is detected. The value is acquired and stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203h1 of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h. The normal symbol flag 203j is set to ON in the normal symbol flag storage area 203h2 and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h has four holding areas so that the data corresponding to one starting winning (the value of the counter C4, the normal symbol flag 203j) can be stored (held) up to four times. There is. In the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h, the data of the holding spheres in the order of passing through the normal symbol starting port 67 (start winning) is stored in order from the holding area in which the data is vacant in the earliest order to be consumed. To be done.

Further, the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i, when it is detected that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol based on the starting winning, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol hit lottery or the first. It is a memory for storing data (value of the counter C4) to be referred in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) on the symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol, the winning lottery and the setting of the display of the second symbol display unit 88 or the second symbol display device 88 are executed. In the data (value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary) corresponding to each starting winning stored in the above-mentioned ordinary symbol holding sphere storing area 203h, the data corresponding to one starting winning is the ordinary symbol holding sphere. Shift to execution area 203i. The shift in this embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol flag 203j is a flag indicating that the data for the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored and is held, and is also a flag indicating that the normal symbol is being variably displayed. It is set to ON when the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere execution area 203i or the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h. Further, when the value of the normal hit counter C4 is shifted to the next holding area (the holding area corresponding to the holding number obtained by reducing the holding number by one when the holding is exhausted), the value of the holding area before the shift is changed. The normal symbol flag 203j is set to OFF, while the normal symbol flag 203j of the reserved area shifted and stored is set to ON. Further, when the variable display of the normal symbol is subjected to the fluctuation stop process, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to OFF.

The hour/hour counter 203k is a counter area in which the hour/hour count 100 is set after the 15R normal jackpot game is executed. When the time saving number is set, until the time saving number is set to 0, the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability is set in the normal symbol per random number table 202c. Further, when the symbol "○" indicating the hit of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display portion 88, the opening time of the blade of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is longer than that in the normal game state (1s in the present embodiment). The operation of opening is repeated twice. This gaming state is hereinafter referred to as a time saving gaming state.

The time saving counter 203k is decremented by 1 each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and stopped, and when the value of the time saving counter 203k becomes 0, the time saving gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and the normal symbol. The normal symbol per random number table for low probability of the hit random number counter 202c is set, and when the symbol "○" indicating the hit of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display portion 88, the opening time is 0.2 s. The blade of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is opened by setting the number of times of opening once.

The jackpot after-state area 203m is a storage area in which the gaming state (time saving gaming state, probability variation gaming state) set when the jackpot is executed is stored. In the initial setting, data corresponding to the time saving game state is stored, and data corresponding to the probability variation game state is stored based on the fact that the game ball enters the second specific entrance 650a during the jackpot game. It Thereby, even if the big hit A or C that allows the game ball to enter the second specific entrance 650a is executed, the data set in the big hit post state area 203m becomes the data corresponding to the time saving game state, 2 By the game ball entering the specific entrance 650a, the data corresponding to the probability variation gaming state is set (overwritten). As a result, unless a game ball enters the second specific ball entrance 650a, it can be configured not to shift to the probability variation game state, and whether or not the game ball enters the second specific ball entrance 650a. The player can expect the game to be played.

The big hit flag 203o is turned on when it is determined that the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired based on winning in the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 640 is a win at the start of fluctuation. This is the flag that is set. Also, when the jackpot game is over, it is set to off. In addition, it is composed of a flag that can identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit. Specifically, it is made up of 2 bits, and the jackpot flag 203o is set to "10" for the first special symbol, and the jackpot flag 203o is set to "01" for the second special symbol, When "00", the big hit flag 203o is set to OFF.

Here, the jackpot flag 203o is commonly used by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so at the start of fluctuation, one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to ON first. In the case where the other lottery result is a big hit, the big hit flag 203o is not overwritten, and the other lottery result is processed in the same manner as a win. Thereby, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to process so that the variable display that is a big hit is not executed at the same time.

That is, when the variation display that is a big hit is started with one of the special symbols, the variation display that is a big hit is not started on the other, and only the out-of-phase variation mode is displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured with the common big hit flag 203o, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol each have an independent big hit flag. Then, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that the variable display which is a big hit is executed at the same time. With such a configuration, the first special symbol during the probability variation gaming state, even if the variation display that is the big hit B is started, the variation time is set long, and the short variation in the second special symbol By making the lottery easy in time, it is possible to easily make a big hit with the second special symbol until the big hit B is started. Therefore, by executing an effect that informs the player of the time until the jackpot B is started (that is, the period until the probability variation gaming state ends), the player is rushed to win the jackpot with the second special symbol. It is possible to execute an effect that causes a game to be performed. Therefore, the player can be provided with a fresh effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the second special symbol is started to be executed while the first special symbol is variably displayed. In S1005 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S207) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. Further, in the process of S613 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 25, S204), it is set to OFF.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q is a flag that indicates that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. In S605 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 25, S294) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. Further, in the process of S1012 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S207), it is set to OFF.

Special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. When the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S507 in FIG. 24). After that, in the processing of S602 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 25, S204), the counter value (in this embodiment, one by one) corresponding to the elapsed fluctuation time is subtracted and updated.

Special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. When the variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S907 in FIG. 28). Then, in the process of S1002 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S207), the counter value (in this embodiment, one by one) corresponding to the elapsed fluctuation time is subtracted and updated.

The rearrangement storage area 203t is the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114). It is a storage area in which each determination result determined based on each data of the holding areas 1 to 4 stored in is stored.

FIG. 17A is a diagram schematically showing the rearrangement storage area 203t. The rearrangement storage area 203t corresponds to a pending data storage area in which each determination data corresponding to each of the numbers of holdings in the holding areas 1 to 8 is stored, and a first special symbol and a second special symbol that are being variably displayed. And a changing data storage area in which each determination data to be stored is stored.

In each of the holding areas 1 to 8 of the pending data, the judgment result storage area 203t1, the big hit type storage area 203t2, the variation pattern type storage area 203t3, the variation order storage area 203t4, the variation start time storage area 203t5, the prefetch probability variation flag 203t6. Are provided respectively. It should be noted that the holding areas 1 to 8 are stored in order from the holding area 1 in the order in which the respective holding balls are established (a total formation order in which the first starting opening 64 and the second starting opening 640 are combined). That is, the holding areas 1 to 8 show the order in which the holding balls are established in the pachinko machine 10 by combining the holding balls of the first special symbol and the holding balls of the second special symbol.

In the variable display data storage area, a win/fail judgment result storage area 203t1, a big hit type storage area 203t2, a variation pattern storage area 203t3, and a pre-reading probability variation flag 203t6 are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Has been.

The hit determination result storage area 203t1 is, in the first prefetching process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 33, S1114), the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b. This is a storage area in which the result of previously determining whether or not the special winning random number counter C1 stored in is stored.

Big hit type storage area 203t2, in the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114), in the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b It is a storage area in which the big hit type determined by the stored special hit type counter C2 is stored.

The variation pattern type storage area 203t3 is a first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or a second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114). This is a storage area in which the types of fluctuation patterns determined based on the various data stored in are stored. This variation pattern is data that can identify which variation pattern is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the data in the reserved area is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is also used as data for identifying whether or not this is data.

The variable display order storage area 203t4 is the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114). This is a storage area in which the actual variable display start order in the determined holding areas 1 to 8 is stored based on various data stored in. The fluctuation display start order is specifically determined by calculating the fluctuation start time of a newly stored holding ball and comparing it with the fluctuation start time of each previously stored holding ball. ..

The fluctuation start time storage area 203t5 is the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114). This is a storage area for storing the time until the actual display of the respective data in the holding areas 1 to 8 calculated based on the various data stored in FIG. When the variable display start time is stored in the holding area, it is updated at any time in the other process (S112) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The prefetch probability change flag storage area 203t6 is turned on when it is determined that the type of the stored jackpot type storage area 203k2 is the jackpot A or the jackpot C in the first prefetch update process (FIG. 32, S1133) described later. Is a storage area that is set and stored. Further, the pre-reading probability change flag storage area 203t6 is set to OFF every time the data is shifted and stored in the upper reserved area, because the area before the shift is cleared to 0. In other words, the pre-reading probability variation flag storage area 203u6 which has been set to ON once is shifted to the changing data storage area, and new data is overwritten (shifted) in the changing data storage area to be set to OFF. .. Further, when the game machine is powered on and the RAM clear process is executed, it is set to OFF as an initial value.

Each data in the rearrangement storage area 203t is backed up and stored in a backup area (not shown) of the RAM 203 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. Then, when the power is turned on again, it is read from the stored backup area and set.

The state setting area 203u is a storage area in which the current game state is stored. In this embodiment, based on the data stored in the post-big hit state setting area 203m after the big hit game, the data corresponding to the game state is set in the state setting area 203u, so that the game state after the big hit is switched. Is set. Further, in the time saving game state, when a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) is executed, the data corresponding to the normal game state is set in the state setting area 203u, so that the game state is changed. The time saving game state is shifted to the normal game state. In the initialized state, data corresponding to the normal gaming state is set.

The abnormality monitoring flag 203v is a flag for determining whether or not the player is playing the game in a correct game method corresponding to the current game state.

It is correct to execute the right-handed game in the probability variation game state or the time saving game state (except during the jackpot game). In this case, it is usual that the lottery is executed with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but during the period when the game is executed only with the second special symbol, it is an illegal game method. There is a possibility that you are playing a game. Therefore, this abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON. As will be described later, when the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON, a period during which the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is continuously set to ON is measured by an abnormality monitoring counter (not shown), and a predetermined time (in the present embodiment, , 20 seconds) or more, abnormality notification (display of voice and warning image) is executed.

Also, in the normal game state, it is the correct game method to play the game by left-handing, but the game ball enters the normal symbol starting opening 67 that should only enter by right-handing, and the normal symbol has changed. When the determination is made, the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON, and the abnormality notification is executed.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

In this way, when a game ball is won in the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 640 and a holding ball is generated, each holding ball is formed by combining the first starting opening 64 and the second starting opening 640. Various determination data of the reserved ball is stored. Therefore, the winning command is generated based on the rearrangement storage area 203u, the voice lamp control device 113, based on the winning command, the holding of the combination of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is established. It is possible to generate a command to be output to the display control device 114 so as to display the reserved symbols in order. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in the order of establishment of the reservation, which is a combination of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, since the variable display start order of each hold is also discriminated and stored in association with the established order, the voice lamp control device 113 also receives the winning command by generating the winning command based on the variable display start order. Based on the received winning command, it is possible to determine the order of establishment of each hold and the actual start order of variable display.

In addition, since the variable start time of each hold is stored in each hold area and that time is managed (updated as time passes), the change display start order of newly stored hold data can be easily performed. Can be determined.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display part 88, and the opening/closing drive to the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to them via the input/output port 205.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variable display ( This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it is displayed in the winning order displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. The audio output device 226 is controlled so that the displayed reserved symbol display is rearranged and displayed in the variable display start order, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

A vibration sensor (not shown) is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, since the winning of the winning hole is an important factor that determines the gaming state, it is necessary to prevent the player from intentionally winning the winning hole by changing the flow of the ball by vibration. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that the pachinko machine 10 is vibrated by the player or the like, an error command for notifying the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 determines an error in accordance with the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and issues an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, control for displaying an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay is performed.

<About the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. At least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an addition time selection table 222b are set in the ROM 222.

The fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining the detailed contents of the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110. This fluctuation pattern selection table 222a corresponds to the fluctuation time and the rough fluctuation pattern (reach, non-reach, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and a plurality of kinds of fluctuation contents (for example, fluctuations). One variation content is determined from the reach variation patterns with different display content of the reach A to D configured with the same time and the same determination result.

The addition time selection table 222b is for determining the addition time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the addition time (the extended display time shown in FIG. 5B) with respect to the remaining time of the probability variation period. It is a data table. The addition time is set in the addition time selection table 222b corresponding to each addition time. It should be noted that the addition time is the maximum time until the fluctuation display of the big hit B is started, and when the selected addition time exceeds the maximum time, it is set in the addition time selection table 222b. It is controlled so that a large value within the maximum time is selected from among the added times that are set.

In the present embodiment, the time until the fluctuation of the first special symbol that becomes the big hit B is set as the start time, but the time until the fluctuation of the first special symbol that becomes the big hit B stops is the maximum time. May be configured as.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, the command storage area 223a, the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b1, the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223d1, the special figure 2 variation start flag 223c1, the sub-special figure 1 variation stop flag 223c2, the second special symbol On-hold ball number counter 223d1, dependent feature 2 variation stop flag 223d2, dependent feature 1 variation time counter 223e, dependent feature 2 variation time counter 223f, performance counter 223g, dependent state setting area 223h, probability variation upper limit storage area 223i, At least the probability variation period storage area 223j, the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k, the update stop flag 223m, and the other memory area 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until a process for the command is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 46) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination processing is executed. , The command is analyzed, and the process according to the command is performed.

Outside 1 special symbol reservation sphere number counter 223b1 is, like the first special symbol reservation sphere counter 203a of the main controller 110, the first special performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) It is a variable display of symbols (dynamic display), and is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting number) of the variable display effect held in the main controller 110 up to four times at maximum.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223b2 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. Is set (step S1502 in FIG. 46). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S1612).

The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. Is set to (step S1505 in FIG. 46). On the other hand, when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81, it is turned off (FIG. 48, S1617).

The subordinate figure 1 stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received ( FIG. 46, S1508). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S1622).

The sub-special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 223c2 is a flag indicating the content of the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p in the main control device 110. As a result, the changing state of Toku-zu 1 can be determined by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The second special symbol reservation sphere counter 223d1 is the second special performed in the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the second special symbol reservation sphere counter 203a of the main controller 110. It is a variable display of symbols (dynamic display), and is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting number) of the variable display effect held in the main controller 110 up to four times at maximum.

The second stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to ON when the second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received (FIG. 46). , S1508). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S1622).

The sub-special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 223d2 is a flag indicating the content of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q in the main control device 110. As a result, the changing state of Toku-zu 2 can be determined by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

Sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

Sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223f is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

The effect counter 223g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, selecting an addition time from the addition time selection table 222b, and the like. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Each time the main process is executed, it is incremented by 1 and updated.

Data corresponding to the status command output from the main controller 110 is set in the slave status setting area 223h. Based on the data set in the sub-state setting area 223h, the current gaming state can also be determined by the voice lamp control device 113. The state setting command is output from the main control unit 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backup game state can be determined by the voice lamp control unit 113.

The probability variation upper limit storage area 223i is a storage area in which the time until the variation that becomes the big hit B of the first special symbol is started is stored. In addition, when the holding ball which is the big hit B is not stored in the holding ball of the first special symbol, the time until the fluctuation of the last holding ball of the stored holding balls of the stored first special symbol is ended. It is stored in the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i.

As shown in FIG. 9B, the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k has the same data as the rearrangement storage area 203u of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 based on the winning command output from the main controller 110. Is a storage area that is stored based on the winning command output from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113.

FIG. 9B is a diagram schematically showing the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k. The subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k stores a variety of data of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which are being variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the holding area of the pending data from the holding area 1 to the holding area 8. And a storage area for data during variable display. Each of the holding areas includes a win/fail judgment result storage area 223k1, a big hit type storage area 223k2, a variation pattern type storage area 223k3, a variation order storage area 223k4, a variation start time storage area 223k5, a subordinate reading probability variation flag storage area 223k6, and a rearrangement flag 223k7. And each data extracted from the received winning command is stored in the corresponding holding area. Also, every time a display variation pattern command for starting the variable display of the special symbol is generated, the data of the reservation area of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is shifted and stored in the previous reservation area. The reserved data in the reserved area 1 is a storage area for the changing data of the first special symbol in the case of the first special symbol, and a changing data of the second special symbol in the case of the second special symbol. Each is shifted and stored in the storage area.

The hit determination result storage area 223k1 is, in the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914), the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b. This is a storage area in which the result of previously determining whether or not the special winning random number counter C1 stored in is stored is extracted from the received winning command and stored. The information on the hit/miss judgment result extracted from the winning command is one of the hit/no hit judgment result storage areas of the holding areas 1 to 8 corresponding to the number of holdings (corresponding holding area of the rearrangement holding storage area 203u of the main controller 110). It is stored in 223k1.

The jackpot type storage area 223k2, in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914), in the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b This is a storage area in which the jackpot type determined by the stored special winning type counter C2 is extracted from the received winning command and stored.

The variation pattern type storage area 223k3 is the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914). This is a storage area in which the type of variation pattern determined based on various data stored in is extracted from the received winning command and stored. This variation pattern is data that can identify which variation pattern is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the data in the reserved area is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is also used as data for identifying whether or not this is data.

The variable order storage area 223k4 is the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914). This is a storage area in which the actual variable display start order in the determined holding areas 1 to 8 is extracted from the received winning command and stored based on various stored data.

The fluctuation start time storage area 223k5 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914). Is a storage area in which the calculated time until each data in the holding areas 1 to 8 actually starts variable display is extracted from the received winning command and stored. .. The variable display start time, when stored in the holding area, is updated at any time in the holding number display processing (FIG. 35, S1406) of the main processing (FIG. 35, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. It

In the present embodiment, the winning command is a command indicating the time until the calculated respective data of the holding areas 1 to 8 actually start the variable display. Each counter value for calculating the time (for example, the type of the selected fluctuation pattern, the counter value for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol in fluctuation (interruption count, etc.)), and fluctuation display start It may be a command corresponding to the time until.

The subordinate read probability variation flag storage area 223k6 is a storage area that is set to ON and stored when the type of the stored jackpot type storage area 223k2 is 15R certainty variation jackpot or 2R certainty variation jackpot.

The rearrangement flag 223k7 indicates that the player operates the frame button 22 to request the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display (a reserved symbol display displayed when the frame button 22 is operated). It is a flag.

In this way, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63a and a reserved ball occurs, based on the data extracted from the winning command, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. Various determination data of each reserved ball is stored according to the order of establishment of the reserved balls including the above. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113, based on the data of the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k, the display control device to perform the hold symbol display in the order of establishment of the hold, which is the combination of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A command to be output to 114 can be generated. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in the order of establishment of the reservation, which is a combination of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, based on the winning command, the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k is updated with the data synchronized with the rearrangement storage area 203u of the main controller 110, and the suspension data is changed (new suspension is established). Also, the data can be sequentially synchronized and updated.

The other memory area 223m is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch (see FIGS. 3 and 122) (see FIG. 3). The RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253 is provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline thereof, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors and the like, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

When a power failure occurs, MPU 201 of main controller 110 stores each data in rearrangement storage area 203u in the backup area of RAM 203 as backup data. Then, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 again, each backed up data in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u is read out from the backup area, and the respective pending areas corresponding to the rearrangement pending storage area 203u or in transition. It is stored in the data storage area.

Then, in the start-up process (FIG. 32), based on the rearrangement-reserved storage area 203u in which the backed-up data is read and stored, as in the winning command generated in the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S939). All winning commands are generated and output to the voice lamp control device 113, so that data that is synchronized with the same rearrangement pending storage area 203u is also set in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k.

Further, in the start-up process (FIG. 32), by transmitting a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113, the data in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u and the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k can be restored even after a power failure. Although the configuration for synchronizing has been described, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is not limited to this, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 backs up each data in the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k to the RAM 223 when a power failure occurs. Of course, it may be configured to be stored as.

The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 has the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3) pressed when the power is turned on (the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122)). In this case, it is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to main controller 110. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 executes control processing such as detection of winning of a special symbol or normal symbol, and various lottery such as selection of winning or variation pattern for the winning. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably execute the control of the pachinko machine 10, as in the present embodiment, a lottery on whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is performed as a sub-control. The control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device.

The control boards of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are covered with a box (box) which is called a board box and is composed of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member. The substrate box is crimped by a member for preventing fraud called a "sealing member" so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated from each other. Generally, when the base member and the lid member are fitted to each other, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member (or Therefore, it is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method of leaving an unopened mark such as breaking the member forming the through hole or breaking the sealing member. ..

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a ROM 234, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a model having a completely same design as the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model having a different winning probability for the jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, various processes are executed according to the control program stored in the ROM 234.

As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234. The ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 at any time, and controls the display of the third symbol display device 81.

When the game ball enters the distribution device 630, is distributed by the passive distribution member 640, and the game ball wins the first starting opening 63a, each counter value (C1 to C3 and CS1) is acquired and acquired. Based on each counter value, after the determination of the lottery and the variation pattern, etc., the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first lottery game is the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Variable display (dynamic display). Further, during the variable display of the first special symbol, when the game ball enters the distribution device 630, the game ball is distributed by the passive distribution device 640 and wins the second starting opening 63b. When the game ball wins the second starting opening 63b, each counter value (C1 to C3) for the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second lottery machine, as in the case of winning the first starting opening 63a. And CS1) are acquired, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are configured such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously varied. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, of the two 7-segment LEDs of the 7-segment display 37b, the left 7-segment LED, the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, the right 7 In the segment LED, the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 5A, the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed in the left display region Dm1, and the second special symbol is displayed in the right display region Dm2. The variable display corresponding to the symbol is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the player can efficiently execute the first lottery game and the second lottery game. ..

When the game ball wins the first starting opening 63a during the variable display of the first special symbol (the remaining variable time is set), the respective counter values (C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired based on the winning. Since the first lottery game which variably displays the lottery result cannot be executed immediately, each counter value is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a, a mode showing the number of reserved "1" of the first special symbols of the plurality of light emitting diodes 37a of the first symbol display device 37 (for example, one The light emitting diode lights up in red). When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the value of the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is updated (the number of holding spheres is incremented by 1).

When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 outputs a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113. The winning command can identify which of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b is the winning, and the number of reserved balls (reserved number) can be identified.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning command command, it extracts holding information such as the number of holdings and information about the winning opening from the received command, and based on the holding information, the third symbol display device. A process of displaying the reserved symbol in the corresponding reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the lower display area Ds at 81 is executed. As for this reservation design, as shown in Figure 5 (b), if it is the reservation design which corresponds to the reservation information of the 1st special design (1st starting mouth 63a), “O”, 2nd special design (the 2nd starting) If it is a hold symbol corresponding to the hold information of the mouth 63b), "●" is displayed for each hold information (one hold symbol for each hold).

Similarly, during the variable display of the second special symbol (the remaining variable time is set), each counter value is acquired when the game ball wins the second starting opening 63b, the second special symbol reserve ball storage area It is stored (stored) in 203b, and the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f is updated. Then, the hold symbol indicating that the hold information is stored in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

The reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed in a comprehensive winning order in which the game balls that have won the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are combined. The example shown in FIG. 18 will be specifically described. This is, first, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed, the first special symbol has a variation time of 10s remaining, the second special symbol has a variation time of 5s remaining Showing. In the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, the holding symbol indicating that it is the holding information of the second special symbol in the holding symbol display area Ds1 (holding information based on winning in the second starting opening 63b). "", the holding symbol "○" indicating that the holding symbol display area Ds2 is the holding information of the first special symbol, the holding symbol "○" indicating that it is the holding information of the second special symbol in the holding symbol display area Ds3 "," is displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds4, which is a reserved symbol "○" indicating that it is the reserved information of the first special symbol. In this case, it is shown that the order of winning in the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b is in the order of the reserved symbol display area Ds1 from the reserved symbol display area Ds1 in ascending order.

In other words, after the game ball is won in the second starting port 63b, the first starting port 63a is won, then the second starting port 63b, then the first starting port 63a is won. It shows that it did.

As shown in FIG. 18, each suspension data is stored in advance by predicting the variation time of the variation pattern selected when the suspension starts to vary (the type of the determined variation pattern is stored. Has been). Then, since the second special symbol is stored in the first winning order (in the rearrangement storage area 203u, the storage area 1 corresponds), the second special symbol that is currently displayed in a variably manner remains. When the variable time (5 s) has elapsed, the variable display starts, so the variable display start time is calculated to be 5 seconds later. Also, since the first special symbol is stored in the second winning order (the rearrangement storage area 203u corresponds to the retaining area 2), the remaining of the first special symbol which is currently displayed in a variable manner. When the variable time (10 s) has elapsed, the variable display starts, and the variable display start time is calculated to be 10 seconds later. Next, since the second special symbol is stored in the third winning order (in the rearrangement storage area 203u, the storage area 3 corresponds), the second special symbol is currently displayed. When the variation time (40 s) of the pending data stored in the first winning order has elapsed in the remaining variation time (5 s), the variation display starts, so the variation display start time is calculated to be 45 seconds later. Next, since the first special symbol is stored in the fourth winning order (in the rearrangement storage area 203u, the storage area 4 is applicable), the first special symbol currently being displayed is changed. When the fluctuation time (10s) of the pending data stored second in the winning order elapses in the remaining fluctuation time (10s), the fluctuation display starts, so the fluctuation display start time is calculated as 20 seconds later.

In this way, in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u, the variable display start times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are calculated in the order in which they are established, and the variable display start time is in the descending order based on the variable display start time. In, the variable display order is assigned.

At this timing, when the player operates the frame button 22, the reserved symbol display of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in the rearrangement display mode shown in FIG. 18, the fourth special symbol in the winning order is reserved. The symbol display is rearranged with the reserved symbol display of the second special symbol of the third winning order (the reserved symbol display of the fourth winning order is interrupted before the reserved symbol display of the third winning order).

FIG. 19 shows the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S907) by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when a game ball wins the first starting opening 63a after 1 s from the state of FIG. 27, S914) is a diagram schematically showing a process of determining a variable display start order of newly stored reserved symbols.

Since FIG. 19 is a state after 1 s from FIG. 18, the first special symbol in the variable display has a remaining fluctuation time of 9 s, and the second special symbol has a remaining fluctuation time of 4 s. Further, the fluctuation start time of each holding area of the rearrangement holding storage area 203u is also updated.

The newly established first starting opening 63a (first special symbol) is reserved in the fifth winning order, and in the rearrangement storage area 203u, each data is stored in the storage area 5. First, the same as the newly stored first special symbol, the remaining variation time of the first special symbol in the variable display, the variation time of the suspension of the first special symbol of the winning order 2 and 4 are added respectively, and newly. The time when the hold of the established (stored) first special symbol becomes the variable display start is calculated (in this case, 24 s).

Next, as shown in the rearrangement schematic diagram of FIG. 19, the rearranged order (variable display start order) is re-arranged based on the variable display start time of each holding area. At this time, when the player operates the frame button 22 and requests the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display, as shown in the display mode after rearrangement of FIG. 19, the fourth and fifth reserved symbols in the winning order are displayed. Is displayed in rearrangement with the third winning symbol display in the winning order (the winning symbol display of the fourth and fifth winning symbols is interrupted before the displaying of the third winning symbol in the winning order).

In this way, each time a hold occurs, the variable display start time is calculated, and the sorting order is determined in advance, so that the player can perform an operation (operation of the frame button 22) requesting sorting. In this case, the reserved symbol display after rearrangement can be promptly displayed.

Further, the variation patterns of the 15R certainty variation jackpot and the 15R regular jackpot are likely to be longer than the variation pattern selected when the variation time is out of sync. As shown in FIG. 19, the variation time of the first winning order hold is 40 seconds, which is long. Therefore, the hold of the same second special symbol that is established after that, the variable display start time is later than the hold of the first special symbol that was established later, and when rearranged, a long variable time is selected. Behind the pending symbol display that is present, a type (difference between the first special symbol and the second special symbol) that is different from the pending that the long variation time is selected is collectively displayed. Therefore, the greater the number of reserved symbol displays that are displayed by being interrupted in the subsequent reserved symbol display area of the reserved symbol display, the more the player holds the expectation of a big hit for the previous reserved symbol display, and the player is You can rearrange with the expectation of a big hit. Therefore, interest in the game is increased and the game can be continued without getting tired.

<Regarding control processing executed by main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 20 to 43. The process of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process (FIG. 40) started when the power is turned on, a main process (FIG. 41, S1250) executed after the startup process, and periodically (in the present embodiment). Then, there is a timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) that is activated (at a cycle of 2 milliseconds) and an NMI interrupt process (FIG. 39) that is activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. The timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process (FIG. 40) and the main process (FIG. 41, S1250) will be described.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. By the MPU 201 executing this timer interrupt process, various processes that should be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) and the main process (FIG. 41, S1250), a command or the like to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, or the like is generated based on various processes, and is provided in the RAM 203. Once stored in the command transmission ring buffer. In the external output process of S101, output data such as a command stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

For example, the number-of-holding-balls command set in the starting winning process (FIG. 30, S108) described later is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then, in the case of the jackpot state, the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed. A large opening opening/closing process for executing is performed (S103). That is, the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a has elapsed, or the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is filled with a ball. Determines whether the player has won the specified number. When either of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S104). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the winning detection information is set in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S105). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated in the RAM 203. It is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of.

Further, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the normal winning random number counter C4 are updated (S106). Specifically, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1 and the normal winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, 399, respectively). 99, 100, 198, 239), each clears to 0. When the special hit random number counter C1 or the ordinary hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 or the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is set to the special hit random number counter C1 or the ordinary hit random number counter. It is read as the initial value of C4, and the initial value is set in the special hit random number counter C1 or the normal hit random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed. (S107), and then the start winning process associated with winning the first start opening 64 or the second start opening 640 is executed (S108). The details of the special symbol variation process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 21, and the details of the start winning process (S108) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the start winning process (S108), the normal symbol starting process 67 is a normal symbol changing process that is a changing process of the normal symbol for the game ball passing through (S109), and then the normal symbol starting port 67. A through gate process for the game ball passing through is executed (S110). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, and the details of the through gate process (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG. A firing control process is executed to control the game ball to be launched (S111), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process (S111) detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of firing. Then, when the sphere is turned on, in order to send the sphere launch signal to the launch control device 112, the information of the sphere launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203. As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interruption process to be executed next.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a special symbol variation process (S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S107). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107), the first special symbol and the second special symbol, based on each acquired counter value, performs various determinations and determinations, and the determined variable display by predetermined control. In the mode, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are controlled to enable variable display at the same time, or to be stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the determination result. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107) will be described.

In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (S201). When it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed (S202). When it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is in progress (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). The first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S204) will be described in detail later, but when the prescribed fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the variable display has elapsed, the symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game. With the process of stopping the variable display, the second special symbol is variably stopped with a symbol showing a big hit, and when the jackpot game of the second lottery game is executed, the process of temporarily stopping the first special symbol in the variable display Is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not being variably displayed (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203) will be described in detail later, but when the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, the process for restarting the variable display is executed, while the temporary stop is performed. If not held, if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol hold number storage area 203a, the jackpot determination and variation pattern selection processing based on the hold data is executed. ..

After the first special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 22, S203) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed (S205). When it is determined that the second special symbol is being variably displayed (S205: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 29, S207) is executed. The second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S207) will be described in detail later, but like the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 25, S204), the specified fluctuation of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display. When the time has passed, the process of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game and the variable display stop of the first special symbol with the symbol indicating the big hit are performed, and the jackpot game of the first lottery game is executed. In this case, the process of temporarily stopping the second special symbol which is being variably displayed is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not being variably displayed (S205: No), the second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206). This second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S206) will be described in detail later, but like the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203), if the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, While the process for restarting the variable display is executed, if the temporary stop is not performed, and if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol hold number storage area 203b, The jackpot determination and variation pattern selection processing based on the pending data are executed. Then, this process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the first special symbol variation start process (S203) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107) will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

In the first special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 22, S203), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e is acquired (S301). It is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S302). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203e is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding sphere counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S303). .. The data stored in the holding areas 1 to 4 of the first special symbol holding number storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S304). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of holding area 1→execution area, holding area 2→holding area 1, holding area 3→holding area 2, holding area 4→holding area 3.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S305). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 23, S305) will be described in detail later, but based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c, the game that is set. Based on the state, the jackpot judgment of whether or not it is a jackpot is executed.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S306). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, S306) will be described later in detail, but based on the result of the hit/miss judgment based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. Processing for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 23, S305), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is acquired (S401). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state (probability variation in progress) (S402). Whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state is determined by whether or not a probability variation flag (not shown) is set to ON. If the probability variation flag is on (that is, the game state is a probability variation game state (during probability variation)) (S402: Yes), based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability, special winning It is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is acquired (S403). On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is off (that is, the game state is a low probability game state (not in probability variation)) (S402: No), the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability time (Fig. 10(b)), it is determined whether or not the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches the big hit random value, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

It is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203o is on (S405). Here, when the big hit flag 203o is set to ON, it indicates that it is a case where the change to be a big hit is started in the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203o is commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that the variation that is a big jackpot is not executed at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. I am configuring. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that the jackpots are continuously generated in a short time and the loss on the amusement store side becomes excessively large.

In S405, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203o is off, that is, if it is determined that the change to be a big hit in the second special symbol is not started (S405: No), in the process of S403 or S404. It is determined whether the executed lottery result is a big hit (S406). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S406: Yes), the big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S407). After that, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S408), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the jackpot type (S409). Then, this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S405, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203o is on (S405: Yes), or if the lottery result is determined to be out of the process of S406 (S406: No), the The symbol indicating the deviation of the first special symbol is set in the 1 special symbol display device 37 (S410).

In this way, even if the lottery result based on the value of the special symbol jackpot random number C1 actually obtained is a jackpot, the jackpot flag 203o is already set to ON, that is, by the second special symbol, When the variation that becomes a big hit has been started, the setting of the disengagement is forcedly executed with the first special symbol. As a result, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation that is a big hit is not executed at the same time, and in the short period, the variation that becomes a big hit is started continuously, and the game store side It is possible to suppress the problem of excessive damage.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have a configuration in which a variation that is a big hit is not executed at the same time, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be configured to be executed simultaneously. In this case, the special jackpot flag may be set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, when the jackpot game is executed with the other special symbol, in the variation of the one special symbol, the measurement of the variation time is temporarily stopped, and the special symbol is fluctuated in a pseudo manner. It is conceivable to make a temporary stop.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S306).

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, S306), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 23, S305), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined by whether or not a big hit is set in the process of S408. Here, a dedicated flag (not shown) is set to ON so that it can be determined whether or not it is a big hit.

In the processing of S501, if it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol has been set (S501: Yes), in the current gaming state (any of the normal gaming state, probability variation gaming state, time saving gaming state) The variation pattern selection table 202d in which the hit determination result of the corresponding first special symbol is a big hit is set (S502). The jackpot type is determined based on the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 acquired from the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 10B) (S503). Then, the process of S505 is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S501, when it is determined that the first special symbol is set off (S501: No), the variation pattern selection table 202d in which the lottery result of the first special symbol corresponding to the gaming state is out Is set (S504). Then, the process of S505 is executed.

In the process of S505, a fluctuation pattern is selected from the set fluctuation pattern selection table 202d based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S505). A special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command indicating the selected fluctuation pattern is generated (set) (S506). Based on the selected variation pattern, a counter value is set in the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r (S507). Then, this process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the first special symbol variation stop process (S204) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S204).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 25, S204), first, it is determined whether the first fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S601). When it is determined that the first fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to OFF (S601: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r indicating the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol is subtracted and updated (( S602). The value of the updated special 1 variation time counter 203r is 0, that is, it is determined whether it is the variation end timing of the first special symbol (S603). If it is determined that it is not the change end timing (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S603, when it is determined that it is the change time end timing (S603: Yes), it is determined whether or not a big hit is set for the changing first special symbol (S604). When it is determined that the big hit is set for the first special symbol (S604: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q for setting the temporary stop of the second special symbol is set to ON. (S605). The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q is set to the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command which shows that it is on (S606) After that, the big hit game start which is based on the big hit classification which is selected is set (S607). Then, the process proceeds to S610.

On the other hand, in the processing of S604, when it is determined that the deviation is set for the changing first special symbol (S604: No), it is determined whether the time saving counter 203k is 0 (S608). .. When it is determined that the time saving counter 203k is greater than 0 (S608: Yes), the value is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving counter 203k (S609). Then, the process proceeds to S610. On the other hand, in the process of S608, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203k is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to S610.

In the processing of S610, the special figure 1 decision command for instructing to stop the main symbol corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S610). The variation stop of the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S611). The time saving counter 203k is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S612). Then, this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S601, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p is turned on, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to off (S613), and the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set. A special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating that the switch is off is set (S614). Then, this process is completed.

With this configuration, when the big hit and the big hit game is started with the first special symbol, the second special symbol can be set to be temporarily stopped. After that, after the jackpot game is over, for the changing second special symbol, the remaining changing time can be changed and restarted. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time, when one special symbol is a big hit, the other is temporarily stopped and waiting until the big hit game is finished. This allows the player to concentrate on the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the second special symbol variation start process (S206) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S206).

In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S206), the above-described first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203), the first special symbol holding ball number of each process from S301 to S306 Counter 203e, the value of the first special symbol reservation sphere number counter (N1), the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S306) In each process of S701 to S710, the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203f, the value of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter (N2), the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705), the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706) is the same except that it is changed, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S206) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705).

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 27, S705), the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 23, S305), the process of S401, the first special symbol holding ball execution area In the process of S801 is 203c, in the second special symbol reservation sphere execution area 203d, for the process of S408, the special diagram 1 (first special symbol) is the process of S808, in the special symbol 2 (second special symbol). , S409 and S410, the first special symbol is the same in the process of S809 and S810, except that it is changed to the second special symbol, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S206) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S706).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 28, S706), the special symbol 1 lottery result (first) with respect to the process of S501 of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, S306) described above. Special symbol lottery result) In the process of S901, in the special symbol 2 lottery result (second special symbol lottery result), for each process from S506 to S507, the special symbol 1 variation pattern command (first special symbol) Change pattern command) and the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r are changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s for each processing of S906 to S907. Therefore, the description thereof is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the second special symbol variation stop process (S207) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207).

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S207), in contrast to the above-mentioned first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 25, S204), each special process 1 fluctuation stop flag of S601 to S602 203p, the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is changed to the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203q, the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s in each processing of S1001 to S1002, and in the processing of S603, the variation of the first special symbol Although it is determined whether or not the time is the end timing, in the processing of S1003, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the second special symbol is the end timing, and for each processing of S604 to S607 and S610 to S611. In the special figure 1 (first special symbol), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command, the start of the jackpot of the first special symbol, the special figure 1 confirmation command is S1004 to S1005, S1009 to S1010. , Special figure 2 (second special symbol), special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p, special figure 1 fluctuation stop command, start of big hit of the second special symbol, except that the special figure 2 confirmation command is changed respectively Since they are the same, description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed at the same time. Can be made. Therefore, the lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within the predetermined time, and the probability that the jackpot is awarded to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can efficiently play the game.

Further, even in the configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time and the lottery game is executed, if the jackpot game occurs on one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbols is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

In addition, the special symbols that have been temporarily stopped are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that they are temporarily stopped, so that the player has confirmed that the lottery game that was in the middle of variable display has not disappeared. It is possible to grasp and play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a start winning process (S108) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S108). The start winning process (FIG. 30, S108) determines whether a game ball has won in the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 640, and if a winning is achieved, the upper limit number of holdings (first starting opening 64, It is a process of storing each acquired counter value in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b, up to four in each of the two starting ports 640). Moreover, each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a Alternatively, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol holding sphere storage areas 203b, a process of predicting a win/fail judgment result, a variation pattern to be selected, or the like is executed in advance. The start winning process (FIG. 30, S108) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (FIG. 30, S108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first starting opening 64 (starting winning) (S1101). Here, the winning of the first start opening 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting opening 64 (there is a starting winning) (S1101: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is acquired (S1102). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103). This is determined whether it is less than 4 which is the upper limit value of the number of holdings for the first starting port 64 (that is, whether the number of holdings is not stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (1104). A reserve ball number command for notifying the voice lamp controller 113 of the reserve number is set (S1105). Various counter values, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1 each value is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c special hit random number 203c The counter storage area 203c1, the special winning type counter storage area 203c2, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4 are respectively reserved (stored) (S1106).

Next, the first prefetching process is executed (S1107). The first look-ahead processing (FIG. 31, S1107) will be described in detail later, but the first special display in which the variable display start order based on each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is stored. The combination of the symbol and the second special symbol is used to determine in advance what the order is, and from the variation display order and each of the stored counter values, the judgment result, the variation pattern to be determined, the stop type, etc. The process of determining is executed.

Next, regarding each processing of S1108 to S1114, the same processing as the processing performed for winning the game ball into the first starting opening 64 executed in each processing of S1101 to S1107 is performed. The only difference is the process executed for the starting port 640, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the first prefetching process (S1107) which is one process of the starting winning process (FIG. 20, S108) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch processing (S1107).

In the first look-ahead processing (FIG. 31, S1107), first, various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area 203a, that is, a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, and fluctuations. Each value of the type counter CS1 is read (S1121). The read data is stored in the area having the smallest winning order among the empty storage areas of the rearrangement storage area 203t, and the variable display is started based on the newly stored suspension data (each counter value). The variable display start time is calculated (S1122).

This variation start time is, as shown in FIG. 18, the special symbol in the variation display corresponding to the newly stored suspension data (if the suspension data based on the first starting opening 64, the first special symbol, the second special symbol. If it is the hold data based on the starting port 640, the remaining variation time of the second special symbol) and the respective holding data previously stored based on the same starting port 64, 640 as the newly stored holding data are determined. It is calculated by adding the respective fluctuation times.

Here, each of the hold data previously stored based on the same starting port as the newly stored hold data means that the newly stored hold data is the hold data based on the first starting port 64. Hold data based on the first start port 64 (corresponding to the first special symbol) stored in, on the other hand, if the newly stored hold data is hold data based on the second start port 640, it is stored first. It is the pending data (corresponding to the second special symbol) based on the second starting port 640 that has been made.

When the variable display start time is calculated, the rearranged order is renumbered in ascending order of the variable display start time of all the pending data stored in the sorting pending storage area 203t (S1123). Here, with regard to the renumbering of the variable display start time, in the present embodiment, renumbering is performed for all the pending data, but not limited to this, when the variable display start order is changed from the previous time, that is, However, if the newly stored variable display start order of the pending data is interrupted by the previously stored variable display start order of the reserved data, it is obvious that only the changed order is renumbered. Good.

It is determined whether the game state at the time when the newly stored hold data starts changing is the high-probability game state (S1124). Regarding the game state when the fluctuation starts, although there is a thing that the pre-reading probability change flag 203t6 is on, although it is stopped by the time when the newly stored hold data starts to change, after that, the 15R normal jackpot is held and stopped. It is determined by determining whether or not there is. When it is determined that the game state when the newly stored hold data starts to change is the high probability game state (S1124: Yes), the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability case is the jackpot determination value. On the basis of the above, it is predicted whether or not the first special symbol is correct, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding rearrangement storage area 203t (S1125). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state when the newly stored hold data starts changing is the low-probability game state (normal game state) (S1124: No), the special symbol jackpot for the low-probability case Based on the jackpot determination value of the random number table 202a, it is predicted whether or not the first special symbol is valid, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding rearrangement storage area 203t (S1127).

The first prefetch update processing is executed (S1127). The first prefetch update process (FIG. 32, S1127) will be described in detail later, but the judgment result of the hold data (various counter values) stored in the rearrangement storage area 203t in the order in which the variable display is actually started. Based on, the jackpot type (whether it is a probable change) and the variation pattern (variation time) are stored (updated).

Next, the first prefetch update process (S1127) which is one process of the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch update processing (S1127).

In the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 32, S1127), first, it is determined whether or not the win/fail judgment result predicted in the process of S1125 or S1127 in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) was a big hit (S1131). When it is determined that the hit determination result predicted in the processing of S1125 or S127 in the first look-ahead processing (FIG. 31, S1107) is a jackpot (S1131: Yes), was the predicted jackpot A or jackpot C? It is determined (S1132). When it is determined that the predicted jackpot is the jackpot A or the jackpot C (S1132: Yes), the prefetch probability change flag 203t6 of the rearrangement hold storage area 203t corresponding to the newly stored hold data is set to ON. (S1133). The prefetch probability change flag 203t6 is set to OFF because the data in the reserved area before the shift is cleared to 0 when the data is shifted and stored in the upper reserved area. In other words, the pre-reading probability variation flag 203t6 which has been set to ON once is shifted to the holding area in order, and is set to OFF by shifting and overwriting (clearing to 0) the next new data in the changing data storage area. To be done.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the predicted jackpot is not the jackpot A or the jackpot C (S1132: No), the process of S1134 is executed.

From the special winnings variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state at the start of variation display (whether it is probability variation or time reduction), variation display start based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 of newly stored pending data The fluctuation pattern that is determined at some time is predicted (S1134).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the win/no determination result predicted in the process of S1125 in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) is wrong (S1131: No), the game state at the start of variable display (probable change or time saving). The fluctuation pattern table 202e corresponding to (whether it is in the middle or not) predicts the fluctuation pattern determined at the start of the fluctuation display based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of the newly stored pending data (S1135). ..

The predicted hit/miss, stop type, and variation pattern are stored in an area corresponding to the winning order in the rearrangement storage area 203t (corresponding to newly stored suspension data) (S1136). The variable display start order of the pending data newly stored in the rearrangement pending storage area 203t is determined by interrupting (changing the order) the previously displayed variable display start order (S1137). .. When it is determined that the variable display start order of the pending data newly stored in the rearrangement pending storage area 203t is interrupted (changed in order) to the previously stored variable display start order, (S1137: Yes), about the pending data after the variable display start order of the newly stored pending data (the pending data in the order of starting to vary after the special symbol corresponding to the newly stored pending data fluctuates and stops) Then, again, the win/fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern are predicted and updated (S1138). Based on the hit/failure, stop type, variation pattern, winning order, variation display start order, and pre-reading probability variation flag 203t6 corresponding to all the pending data stored in the sorting pending storage area 203t, the respective data is converted into a voice lamp control device. A winning command for notifying 113 is generated for each hold data (S1139).

In this way, when the game ball wins the first start opening 64 or the second start opening 640 and is held until the variable display of the corresponding special symbol can be started, it is judged or selected before the variable display is started. The fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation start order in the hold is also calculated. Therefore, when the reserved symbol display is displayed, the reserved symbol display can be rearranged in the order of variation start by the player's operation.

Further, when a new hold is stored and the order in which fluctuation starts is changed due to the new hold (the newly stored fluctuation start order of the hold is stored by being interrupted), the rearrangement storage area 203t is again displayed. Of the stored hold areas, the newly stored hold is newly stored because the judgment of acceptance, stop type, and variation pattern are updated for the hold that starts changing after the newly stored hold is stopped. By doing so, even when the gaming state at the start of fluctuation (whether it is the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability gaming state) changes, it is possible to update it to accurate data.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the newly stored hold start sequence is interrupted and stored, the hold data in the hold area (whether the judgment is correct, the stop type, or the fluctuation pattern) is updated again. Not limited to this, when a new hold is stored, the judgment may be performed again for all the hold areas every time. With this configuration, the data in the holding area can be updated each time new holding is stored, and more accurate data can always be formed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the second prefetching process (S1114) which is one process of the starting winning process (FIG. 30, S108) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the second prefetching process (S1114).

The second prefetching process (FIG. 33, S1114) prefetches the pending data based on the winning of the first starting opening 64 by the first prefetching process (FIG. 31, S1107) described above, and is stored. In contrast to the process of determining the variable display start order of the pending data and making various determinations, the pending data based on winning the second starting opening 640 is pre-read in advance and the stored pending data is stored. The same processing is executed except that the variable display start order is determined and various determinations are performed, and the detailed description is omitted.

Further, as for the second prefetch update process (S1147), which is one process of the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114) shown in FIG. 34, the above-described first prefetch update process (FIG. 32, S1127) is the first. While the process of predicting various selection data and generating the winning command based on the variable display start order of the pending data based on winning the first starting port 64, the second starting port 640 is won. Based on the variable display start order of the pending data based on the above, the same process is executed, only the process of predicting various selection data and generating the winning command, and detailed description is omitted. To do.

In this way, the game ball is won in the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 640, and various counter values are newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. When the reserved data is stored (the reserved data is stored), the first prefetching process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 33, S1114) is executed. The newly stored reservation data is stored in the rearrangement reservation ball storage area 203t in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 33, S1114) in which the order in which variable display is started is sorted first. Since it is decided by comparing with the variable display start time of each held data that is stored, the gaming state (whether it is during the probable change) is accurately determined when the stored data stored is started to display. can do. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the result of the judgment, the stop type, the fluctuation pattern displayed in a variable manner, and the like. Therefore, next, even when the pending data is newly stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b, the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second The variable display start time of the newly stored pending data can be accurately predicted based on the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of each pending data predicted in the prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114). As a result, the correct variable display start order can be predicted.

In addition, when the variable display start order of newly stored hold data is stored by interrupting the variable display start order of previously stored hold data (the order is earlier), the newly stored hold display is performed. For each pending data in the variable display start order after the data, the game state at the start of variable display is predicted again by the first prefetching process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 33, S1114). Then, since the winning/prohibition, the stop type, and the variation pattern are predicted (look ahead), the winning command can be generated based on the more accurate prediction result. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the accurate prediction result of the stored hold data from the winning command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a normal symbol variation process (S109) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S109). The normal symbol variation process (S109) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device section 88, the opening time of the ordinary electric auditors role 640a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 35, S109), first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit. (S1161). The normal symbol (second symbol) is in the middle of hitting the second symbol display portion 88 until the hit is displayed and the middle opening/closing control of the normal electric accessory 640a is being performed. When it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hitting (S1161: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1161: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol on the second symbol display unit 88 is being variably displayed (S1162). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1162: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the normal symbol executed in the second symbol display unit 88 has elapsed ( S1163). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S1184 and the process of S1185, which will be described later, before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 88.

In the processing of S1163, if the variation time has not elapsed (S1163: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1163, when it is determined that the variation time of the normally displayed variable symbol has elapsed (S1163: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display unit 88 is set (S1164). .. In the process of S1164, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S1178, the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed as the second symbol (lighting display). ) Is set. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is missed and the display mode at the time of disengagement is set by the process of S1177, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) as the second symbol on the second symbol display unit 88. Display) is set. By the process of S1164, when the stop display is set, the variable display in the second symbol display unit 88 ends, the process of S1177, the display mode set in the process of S1178, the stop symbol (second symbol) is The stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the two symbol display portion 88.

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the regular design lottery this time is a win (S1165). When it is determined that the regular symbol lottery result of this time is a win (S1165: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the regular electric accessory 640a is set (1166). On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the regular design lottery this time is out (S1165: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1162, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S1162: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g (the number M of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1167).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is larger than 0 (S1168). If it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203g is 0 (S1168: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203g is not 0 (S1168: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S1169).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h is shifted (S1170). In the process of S1170, the data stored in the normal symbol reserve 1 to the normal symbol reserve 4 in the normal symbol reserve sphere storage area 203h is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, ordinary symbol hold 1 → execution area, ordinary symbol hold 2 → ordinary symbol hold 1, ordinary symbol hold 3 → ordinary symbol hold 2, ordinary symbol hold 4 → ordinary symbol hold 4, etc. within each area Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding sphere execution area 203i is acquired (S1171).

Next, it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, is not 0) (S1172). When it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203k is 0 (that is, it is not during hour/hour) (S1172: No), the hit determination value of the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability time (FIG. 10(d)) Based on, the result of the judgment is obtained (S1173). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203k is not 0 (that is, during hour saving) (S1172: Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit (( S1174). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (S1174: Yes), the process of S1173 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not a big hit (S1174: No), the hit determination value of the high random probability per normal symbol random number table (FIG. 10 (d)) Based on the result, the result of the judgment is obtained (S1175).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is a win (S1176). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not winning (that is, it is out) (S1176: No), the display mode of "x" which is the display mode at the time of removal is set. (S1177). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (that is, it is a win) (S1176: Yes), the display mode of "○", which is the display mode at the time of winning, is It is set (S1178).

It is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the time saving gaming state (including the probability variation gaming state) (S1179). If it is determined that the time saving game is in progress (S1179: Yes), the process of S1181 is executed. When it is determined that the time saving game is not in progress (S1179: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1180). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a big hit, the process of S1181 is executed.

In the process of S1181, the opening time of the blade of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is set to 1 s, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1181). On the other hand, in the processing of S1180, when it is determined that the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in progress (that is, in the low probability game state) (S1180: No), the normal electric auditors product 640a The blade opening time is set to 0.2 s and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1182).

It is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the time saving gaming state (including the probability variation gaming state) (S1183). When it is determined that the time is shortening (S1183: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 3 s (S1184). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is not shortening (S1183: No), the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 30 s (S1185). After the processing of S1184 and S1185 is executed, this processing ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S110). This through gate passage process (S110) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 20), and it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening 67, and when the game ball has passed. , Is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4 for ordinary hits.

In the through gate passage process (FIG. 36, S110), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (gate) 67 (S1191). Here, the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 (S1191: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is acquired (S1192). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1193).

Whether the sphere does not pass through the normal symbol starting port (gate) 67 (S1191: No), or even if the sphere passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is If it is not less than 4 (S1193: No), this process ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67 (S1191: Yes), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203g is less than 4 (S1193: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value (M) of 203 g is incremented by 1 (S1194). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the above-described timer interrupt process, and the first normal symbol flag, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203 empty holding area (ordinary symbol holding 1 to ordinary symbol) It is stored in the first area of the reservation 4) (S1195). In the process of S1195, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol holding 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the area of the normal symbol reserve 2, if the value is 2, the area of the normal symbol reserve 3, if the value is 3, the area of the normal symbol reserve 4, first, respectively. Area.

Next, the fluctuation monitoring process (S111), which is one process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of this fluctuation monitoring process (S111). In this fluctuation monitoring process (S111), a process of monitoring whether the player is playing the correct game corresponding to the game state is executed. In the present embodiment, in the normal game state (low-probability game state), a method of performing a game by hitting the game ball with a strength such that the game ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (hereinafter, left hitting) Is a regular game method, and during a big hit game, a time saving game state, and a probability variation game state, a method of shooting a game ball with the strength with which the game ball passes the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (hereinafter, right hitting) ) Is a regular game method. In the normal game state, the state in which the normal electric auditors's figure 640a closes the second starting port 640 becomes the normal state, and the winning rate for the first starting port 64 on the right side is lower than that for the first starting port 64 on the left side. Since it is set, it is disadvantageous for the player to hit right in the normal gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage to the player by monitoring whether the player is playing the game correctly. Further, it is possible to monitor that the player rightly hits the player right and wins the prize in the second starting opening 640, and damage caused by the cheating can be reduced.

In the fluctuation monitoring process (FIG. 37, S111), first, it is determined whether the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1201). When it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1201: No), it is determined whether the probability variation game state or the time saving game state is in progress (S1202). When it is determined that the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state is in progress (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol fluctuates or stops (S1203). When it is determined that the first special symbol is in a fluctuation stop (S1203), the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON (S1204). Then, this process is completed. Here, the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is a flag for determining whether or not the player is playing the game in the correct game method (left-handed or right-handed) corresponding to the gaming state. As will be described later, if the time during which the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON becomes a predetermined time or more (for example, 20 seconds or more), an abnormality notification command is set, and the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the abnormality by the command. (A character indicating that the third symbol display device 81 is abnormal (for example, a character display suggesting a correct game method (please right-handed, etc.) is executed, and an error sound or an instruction voice for a correct game is given by voice. Is output and an abnormal signal is output to the hall computer)).

Thus, in the probability variation game state or during the time saving state, in the correct game method, the right-handed game is the state in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed, respectively. If the 1 special symbol is not displayed for a certain period of time, it is possible to monitor whether an illegal game is performed in which the first special symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player by notifying the abnormality, is not displayed in a variable manner. it can. Therefore, fraud can be detected at an early stage, and damage to the gaming shop can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S1201: Yes), in S1203, if it is determined that the first special symbol is changing (S1203: No), abnormal monitoring The flag 203v is set to off (S1205).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1202 that the probability variation game state or the time saving game state is not in progress (S1202: No), it is determined whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is being performed (S1206). When it is determined that the normal symbols are being changed and displayed (S1206: Yes), the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON (S1204).

In this way, in the normal game state in which the right-handed game is not executed, when the normal symbol that can be changed only in the right-handed game is variably displayed, the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON. It should be noted that the abnormal warning command is set when 20 seconds have elapsed while the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON, but after the jackpot game, the time saving game, the probability variation game is over, the normal design holding ball (up to 4 balls) ) Is stored, even if the state shifts to the left-handed state, the normal symbol is variably displayed, so the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON, but in that case, the variation time of the normal symbol is Since it is 3 seconds, the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to OFF before the abnormality alarm command is set. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the abnormality notification is executed even though the player is playing the game in the correct playing method.

On the other hand, in the process of S1206, when it is determined that the normal symbol is stopped (S1206: No), it is determined whether the second special symbol is being variably displayed (S1207). When it is determined that the second special symbol is changing (S1207: Yes), the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON (S1204).

In this way, when the gaming state is not the time saving gaming state or the probability variation gaming state, that is, when it is the normal gaming state, it is the normal gaming method to play the game by left-handed play, but when the player hits right-handed, the variation display If the possible second special symbol is changing, it means that the player is playing the game in the wrong game method. Therefore, by setting the abnormality monitoring flag 203v to ON, the abnormality notification is executed if the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON for a predetermined time (20 seconds in the present embodiment) or more, so an illegal game is executed. Can be discovered earlier. Therefore, it is possible to reduce damage to the game store due to fraud.

On the other hand, in the process of S1207, when it is determined that the second special symbol is in the fluctuation stop (S1207: No), the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to OFF. Then, this process is completed. In addition, in this fluctuation monitoring process (S111), the determination whether the normal symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol are stopped is a state in which the holding ball is stopped in a variable state without being stored. .. In the state where the holding balls are stored, the temporary stop state (stop state from the fluctuation stop to the start of fluctuation by the next holding ball) is determined not to be the fluctuation stop but the fluctuation.

Here, when the game state is the normal game state, and the second special symbol is variably stopped, since the game is being performed by left-handing, which is a correct game method, the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to off. Thus, it is possible to prevent the abnormal alarm command described below from being set. Therefore, even if the player plays the game for a short time by the wrong playing method without any innocence, the abnormality is not immediately notified, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the abnormality.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the fraud monitoring process (S112) which is one of the processes in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fraud monitoring process (S112). In the fraud monitoring process (FIG. 38, S112), when the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON, the abnormality alarm command is set when the time exceeds a predetermined time (20 seconds or more in this embodiment). The process is executed.

In the fraud monitoring process (FIG. 38, S112), first, it is determined whether the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is on (S1211). When it is determined that the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is on (S1211: Yes), the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is incremented by 1 and updated (S1212). It is determined whether the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is equal to or more than the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 20 seconds) (S1213). When it is determined that the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is less than the upper limit value (S1213: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is equal to or more than the upper limit value (S1213: Yes), the abnormality alarm command is set (S1214). Then, this process is completed.

This abnormality alarm command is output to the voice lamp controller 113 by the external output process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In the voice lamp control device 113, when the abnormality warning command is received, a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output device 226 to output the abnormality warning mode is executed. As a result, it is possible to detect fraud and defects early.

In addition, when the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to be on and is kept set to be on for a predetermined time (20 seconds in this embodiment) or more, the abnormality alarm command is set. Even if there is a period (for example, a period in which the right-handed state is switched to the left-handed state) in which the game is not played by the regular game method for a short time (less than 20 seconds) when the game state is switched, etc., immediately, Since the abnormal alarm is not output, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player feels uncomfortable.

Although the predetermined time is set to 20 seconds in the present embodiment, the predetermined time is not limited to this, and the predetermined time may be configured to be longer than the necessary switching time during the normal game when switching the game state. Good. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the problem that the abnormal alarm is erroneously output while the player is changing the game operation.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1211, when it is determined that the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is off (S1211: No), processing of resetting the abnormality monitoring counter 203w to 0 which is the initial value is executed. Then, this process is completed.

In this way, when it is determined that the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is off, the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is reset to the initial value, so the process of setting the abnormality alarm command is avoided, and the regular game method is used. While playing a game, it is possible to suppress a problem that an abnormal alarm is output.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1221), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this startup processing.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 40), first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1231). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Then, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1232). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1233).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1234), and if it is turned on (S1234: Yes), the process proceeds to S1240. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1234: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (1235), and if it is not stored. (S1235: No), since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S1110 in this case as well.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1235: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1236), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1237: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S1240. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S1240, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1240). Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1241, S1242) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is pressed during the startup process, the initialization process (S1241, S1242) of the RAM 203 is executed.

In addition, the initialization processing (S1241 and S1242) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization process (S1241, S1242), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1241), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1242). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process shifts to S1243.

On the other hand, the RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1234: No), the information about the occurrence of power failure is stored (S1235: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) If it is normal (S1237: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S1238). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1239), and the process proceeds to S1243. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, the production permission command which permits execution of various productions is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1243). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1244). Then, the process proceeds to the main process (S1250) described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the main processing (S1250) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1250). In the main process (S1250), roughly, a counter update process and a power-off process are executed.

In the main processing (FIG. 41, S1250), first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is output to each sub side. The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1251).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1252). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1253). After the processing of S1253 is executed, the probability variation setting processing is executed (S1254). This probability variation setting process (S1254) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but when the big hit A or big hit C is executed, the game ball enters the second specific entrance (not shown). If it is determined whether or not the player has entered the ball, a process of setting data indicating that the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the probability variation gaming state in the jackpot state setting area is executed.

When the probability variation setting process (S1254) is executed, the jackpot control process is executed (S1255). This jackpot control process (S1255) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 43, but a process of setting the operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the jackpot game process (S1255) is executed, the electric accessory opening/closing process is executed (S1256). In this electric power accessory opening/closing process (S1256), the opening/closing process of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is executed. Then, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1257).

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, a symbol of "O" or "x") by the second symbol display unit 88 is executed (S1258). Briefly, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball normally passes through the symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, and the second symbol display portion 88 is acquired. The variable display of the second symbol is carried out. Then, the lottery for the second symbol is carried out according to the value of the normal hit random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is hit, the normal electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S1260). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1260: Yes), the process proceeds to S1251 and the above-described processes after S1251 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S1260: No), the initial period is reached during the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1261, S1262).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1261). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffers of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1252 (S1262).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1251 to S1258 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated by using the remaining time, so that the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special random number counter C1 Of the random number counter C4 per ordinary number) can be updated at random, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1256, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 40 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1263 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1263), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1264). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1265), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1266), and the endless loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

The processing of S1259 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1251 to S1258 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1261 and S1262 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1251. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1251 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S1301). By setting the value to the predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S1251. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the probability variation setting process (S1254), which is one of the main processes (S1250 in FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the contents of the probability variation setting process (S1254).

In the probability variation setting process (FIG. 42, S1254), first, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the jackpot game of jackpot A or jackpot C is being executed (S1261). When it is determined that it is not the timing when the big hit A or the big hit C is executed (S1261: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the timing when the big hit A or the big hit C is executed, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second specific entrance 650a (S1262). When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second specific ball entrance 650a (S1262: Yes), the probability change setting data is set in the after-big hit state area 203m (S1263). After that, a ball entry notification command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that a ball has entered the second specific ball entrance 650a is set. In addition, after the jackpot state area 203m, in the default setting, the time saving game state is set, and data for setting the probability variation game state by the game ball entering the second specific ball entrance 650a. Can be rewritten as When the probability variation game state is set, it is automatically rewritten to the default time saving game state data.

As a result, when the game ball does not enter the second specific entrance 650a, the time saving game state is automatically set after the big hit game regardless of the big hit main, so the control of the main controller 110 The load can be reduced.

Further, as will be described later, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the entry notification command, the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output device 226 output a notification mode for notifying that the probability variation gaming state is given. To be controlled. This makes it easy for the player to understand and informs the player of the gaming state after the big hit game.


Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 40. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing (S1400) that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 34, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1301). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1418 (see FIG. 35) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the current startup processing. It is determined whether or not the process is started during the execution of () (S1302). As described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1415 in FIG. 35), the power-off process in S1418 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1418 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1302: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S1418 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction of the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S1418 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1302: Yes), the startup processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1418, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1304, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1306). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

In the process of S1308, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1308). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1418 is executed (see FIG. 35, S1417). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1418 is executed, the process of S1308 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1418 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1109), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1113), and the process proceeds to the main process (S1400). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1308 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, so that the process of S1304 to S1306 is performed. This is the case where the processing is started or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset by noise or the like and started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1309, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1310, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310).

It should be noted that the clear processing of S1309 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1304 when the processing of S1308 is reached through the processing of S1304 through S1306. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1400). When the main processing (S1400) is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing (S1400) was started or since the processing of S1401 was executed last time ( S1401) If 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1411 without performing the processes of S1402 to S1410. In the process of S1401, it is the process related to the display (effect) of S1402 to S1410 that determines whether 1 millisecond has elapsed, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , It is preferable to execute the variable display processing of S1411 and the command determination processing of S1412 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1414 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1414 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to set the variable display effect without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1403 to S1414 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1402). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1409 described later (S1403), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1404). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the power supply notifying process is not performed and the process proceeds to S1405.

In the process of S1405, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the retained quantity display updating process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting production, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the setting of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is a command as a display control device. Sent to 114. In the number-of-holds display update process (S1406), which will be described in detail later, a process of updating the display of the pending symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the data in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k. ..

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1407). In this frame button input monitoring/rendering process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the rendering effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the rearrangeable period (a period during which the jackpot game and the state where there is no hold) are pressed, the hold symbol display that has been displayed in the order in which the hold is established starts variable display. It is sorted and displayed in order.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is then executed (S1408), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1409, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1410). After this, the process proceeds to S1411. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit/output process of S1409 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the processing of S1411, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed by the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission to the user, is executed. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the fluctuation display setting process (S1411), the temporary fluctuation stop process is executed (S1412). This temporary fluctuation stop process (S1412) is a temporary first fluctuation stop command indicating that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped from the main control device 110 or a temporary second fluctuation stop command indicating that the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. Based on having received, the process for temporarily stopping the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed. Details of this temporary fluctuation stop processing (S1412) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the temporary fluctuation stopping process (S1412), the pending rearrangement process is executed (S1413). This reservation rearrangement processing displays the reserved symbol displays in a rearranged display start order from the winning order based on a player's button operation based on a winning command output from the main control device 110, based on the player's button operation. Execute the process. Details of the reservation rearrangement process (S1413) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the reservation rearrangement process (S1413), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1414). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S1414 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power RAM occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1415). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1417), and the power-off process is executed (S1418). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1419), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1416), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1416: No), the process returns to the process of S1401 to repeatedly execute the main process (S1400). On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1416: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process (S1400) is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the command determination processing (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1414). The command determination process (S1414) is executed in the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. To judge. Details of the command determination process (S1414) will be described below.

In the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read and analyzed from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, and the main controller 110 is read. It is further determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S1501). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a special symbol showing a variation display mode for variably displaying the first special symbol. When it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S1501: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag 223b2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1502). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 1 variation pattern command (S1503). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 so as to be distinguishable from the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in a variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) described later. It is used when setting the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol for notifying the control device 114 of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is not received (S1501: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (S1505). Here, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a special symbol showing a variation display mode for variably displaying the second special symbol. When it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S1504: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command (S1506). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) described later. It is used when setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

When it is determined that the special pattern 2 variation pattern command is not received (S1504: No), it is determined whether the first or second stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S1507). When it is determined that the first or second stop type command is received (S1507: Yes), the first stop type selection flag is set to ON when the first stop type command is received. When the second stop type command is received, the second stop type selection flag is set to ON. (S1508). The stop type (either 15R probability jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot) is extracted from the received first stop type command or second stop type command (S1506). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the first stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the second stop type command is the stop type of the second special symbol. Is stored so that it can be identified.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the first or second stop type command has not been received (S1507: No), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1510). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S1510: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e or the second special symbol reserved ball of the main control device 110 included in the received reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter f (that is, the number of holding balls of the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main controller 110) is extracted, and the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is a voice lamp. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 of the control device 113, the holding ball number of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol holding ball counter 223d1 (S1511).

Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b (starting winning), every time there is a starting winning. , S1508, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223b1 and the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e of the main controller 110 and the second It can be adjusted to the value of the 2 special symbol holding ball counter 203f. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223b1 or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e of the main control device 110. Or even if it deviates from the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f, at the time of starting winning detection, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d1 of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected. However, the value can be set to the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e or the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f of the main control device 110.

When it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1510: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received (S1512). When it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1512: Yes), information of each holding area of the rearrangement holding storage area 203u of the main control device 110 is extracted from the received command (S1510). Here, the information of each holding area in the rearrangement holding storage area 203u that is extracted is the judgment result, jackpot type, change pattern type, change display order, and time until start of change display for each hold. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1512: No), it is determined whether the temporary first fluctuation stop command or the temporary second fluctuation stop command has been received (S1515). When it is determined that the temporary first fluctuation stop command or the temporary second fluctuation stop command is received (S1515: Yes), when the temporary first fluctuation stop command is received, the slave first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set. When the temporary second fluctuation stop command is received and set to ON, the secondary second fluctuation stop flag 223f is set to ON (S1516).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the temporary first fluctuation stop command or the temporary second fluctuation stop command is not received (S1515: No), the first special symbol fluctuation restart command or the second special symbol fluctuation restart command is received. It is determined whether or not it is (S1517). When it is determined that the first special symbol variation restart command or the second special symbol variation restart command is received (S1517: Yes), the first special symbol variation restart command corresponding to the received command is received. In this case, the subordinate first fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to ON. When the second special symbol fluctuation restart command is received, the sub second fluctuation restart flag 223h is set to ON (S1518).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol variation restart command or the second special symbol variation restart command has not been received (S1517: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1519).

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the pending quantity display update processing (S1406) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this reserved quantity display update processing (S1406). This reservation number display update process (S1406) is a process for updating the reservation symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the data of each reservation area of the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k. ..

In the reservation quantity display update process (FIG. 37, S1406), first, the fluctuation display start time of the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5 of each reservation area of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is updated (S1431). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each time data stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5. Further, the update of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may be another method.

The holding symbol display corresponding to the holding area in which the sorting flag 223k7 of the subordinate sorting holding storage area 223k is turned on is a variable display start order, and is held corresponding to the holding area in which the sorting flag 223k7 is turned off. As for the symbol display, the held symbol display is displayed in the order in which the hold is established (S1432).

Here, in the rearrangement flag 223k7, the frame button 22 is operated during the rearrangeable period in the pending rearrangement processing (FIG. 40, S1413) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, which will be described later. When the button is pressed), it is set to ON in all hold areas in which hold data is stored. As a result, all the displayed hold symbol displays are rearranged and displayed based on the hold variable display start order from the hold hold order. On the other hand, after the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON, since the rearrangement flag 223k7 is OFF for the newly stored hold, the order established without rearrangement, that is, the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed at the end of the pending symbol display displayed in.

Therefore, when the player wants to rearrange the reserved symbol displays and operates the frame button 22, the reserved symbol displays displayed at that time are rearranged in the variable display start order, and thereafter. Also, the rearranged hold symbol display is maintained in the variable display start order, while the newly stored (reoccurring) hold symbol display is displayed in the established order first. Since it is displayed at the end without being displayed by interrupting the reserved symbol display that is being performed, the player can suppress the problem that the current display is confused as to which sequence is displayed. You can

Further, as described above, by rearranging only the reserved symbol displays that are displayed when the frame button 22 is operated, it is possible to notify the variable display start order only when the player wants to know.

Also, in the case of the 15R certainty variation jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot, a relatively long variation pattern is usually selected. Therefore, the variable display start time is delayed for the hold held by the same start ports 63a and 63b as the big hit hold. Therefore, in some cases, the variable display start time may be earlier in the case of the holding order having a later establishment order that occurs in the starting ports 63a and 63b different from the holding that is a big hit. In such a case, when the holding symbols are rearranged, the holding symbols having a late establishment order are displayed in front of the holding symbols having a faster establishment order than that (the holding symbol display area Ds1 side). It Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the reserved symbol display, when the reserved symbol having a slower establishment order is displayed before the reserved symbol having a faster establishment order is displayed. Of the pending symbols displayed before the interrupt symbol displayed in the interrupt, the pending generated by winning in the starting opening 63a, 63b different from the interrupt symbol displayed in the interrupt is a big hit. You can have expectations.

Therefore, when operating the frame button 22, the player thinks that there may be a big jackpot in the hold symbol display, and can operate the frame button in the expectation that the arrangement order will change. , The frame button 22 can be operated with the expectation of a big hit.

Next, the variable display setting process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1411). The variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is generated, and the process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, a process of setting a display first or second stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type based on the extracted stop type (15R certainty big jackpot, 15R normal big jackpot, 2R certainty big jackpot) To execute.

In the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223b2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1601). If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223b2 is off (S1601: No), it means that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus the process of S1606 is performed. To execute. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223b2 is on (S1601: Yes), the first fluctuation start flag 223c is set to off (S1602).

In the process of S1603, the variation pattern in the variable display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special diagram 1 variation pattern command in the process of S1503 of the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) is acquired from the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223. Then, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is generated (S1603). The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is configured to be distinguishable from the display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the high-order 2 bits of the high-order byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte structure is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if "01", the second special symbol Is configured to indicate that

The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S1603 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is output by the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbols is performed.

Here, in the display control device 114, when the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is received, in the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81, in the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command, Variable display (dynamic display) of the first special symbol (third symbol).

With the setting of the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set variation pattern command for display is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol). In accordance with (display setting was performed), the value of the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b1 is decreased by 1, and the holding data stored in the subordinate rearrangement holding storage area 223k is set to the previous holding area. It is shifted (S1604). More specifically, holding area 1→first special symbol or second special symbol of variable display data, holding area 2→holding area 1, holding area 3→holding area 2, holding area 4→holding area 3, holding The data in each area is shifted such as area 5→holding area 4, holding area 6→holding area 5, holding area 7→holding area 6, holding area 8→holding area 7. Using the subordinate first variation time storage area 223i, measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol is started (S1605).

It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1606). When it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223c1 is not on (that is, it is off) (S1606: No), the state where the special figure 1 variation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110. Therefore, the processing of S1611 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is on (S1606: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to off (S1607). In the process of S1506 of the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223, and A variable pattern command for display of two special symbols is generated (S1608).

The variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S1608 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbols is performed.

Here, in the display control device 114, when the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol is received, in the right display area Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81, in the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command, Variable display (dynamic display) of the second special symbol (third symbol). With the setting of the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set variation pattern command for display is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the second special symbol). In accordance with the display setting), the value of the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223d1 is decremented by 1, and the holding data stored in the subordinate rearrangement holding storage area 223k is set to the one holding area before. It is shifted (S1609). More specifically, holding area 1→first special symbol or second special symbol of variable display data, holding area 2→holding area 1, holding area 3→holding area 2, holding area 4→holding area 3, holding The data in each area is shifted such as area 5→holding area 4, holding area 6→holding area 5, holding area 7→holding area 6, holding area 8→holding area 7.

Using the sub second variation time storage area 223j, measurement of the variation time of the second special symbol is started (S1610).

It is determined whether the subordinate figure 1 stop type selection flag (not shown) or the second stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to ON (S1611). If it is determined that the special feature 1 stop type selection flag (not shown) and the second stop type selection flag (not shown) are not set to ON (that is, OFF) (S1611: No). ), and ends this processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the subordinate figure 1 stop type selection flag (not shown) or the second stop type selection flag (not shown) is on (S1611: Yes), the subordinate figure 1 stop type If the selection flag (not shown) is ON, the subordinate figure 1 stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to OFF, and the second stop type selection flag (not shown) is ON. If so, the second stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to off (S1612).

In the process of S1509 of the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), the stop type extracted from the received first stop type command or second stop type command is set (S1613). When the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, based on the stop type, the display control device 114 has a stop type (either 15R probability jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability jackpot). A first stop type command for display for notifying (whether there is) is generated. Further, when the set stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, based on the stop type, the display control device 114 has a stop type (15R probability jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability jackpot). Then, a second display stop type command for notifying whether or not) is generated (S1614). It should be noted that the first or second stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the big hit type when a big hit occurs, and is notified even if the determination result is out of order. .. If the determination result is out, the stop type is not referred, and the out symbol is set.

With such a configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 can control the display control device 114 so as to variably display both the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time.

Further, based on that the variation pattern of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, by also shifting the data of the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k, a dedicated command for shifting from the main control device 110. The control load of main controller 110 can be reduced without the need to control the transmission of.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the temporary fluctuation stop processing (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this temporary fluctuation stop processing (S1412). This temporary fluctuation stop process (FIG. 39, S1412) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, in the temporary fluctuation stop process (FIG. 39, S1412), one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is being variably displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, and the other variable display is changed. During the jackpot game, a process for temporarily stopping is executed.

In the temporary fluctuation stop process (FIG. 39, S1412), first, it is determined whether the first subordinate fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to ON. When it is determined that the subordinate first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to ON (S1701: Yes), the subordinate first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to OFF (S1702).

A first temporary stop command for display is generated (S1703). The first temporary stop command for display is a command for controlling the display control device 114 to temporarily stop the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the display control device 114 sets the first temporary stop command for display, after stopping the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol (main symbol on the left middle right) is slightly shaken to be displayed. Then, the player is informed that the variable display is temporarily stopped. Further, by displaying the character "The first special symbol is temporarily stopped" in the left side display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81, it is easier for the player to understand and the variable display is temporarily stopped. It is configured to notify.

In this way, the player can recognize that the special symbol that was being displayed variably was temporarily stopped because a big hit occurred, and the lottery that was being displayed variably disappeared or became invalid. You can play games with peace of mind by preventing anxiety when it happens.

Further, the display mode of the temporary stop is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and the first special symbol may be erased from the left display area Dm, and the temporary stop may be informed only by the characters. However, other configurations are naturally possible.

When the first temporary stop command for display is set, the measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol measured in the secondary first variation time storage area 223i is interrupted (temporarily stopped).

With such a configuration, the variation time of the first special symbol can be accurately managed, and even when the variation display is restarted, the variation display can be accurately performed with the remaining variation time.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the subordinate first variation stop flag 223e is not set to on (that is, off) (S1701: No), is the subordinate second variation stop flag 223f set to on? It is determined (S1705). When it is determined that the second subordinate fluctuation stop flag 223f is set to ON (S1705: Yes), the second subordinate fluctuation stop flag 223f is set to OFF (S1706), and the second display temporary stop command is displayed. Is generated (S1707). The second temporary stop command for display, similarly to the first temporary stop command for display, controls the display control device 114 to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol that is being variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a command to do. Similarly to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is also temporarily stopped in the display mode of temporary stop.

When the display second temporary stop command is set, the measurement of the variation time of the second special symbol measured in the secondary second variation time storage area 223j is interrupted (temporarily stopped).

With such a configuration, the variation time of the second special symbol can be accurately managed, and even when the variation display is restarted, the variation display can be accurately performed with the remaining variation time.

It is determined whether the subordinate first fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to ON (S1709). If it is determined that the subordinate first variation restart flag 223g is set to ON (S1709: Yes), the subordinate first variation restart flag 223g is set to OFF (S1710).

It is determined whether the measured variation time of the first special symbol stored in the subordinate first variation time storage area 223i is 3 s or less (S1711). When it is determined that the measured remaining variation time of the first special symbol stored in the subordinate first variation time storage area 223i is 3 s or less (S1711: Yes), the first short variation mode for display. A restart command is set (S1712). When the display first short variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display first short variation mode restart command causes the display control device 114 to display the text "Display the temporarily displayed lottery result of the variation display!" in the left display area Dm1 for the remaining variation time. After that, based on the confirmation command output from the main controller 110, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the lottery result. In addition, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the character display changes to the character "I have displayed the lottery result of the variable display that was temporarily stopped!", and continues to be displayed until the next fluctuation starts. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured variation time of the first special symbol stored in the sub-first variation time storage area 223i is longer than 3s (S1711: No), the display first normal variation mode restarts. The command is set (S1713). When this display first normal variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display first normal variation mode resuming command displays the character "temporarily changing the variation display which is changing!" in the left side display area Dm1 for the remaining variation time, and all of the first special symbols. The main symbols (three symbols on the left middle right) are variably displayed for the remaining fluctuation time, and then, based on the confirmation command output from the main controller 110, the first special symbol is a symbol showing the lottery result. Display the stop. Next, the measurement of the fluctuation time in the sub first fluctuation time storage area 223i is restarted (S1714).

With this configuration, the main control unit 110 does not have to perform a process for giving an instruction about the remaining variation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the remaining variation time, and the voice lamp control is performed. Since the device 113 determines the remaining fluctuation time and selects the remaining fluctuation mode, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, the player may overlook it or may be too short to understand the notification result. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, if the remaining time is within the reference time (3 s in the present embodiment), the player is informed immediately that the lottery result will be displayed, and then the notification result is displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the interrupted (temporarily stopped) notification result is displayed.

Furthermore, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character is displayed to inform that the variable display that has been suspended is stopped and displayed, so when the remaining variable time is extremely short (for example, within 1 second) Moreover, the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

Further, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3 s in the present embodiment), the player is notified that the notification result that has been interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being variable displayed, so the game The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the subordinate first variation restart flag 223g is off (S1709: No), it is determined whether the subordinate second variation restart flag 223h is set to on (S1715). When it is determined that the second subordinate fluctuation restart flag 223h is set to ON (S1715: Yes), the second subordinate fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to OFF (S1716).

It is determined whether the measured remaining variation time of the second special symbol stored in the sub second variation time storage area 223j is 3 s or less (S1717). When it is determined that the measured remaining variation time of the second special symbol stored in the secondary second variation time storage area 223j is 3 s or less (S1717: Yes), the second short variation mode for display. A restart command is set (S1718). When this display second short variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display second short variation mode restart command causes the display control device 114 to display the text "Display the temporarily displayed variation display lottery result!" in the right side display area Dm2 for the remaining variation time. After that, based on the confirmation command output from the main controller 110, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the lottery result. In addition, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the character display changes to the character "I have displayed the lottery result of the variable display that was temporarily stopped!", and continues to be displayed until the next fluctuation starts. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured variation time of the second special symbol stored in the sub second variation time storage area 223j is longer than 3s (S1717: No), the display second normal variation mode restarts. The command is set (S1719). When the display second normal variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display second normal variation mode resuming command displays the characters "temporarily stopped variation display is changing!" in the right side display area Dm2 during the remaining change time, and all of the second special symbols are displayed. After the main symbol (three symbols in the left middle right) is variably displayed for the remaining fluctuation time, based on the confirmation command output from the main control device 110, the second special symbol is shown in the symbol indicating the lottery result. Display the stop. Next, the measurement of the fluctuation time in the sub second fluctuation time storage area 223j is restarted (S1720). On the other hand, if it is determined that the second subordinate fluctuation restart flag 223h is off (S1715: No), this process ends.

With this configuration, the main control unit 110 does not have to perform a process for giving an instruction about the remaining variation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the remaining variation time, and the voice lamp control is performed. Since the device 113 determines the remaining fluctuation time and selects the remaining fluctuation mode, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, the player may overlook it or may be too short to understand the notification result. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, if the remaining time is within the reference time (3 s in the present embodiment), the player is informed immediately that the lottery result will be displayed, and then the notification result is displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the interrupted (temporarily stopped) notification result is displayed.

Furthermore, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character is displayed to inform that the variable display that has been suspended is stopped and displayed, so when the remaining variable time is extremely short (for example, within 1 second) Moreover, the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

Further, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3 s in the present embodiment), the player is notified that the notification result that has been interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being variable displayed, so the game The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

Further, in the present embodiment, when resuming the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been interrupted, the fact is informed to the player by characters, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the voice is not limited thereto. Alternatively, it may be configured to notify by a lamp or the like. In addition, like the display mode in which the player knows that the change has been resumed (for example, it is displayed as an animation notifying that the variable display in which the character etc. has been interrupted is displayed) Of course, the notification may be made in a display mode only for restarting the display. By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the suspended variable display is restarted.

In the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to select the variation pattern according to the remaining variation time. Not limited to this, when the main control device 110 restarts the temporary stoppage of the fluctuation timetable, the fluctuation pattern of the same fluctuation time or the fluctuation time slightly shorter than the remaining fluctuation time is used depending on the remaining fluctuation time. The variation pattern may be selected. When a variation pattern with a slightly shorter variation time is selected, the voice lamp control device 113 controls by delaying the difference between the remaining variation time and the variation pattern with a slightly shorter variation time to display the variation. , It is possible to perform a variation table time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol according to the remaining variation time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the pending rearrangement process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this reservation rearrangement processing processing (S1413). The hold rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the hold rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413) is a hold symbol displayed in the hold establishment order on the third symbol display device 81 when the player operates the frame button 22 during the valid period. The process of setting the display to be rearranged in the variable display start order is executed.

In the pending rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413), first, it is determined whether the rearrangement is possible (S1801). The sortable period is a row of gaming states other than during a jackpot game or a state where there is no hold established by different starting ports 63a and 63b (a state where there is no more than one hold for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). It is set in the exchangeable period.

When it is determined that the rearrangement is possible (S1801: Yes), a display button operation display command is generated (S1802). Upon receiving this display button operation display command, the display control device 114 displays the characters "may be rearranged!!" on the third symbol display device 81, and allows the player to operate the frame button 22. Is notified for a certain period. The notification mode is not limited to this, and may be performed by voice or the like, or may be configured to control to turn on a dedicated lamp or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the rearrangement period is provided, the player can easily recognize the timing when the rearrangement operation becomes possible, and the frame switch 22 can be operated at an appropriate timing. it can. Further, the rearrangement period is not particularly provided, and if the rearrangement is possible when the frame button 22 is operated, the rearrangement display may be executed.

It is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated (S1803). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (S1803: Yes), the sorting flags 223k7 of all the holding areas in which the holding data of the subordinate sorting holding storage area 223k is stored are set to ON. (S1804).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the rearrangeable period (S1801: No), and when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (S1803: No), the process ends.

With such a configuration, when the player wants to sort, it is possible to sort only the reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The player can know the actual variable display start order, and can know in advance the special symbol to be noticed next (the special symbol that will be the variable display start). Therefore, a game can be played while assuming a display area to be viewed in advance, and the game can be played smoothly.

In addition, in the configuration of the pachinko machine, the distribution device 630, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 64a is alternately configured because it is easy to win the game ball, the first special symbol and the second special symbol The game can be played evenly and efficiently.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the arrangement of the holding symbols is executed based on the player operating the frame button 22, but the arrangement is not limited to this, and is executed every time a new holding is stored. Of course, it may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the player can always accurately recognize the variable display start order by the reserved symbols rearranged in the variable start order.

In the present embodiment, the rearrangeable period is other than during a jackpot game or in a state where there is no hold established by different starting ports 63a and 63b (a state in which there is no one or more hold for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set as a rearrangeable period even during a jackpot game. Conversely, the rearrangeable period is a period in which a specific variable display mode is displayed. It may be set to other than the above, and may be appropriately determined.

When the jackpot game is set to the rearrangeable period, it is necessary to perform the rearrangement in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display temporarily stopped during the fluctuation display. Specifically, the variation start time is calculated based on the determined variation time (variation display mode) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is being held and the remaining variation time during the temporary stop. Then, the rearrangement order is determined, and the rearrangement is performed based on the rearrangement order. With this configuration, even when a new hold display mode is displayed during the jackpot game, the hold display mode and the display mode already displayed before the hold display mode are displayed together. By rearranging in an accurate variation start order, it is possible to notify the player of the accurate variation start order even during a jackpot gaming machine.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rearrangement hold storage area 203u of the main control device 110 and the subordinate rearrangement hold storage area 223k of the voice lamp control device 113 are configured to store data that is rearranged. Not limited to this, the main control device 110 is configured to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of various data necessary for rearrangement (winning judgment result, jackpot type, variation pattern type, etc.) by a winning command. The voice lamp control device 113 alone may be configured to perform rearrangement.

With this configuration, the main control device 110 backs up various data necessary for rearrangement in the RAM 203 even when a power failure occurs, and when the power is restored, the various types of data are restored in the startup process (FIG. 32). By outputting the data to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 rearranges the data based on the various data, so that it is possible to easily recover from the power failure.

In the present embodiment, by the remaining variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol during the start of variation and the variation pattern type of the data stored in the rearrangement storage area 203u, the first special symbol or the first reserved symbol The fluctuation start time of 2 special symbols was calculated, and the fluctuation start order was calculated. Not limited to this, at the time of winning a game ball, by determining whether or not the variation mode is a reach, it is determined whether or not the variation mode is longer than a certain time (time information), and the time information and the variation The variation start order may be roughly determined and rearranged from the remaining variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. With such a configuration, at the time of winning, it is determined whether or not the variation mode is a reach (whether the long-time variation mode or the short-time variation mode), and the accurate variation time (variation mode) is determined. Even with the pachinko machine 10 that is determined by information such as the number of reserved balls at the start of fluctuation, the player can be notified of the rough fluctuation start order.

Therefore, the player may not be in the exact change start order, but the fact that the rearrangement has been performed is included in the long-term change mode (reach change mode) being held. , You can play games with the expectation of a big hit.

In the present embodiment, the rearrangeable period is determined by the game state, but is not limited thereto, it is determined whether the rearrangement is possible (for example, the state where the pending symbol display is displayed), It may be configured to notify that rearrangement is possible. With such a configuration, it is possible to flexibly set the period during which sorting is possible, and it is possible to give the player more opportunities to sort.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 68. In the above-described first embodiment, the configuration has been described in which the type of the fluctuation pattern table 202d for acquiring the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is switched depending on the game state.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment, a special symbol is variably displayed a predetermined number of times as the type of the variation pattern table 202d when a small hit different from the big hit is won. Up to the above, the configuration is different from the first embodiment in that the configuration is switched to a specific variation pattern table.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
In the electrical configuration of the second embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed from those of the electrical configuration of the first embodiment. Specifically, a small hit random number table 202e (see FIG. 63(a)) and a small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63(b)) are added, and the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d are changed. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit random number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hitting random number table 202e. In the present embodiment, when making a big hit determination for the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the big hit determination value that have been acquired match, and if they do not match, the small hit random number table 202e. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value set in (see FIG. 63(a)).

In the small hit random number table 202e, as shown in FIG. 63(a), the number of small hit determination values is differently assigned for each of the normal game state and the probability variation game state. In the normal game state, the judgment value is not set. As a result, in the normal gaming state, the small hit determination value is not set, and the small hit is not won (determined) in the normal gaming state. Further, in the probability variation gaming state, the value of "100 to 129" is set as the determination value of the small hit with respect to the value of the special hit random number counter C1. That is, in the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 being acquired is any of "100 to 129", it is determined to be a small hit. The determination value for the small hit is set to a value different from the determination value (“0 to 9” in the present embodiment) determined to be the big hit. Therefore, when it is determined that it is out (not a big hit), it is determined whether it is a small hit, and it is possible to add a difference in added value even in the out.

As will be described later, when it is determined that a small hit, a small win of 2R (round) in which the first variable winning device 65 opens for a short time (1 second) is executed. The small hit is configured so that the number of game balls (prize balls) that the player can obtain is smaller than that of the big hit (big hits A to C) (because the number of rounds is small and the opening time is short). In addition, the game state is not changed even after the small hit game. On the other hand, after the small hit game, since the variation pattern selection table 202d that is relatively easy to select a relatively long variation time is easily set, the long variation time of the first special symbol is easily selected.

Here, in the probability variation gaming state, the lottery of the first special symbol is disadvantageous for the player as compared to the lottery of the second special symbol (the jackpot B is determined and the continuation of the probability variation gaming state ends). Since it is set, the player expects to reduce the number of times of lottery (the number of times of variation) in the first special symbol as much as possible. Therefore, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, by winning the small hit, by facilitating the selection of a long variation time of the first special symbol thereafter, it is possible to give an advantageous state to the player. it can. Therefore, the player can feel an advantage even with a small hit with few prize balls. As a result, small hits can be expected in addition to the big hits, and it is possible to suppress the problem of getting tired of the game early.

Next, the small hit selection table 202f stored in the RAM 202 of the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63(b). FIG. 63(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit selection table 202f. The small hit selection table 202f is a data table for determining the type of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d to be transferred based on the value of an acquired transfer counter (not shown) described later when the small hit is won.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the small hit is configured to be determined only in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability variation gaming state. When this small hit is won, the type of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d for selecting the fluctuation pattern selected when the win/no judgment result is out of order is deviated (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is selected. If it is in a state (hereinafter referred to as normal table selection), one of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 transition tables 1 to 3 (see FIGS. 64(a) to 64(c)) becomes the value of the transition counter. It is decided based on.

In the small hit selection table 202d, when the normal table is selected, the transition counter deviates (probability change) variation table 1 from “0 to 100”, and the deviation counter deviates (probability variation) variation table 2 from “101 to 150”. However, the deviation (probability change) variation transition table 3 is set for each of "151 to 198". Further, the number of transitions is set in each of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition tables 1 to 3. The number of transitions is the number of variations of the first special symbol until the table is set and automatically switched to the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63(c)). ..

For example, in the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition table 1 (see FIG. 64(a)), as shown in the small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63(b)), the number of transitions is set to 10 times. As a result, if the result of the judgment is out of the range from the time that the first special symbol is changed 10 times after the table is set, this deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 (Fig. 64(a ) See)), the variation pattern is selected. If the first special symbol fluctuates 10 times, the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63(c)) is set, and if the result of judgment is wrong, this deviation (probability change) special figure A variation pattern is selected from the 1 normal variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63(c)).

As will be described later in detail, in the outlier (probable change) special figure 1 variation transition tables 1 to 3, a variation pattern having a longer variation time than the outlying (probable variation) normal variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63(c)) is generated. It is configured to be easily selected. Here, in the present embodiment, it is advantageous for the player to be drawn more in the second special symbol than in the first special symbol, that is, to reduce the number of times the first special symbol is drawn. Therefore, the number of times of lottery in the first special symbol, which is set to have a long variation time of the first special symbol, can be reduced per unit time, which can be in an advantageous state for the player. Therefore, by setting the deviation (probability change) variation transition tables 1 to 3 that are won for the small hit, it is possible to give the player a state advantageous to the player. In addition, as the number of transitions is larger, the number of times a variation pattern having a longer variation time is selected can be increased, so that the number of variations of the first special symbol can be further reduced, and a state advantageous to the player is set. can do.

If any of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3 is selected and the small hit is won, as shown in the small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63(b)), the transition counter is displayed. If the value of is any of “0 to 10”, the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition table 4 is set. In the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition table 4, 100 is set as the number of transitions. Further, as will be described later, in the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4 (see FIG. 65), a fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time is easily selected than in the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3. It is configured. Therefore, setting the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 variation transition table 4 can be more advantageous for the player than setting the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition table 1 to 3. ..

Further, the number of shifts of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 variation transition table 4 is 100 times, and this deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition table 4 is set over a long period of time. Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is drawn by the second special symbol, since the jackpot C is always determined, the probability variation game state is continuously set even after the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to be done. If the probability variation gaming state is continuously set, the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition table 4 continues to be set until the first special symbol is variably displayed up to the number of times set by the number of transitions, so the game An advantageous state for the person can be continuously set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63(c), a deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern table 202d which is one of the fluctuation pattern selection tables 202d in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 63C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern table 202d. The deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal variation pattern table 202d is a probability variation gaming state in the game state, and the winning/disapproval determination result is deviation, and one of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition tables 1 to 4 is set. If not, it is a table in which the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected.

In this deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63(c)), a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds and a normal reach composed of a fluctuation time of 60 seconds are used. And the variation pattern of the super reach, which has a variation time of 90 seconds, are set.

Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each variation pattern and set, and the type of one variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired at the start of variation. ..

The outlying (probable variation) special figure 1 normal variation pattern selection table 202d is configured to determine an outlying variation pattern with a probability of 101/199. The variation time of the out-of-range variation pattern selected in the probability variation game state is 30 seconds, and the variation time of the out-of-range variation pattern determined in the normal game state is 5 seconds (FIG. 11(a)). The fluctuation time is longer than that of the reference). Therefore, in the probability variation gaming state, the variation pattern having a longer variation time than the normal gaming state is configured to be easily selected in the first special symbol, and is set to be advantageous to the player. Further, the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, which are set to have a lower probability of being selected than the outlying variation patterns but have a longer variation time, are set. As a result, a variation pattern of a longer variation time is determined, so that a state advantageous to the player can be given (in the present embodiment, the probability variation game state is given to the player for a long period).

Next, with reference to FIG. 64(a), the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 variation transition table 1 will be described. FIG. 64A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 change transition table 1. This deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 is set to the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63(c)) in the probability variation game state, and the small hit is won. In this case, the table is selected if the value of the transition counter (not shown) is one of the values "0-100". This deviation (probability change) special figure 1 transition table 1 has been set the number of times of transfer 10 times, until the first special symbol fluctuates 10 times, or until the change of the game state is executed continuously set Is configured to be.

As shown in FIG. 64( a ), the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 shows the deviation pattern of the deviation of the throat composed of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds and the normal reach composed of the fluctuation time of 60 seconds. A variation pattern, a variation pattern of super reach composed of a variation time of 90 seconds, a variation pattern of long reach 1 constituted of a variation time of 180 seconds, and a variation pattern of long reach 2 constituted of a variation time of 600 seconds. The fluctuation patterns and are set respectively.

In this deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 (see FIG. 64(a)), a long that was not set in the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 63(c)) The variation patterns of reach 1 and long reach 2 are set. The long reach 1 and the long reach 2 are set to have a long variation time of 180 seconds and 600 seconds. Therefore, during this variation time, a new variation is not started in the first special symbol, so the probability variation gaming state will be continued by being drawn by the second special symbol in that period. That is, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation game state, the variation time of the deviation of the first special symbol can be considered as a period in which the continuation of the probability variation game is confirmed.

Here, in the probability variation gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol is, as described in the first embodiment, if the result of the hit determination is incorrect, the deviation (probability variation) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d (Fig. 13(b)), the variation pattern is selected from the hit (probable variation) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 13(c)) if the result of the win/loss determination is a big hit. In the outlier (probable change) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 13B), the outlying variation pattern configured with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected with a probability of 151/199. It is configured so that a variation pattern that is out of the ordinary can be extremely easily selected. Further, even the variation pattern of the super reach, which has the longest variation time, has a variation time of 20 seconds, and the selection probability is 8/199, which is hard to be selected as compared with other variation patterns. Therefore, in the probability variation gaming state, if the result of the determination whether or not the second special symbol is off, the variation pattern of the short variation time is easy to be selected, and therefore more lottery is selected until the first special symbol varies once. It can be executed with 2 special symbols.

Furthermore, in the hold of the first special symbol, the big hit B is stored as a hold, and the period until the lottery result is displayed (actually, the period until the variation display is started) has a high probability. It can be replaced as a period in which a winning/winning lottery of the second special symbol is executed in a state (a period during which the actual probability variation gaming state continues).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, an effect as if the probability variation game state is set for a finite time is performed as shown in FIG. This effect determines the variation time (time until the variation that becomes the jackpot B of the first special symbol is started) in which the hit determination result of the first special symbol executed in the probability variation gaming state is out, and the time is determined. It is performed as an effect of notifying the player as the remaining time of the probability change within the range. By this effect, the player can play the game with the expectation that as many big hits as possible with the second special symbol will be executed while the probability variation game state remains, and that as many big hit games as possible will be executed.

Further, the content of the newly stored first special symbol storage is determined, the remaining period of the probability variation gaming state is determined, and the remaining period of the probability variation gaming state is extended within the range (FIG. 5 ( By executing b)), the player can be given a sense of relief. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the remaining period of the probability variation gaming state will be extended. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation other than the jackpot, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the present embodiment, in the probability variation game state, the symbol indicating the first special symbol is a symbol row consisting of two types of "○" and "x" in the second display area Dn of the third symbol display device 81. Displayed in parallel in two columns. Even if it is a variation pattern that is out of reach, even if it is a variation pattern that reaches, a display mode is displayed in which "○" and "x" are repeatedly displayed at high speed and alternately, and the success/failure determination result is shown when the variation time elapses (big hit). If there is, "○" is aligned, and if they are out of alignment, "X" is aligned, or a combination of "○" and "x" is displayed.

Therefore, the player, when in the probability variation game state, will mainly play the game by paying attention to the symbol indicating the second special symbol displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first special symbol from being bored even if the first special symbol is variably displayed for a long time. In addition, even if the player does not know that the longer the deviation change time of the first special symbol is, the more advantageous it is for the player. It can be carried out.

In the present embodiment, the symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn, and the symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The symbols corresponding to the first special symbol may be displayed in the first display area Dm, and the symbols corresponding to the second special symbol may be displayed in the second display area Dn.

Furthermore, the symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn, and the symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is also an inconspicuous symbol like the second display area Dn and is displayed in a small display area. Alternatively, instead of displaying on the third symbol display device 81, an LED display may be used. With this configuration, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the effect display of the probability variation period rather than the variable display of the special symbol, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the game play in a complicated manner. In the case of displaying with an LED display or the like, for example, a plurality of petals may be respectively lit with LEDs, and the winning/decision determination may be notified by a combination of the lighting. With this configuration, it can be difficult to understand that the LED corresponds to the second special symbol, and the player can concentrate on the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 64(b) to 64(c) and FIG. 65, the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 2 to 4 will be described. FIG. 64B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 2. In the outlier (probability change) special figure 1 variation transition table 2, the probability of selection of the outlier is lower than that in the above-mentioned outlier (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition table 1, while the super reach and long reach 1 are selected. , Long reach 2 is selected at a higher probability. Further, the number of transitions is also set to 20 times, which is set to double (see FIG. 63(b)). That is, the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 variation transition table 2 (see FIG. 64(a)) has a longer fluctuation time than the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 variation transition table 2 (see FIG. 64(b)). Since the variation pattern thus selected is easily selected, the probability variation game state is likely to be continued for a long time, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to change the size of the value that is advantageous to the player by the table selected from the small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63(b)), and predict which table has been selected by the player. You can expect that a better table will be selected.

FIG. 64C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 3. The outlier (probability change) special figure 1 variation transition table 3 is set to have a lower probability that the normal reach is selected than the outlier (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition table 2 (see FIG. 64(c)). On the other hand, the super-reach, long-reach 1, and long-reach 2 are set to have a high probability of being selected. Further, the number of shifts is set to 30 times, which is larger than that of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 change shift table 2. That is, the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 3 is configured so that the probability variation period can be set longer than the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 2, and is set as a table advantageous to the player. There is.

FIG. 65 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 change transition table 4. Compared with the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 3, the probability of selecting a deviation pattern of normal deviation or normal reach is set to be low in the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4. The probability of selection of reach and long reach 2 is set high, and instead of long reach 1, the variation pattern of long reach 3 composed of 1200 seconds, which has a longer variation time than long reach 2, deviates (probably changes) It is set to be selected with a higher probability than the long reach 2 of the 1-variation shift table 3. Further, the number of transitions is set to 100, which is larger than the number of deviation (probability change) special figure 1 transition transition table 3.

Therefore, the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 variation transition table 4 is configured so that the variation pattern having the longest variation time is easily selected from the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition tables 1 to 3. , The probability variation gaming state is configured to be most easily continued for the longest time. Therefore, it is constructed as the most advantageous table for the player.

In addition, this deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4 wins the small hit when any of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3 is determined, and further shift counter Is configured to be selected only with a probability of 0 to 10, that is, with a probability of 11/199. Therefore, since it is not determined that the frequency is low for the player, it is possible to suppress the problem that the damage on the game store side becomes excessively large. Further, in the state where the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3 are set, the player has high expectation for the small hit, and can expect the player to obtain a result of winning/deciding other than the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Main Controller 110 in Second Embodiment>
Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment is different from the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the first embodiment by a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20). ) The special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S107) of the one special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107) which is one process is the first special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 66, S230). The difference is that it has been changed to. The other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and therefore the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

With reference to FIG. 66, the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S230) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S230).

In the first special symbol fluctuation start process 2 (FIG. 66, S230), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding counter 203e is acquired (S311). It is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S312). If the value (N1) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203e is greater than 0 (S312: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding sphere counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S313). .. It is determined whether or not the value of the transition number counter (not shown) is greater than 0.

Here, when any of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 variation transition tables 1 to 4 is set, the transition number counter indicates the number of transitions set in each table (see FIG. 63(b)). This is a counter for counting the number of transitions by being set and subtracted by one each time the first special symbol is variably displayed. It should be noted that this transition number counter is set to an initial value of 0 in the initialized state. In addition, when the power is cut off or the like, the count value is backed up and held for a certain period (for example, one week).

If it is determined that the value of the transition number counter is greater than 0, that is, if the transition number is set (S314: Yes), the value of the transition number counter is decremented by 1 and updated (S315). .. It is determined whether the updated value of the transition number counter is 0 (S316). When it is determined that the value of the transition number counter is 0 (S316: Yes), the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (normal table) is set (S317). Then, the process of S318 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S316 that the value of the transition number counter is larger than 0 (S316: No), the process of S318 is executed.

In this way, when the value of the transition number counter becomes 0, the normal table is set, so that it is possible to switch and set to the type of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d determined by the number of transitions. In addition, since the number of transitions is set differently depending on the set table, the player can enjoy different variation pattern effects up to different number of variations.

In the process of S318, the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S318). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of holding area 1→execution area, holding area 2→holding area 1, holding area 3→holding area 2, holding area 4→holding area 3.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 is executed (S319). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (FIG. 67, S319) will be described in detail later, but is set based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. Based on the game state, the jackpot determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is executed.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S306). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, S306) is the same process as the process already described in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S319) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S319).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S319), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is acquired (S421). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state (probability variation in progress) (S422). Whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state is determined by whether or not a probability variation flag (not shown) is set to ON. If the probability variation flag is on (that is, the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state (during probability variation)) (S422: Yes), based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability, special winning It is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is acquired (S423). On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is off (that is, the game state is a low probability game state (not in probability variation)) (S422: No), the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability time (Fig. 10(b)), it is determined whether the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches the big hit random value, and the lottery result is acquired (S424).

It is determined whether the big hit flag 203o is on (S425). Here, when the big hit flag 203o is set to ON, it indicates that it is a case where the change to be a big hit is started in the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203o is commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that the variation that is a big jackpot is not executed at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. I am configuring. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that the jackpots are continuously generated in a short time and the loss on the amusement store side becomes excessively large.

In the process of S425, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203o is off (S425: Yes), the big hit flag 203o is set to on for the first special symbol (S427). The lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S428). Based on the acquired value of the hit type counter, the big hit symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S429).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S425 that the big hit flag 203o is on (S425: No), the process of S430 is executed. Further, in the processing of S426, when it is determined that the hit/miss determination result in the processing of S423 and S424 is out (S426: No), the processing of S430 is executed.

In the process of S430, it is determined whether or not the hit/no hit determination result is a small hit (S430). When it is determined that the hit/no hit determination result is a small hit (S430: Yes), a small hit process is executed (S431). The details of this small hitting process (S431) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68, but the value of a migration counter (not shown) is acquired, and the migration destination table is determined based on that value. The process is executed.

After the processing of S431 is executed, it is set to display the symbol indicating the small hit of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 (S432). Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the process of S430, the hit/no hit determination result is not a small hit, that is, when it is determined that it is out (S430: No), a symbol indicating the removal of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37. The display is set (S433). Then, this process is completed.

In this way, even if the hit/no hit determination results of S423 and S424 are hits, if the jackpot flag 203o has already been set to ON, the jackpot is not decided by the processing of S425 but is forcibly decided as a miss. To be done. This prevents the first special symbol and the second special symbol from being changed to a big hit at the same time, and can prevent the big hit from continuing in a short time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be a big jackpot at the same time, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously a jackpot. The variation may be configured to be performed. In such a configuration, in the probability variation gaming state, by configuring the variation time that the hit determination result of the first special symbol is long, the period of the actual probability variation gaming state can be set long.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a small hit process (S431) which is one process in the first special symbol big hit determination process (FIG. 67, S319) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hitting process (S431).

In the small hitting process (FIG. 68, S431), first, the value of the transition counter is acquired (S441). Here, the transition counter (not shown) is set in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and is incremented by 1 and updated every time the main process (FIG. 41, S1250) is executed. The transition counter is a counter value that is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 198", and is set to "0" which is the initial value in the initialized state.

When the processing of S441 is executed, based on the value of the migration counter, the migration destination table is the migration counter from the small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63(b)), the migration counter, whether or not the first special symbol currently selected A selection is made based on the type of the variation pattern selection table 202d that is referred to when the determination result is out (S442). By S442, a migration command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the type of the selected migration destination table is set (S443). Then, this process is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a small win is won, a lottery is performed to switch the type of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the case where the result of the determination whether or not the first special symbol is won is out. When the change of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is determined, the change pattern selection table 202d is set for the number of transitions set. After that, when the set number of transitions is executed, a predetermined variation pattern selection table 202d (in the present embodiment, a deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 63(c))) Can be switched to.

As a result, when the player wins the small hit, the player can expect not only the prize balls obtained by the small hit game but also the switching of the variation pattern selection table 202d. Further, since the magnitude of the obtained value is different depending on the type of the changed variation pattern selection table 202d, it is possible to be interested in the type and improve the interest of the game.

When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203o is off, that is, when it is determined that the variation of the jackpot in the second special symbol has not started (S425: No), it is executed in the process of S403 or S404. It is determined whether the lottery result is a big hit (S406). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S406: Yes), the big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S407). After that, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S408), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the jackpot type (S409). Then, this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S405, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203o is on (S405: Yes), or if the lottery result is determined to be out of the process of S406 (S406: No), the The symbol indicating the deviation of the first special symbol is set in the 1 special symbol display device 37 (S410).

In this way, even if the lottery result based on the value of the special symbol jackpot random number C1 actually obtained is a jackpot, the jackpot flag 203o is already set to ON, that is, by the second special symbol, When the variation that becomes a big hit has been started, the setting of the disengagement is forcedly executed with the first special symbol. As a result, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation that is a big hit is not executed at the same time, and in the short period, the variation that becomes a big hit is started continuously, and the game store side It is possible to suppress the problem of excessive damage.

All or a part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

<Characteristic A group> (It is difficult to win special figure 1 with electric support)
A first entrance through which a game ball can enter, and a second entrance different from the first entrance,
A first state in which the game ball is guided so that the game ball easily enters the second ball inlet, and a state in which the game ball is less likely to enter the second ball inlet than the first state There is a movable piece that can be moved to two states, and the movable piece is moved to the first state, so that the flow path through which the game ball can enter the first ball inlet is the second state. The gaming machine A1 is configured so as to be narrower than the case.

According to the gaming machine A1, a first ball entrance into which a game ball can enter and a second ball entrance are provided. Due to the movable change, a first state in which the game ball is guided so that the game ball can easily enter the second entrance, and a state in which the game ball is less likely to enter the second entrance than the first state To the second state. By moving the movable piece to the first state, the flow path into which the game ball can enter the first ball inlet is narrower than that in the second state. As a result, it becomes difficult to enter one of the entrances, so that the interest of the game can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired early.

In the gaming machine A1, a first flow path in which a game ball easily enters the first ball inlet, and a second flow path in which a game ball easily enters the second ball inlet than the first channel. By having the movable piece move to the first state, the game ball easily flows down the second flow path, and the first flow path has a game state more than that in the second state. A gaming machine A2, which regulates the amount of flow of the ball.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a first flow path through which the game ball easily enters the first ball inlet and a second flow path through which the game ball easily enters the second ball inlet than the first channel are provided. There is. By moving the movable variable to the first state, it is easy for the game ball to flow down the second flow path, and the flow down amount of the game ball flowing down the first flow path is regulated as compared with the case where the game ball is in the second state. .. Thereby, there is an effect that the amount of balls entering the first ball entrance can be efficiently reduced.

In the gaming machine A1 or the gaming machine A2, whether or not the first lottery game is successful is judged based on the game ball entering the first ball entrance, and the game ball enters the second ball entrance. On the basis of the fact that the win/loss judgment means for executing the win/no judgment of the second lottery game and the hit/damage determination means determine that the hit is successful, the player is more advantageous than the normal game state and the normal game state. It has a game state determining means for determining either one of the special game state and the game state setting means for setting the normal game state or the special game state determined by the game state determining means. A game machine A3.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the game ball entering the first ball entrance by the win/fail judgment means, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed, and based on the game ball entering the second ball entrance. Then, the win/no determination of the second lottery game is executed. Based on the hit determination means, the game state determination means determines either the normal game state or the special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The normal game state or the special game state determined by the game state determining means is set by the game state setting means. As a result, a game can be played in the expectation that the special game state will be set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine A3, the game state setting means sets, as the special game state, a higher probability that the hit/miss determination means determines that the hit is higher than that in the normal game state. Machine A4.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3, the special game state is set to have a higher probability that the state setting means will determine the hit by the hit/miss determination means than in the normal game state. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the game state determining means determines whether the normal game state or the special game state is based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance. Either one is determined, and the first entrance and the second entrance are determined so that the ratios for determining the normal game state and the special game state are different. Characteristic game machine A5.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3 or A4, the gaming state determining means causes the gaming ball to enter the first entrance or the second entrance. And the special game state are determined, and the first entrance and the second entrance are determined so that the ratios for determining the normal game state and the special game state are different. There is an effect that it can be expected that the lottery will be executed at the ball entrance.

In the gaming machine A5, the game state determination means determines the normal game state when the game ball enters the first entrance, rather than when the game ball enters the second entrance. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being easy to play.

According to the gaming machine A6, when the game ball enters the first entrance, it is easier for the game state determining means to determine the normal game state than when the game ball enters the second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can continuously play the special game state.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6 has a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance. Then
The gaming machine A7, wherein the privilege granting means grants privilege of different sizes to the first entrance and the second entrance.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines A1 to A6, the following effect is obtained. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance, the benefit giving means gives a benefit to the player. Benefits of different sizes are provided by the privilege granting means at the first entrance and the second entrance. As a result, there is an effect that more benefits can be given to the player.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, a movable determining unit that determines whether to move the movable piece from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and the special game state are When set, the gaming machine A8 has a movability setting means for easily setting the movability determining means to move the movable piece from the second state to the first state. ..

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the satisfaction of the lottery conditions, the movement determining means determines whether or not the movable piece is moved from the second state to the first state. When the special game state is set, the movement rate setting means makes it easy to set the movement determining means to move the movable piece from the second state to the second state. Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be easily changed.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A8, based on a first operation by the player, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, an adjusting means for adjusting a launching force of the launching means based on an operation by the player. A first flow-down area in which a game ball shot with a firing force adjusted by the adjusting means flows down, and a game ball shot with a firing force adjusted by the adjusting means based on a second operation of the player flows down. And a game area in which a second flow-down area different from the first flow-down area is formed, and the game ball flowing down in the first flow-down area is configured to be able to enter only into the first inlet port. The gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow-down area is configured to be able to enter the first entrance and the second entrance, respectively.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effect is produced. That is, the game ball is launched by the launching means. The firing force of the launching means is adjusted by the adjusting means based on the operation of the player. A first flow-down area in which a game ball fired with a firing force that has been fired with a firing force adjusted by the adjusting means based on a first operation by the player flows down, and an adjusting means based on a second operation by the player The second flow-down area in which the game balls fired with the firing force adjusted by is flowed down is formed in the game area. The game ball flowing down the first flow-down area is configured to be able to enter the first entrance, and the game ball flowing down the second flow-down area enters the first entrance and the second entrance, respectively. Configured to be possible. This can provide the player with the joy of operating. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine A9, as the first inlet, a common first inlet that is arranged at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first downflow region or the second downflow region can enter, and the second downflow A gaming machine A10, in which at least a one-sided first ball entrance into which only game balls flowing down the area can enter is arranged.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A9, a common first position where a gaming ball that has flowed down the first downflow area or the second downflow area is placed as a first entrance hole is provided. Since at least the ball entrance and the one-side first ball entrance into which the game ball that has flowed down the second flow-down area can enter are arranged, it is possible to effectively change the interest depending on the game state.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the first entrance is arranged below the second entrance, and the movable piece is moved to the first state to thereby move the movable piece. The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the passage of the game ball through the passage into which the ball can enter the first ball inlet is restricted by one piece as compared with the second state.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines A1 to A10, the following effect is obtained. That is, the first ball entrance is arranged below the second ball entrance. By moving the movable piece to the first state, the passage of the game ball to the flow path that can enter the first ball entrance by the movable piece is restricted more than in the second state. Thereby, there is an effect that the inflow amount of the game ball can be easily changed.

In any of the gaming machines A3 to A11, based on that the special game state is set by the game state setting means, the movable piece is set to be easily moved to the second state rather than the normal game state. A gaming machine A12 having a setting means.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A3 to A11, the movable piece is set by the movable setting means more than the normal gaming state based on the fact that the special game state is set by the game state setting means. Since it is set to be easily movable to the second state, it is possible to set a period that is advantageous to the player and suppress an inconvenience that the player gets tired.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, the game ball has a passage opening through which the game ball can pass, and the game ball has a passage gate that satisfies a lottery condition by passing through the passage opening. In the case of the two states, a common flow path that is a flow path through which the game ball can enter is formed in the passage gate or the first entrance port, and by being moved to the first state, It is regulated by the movable piece that a game ball enters the first ball inlet, and a single channel that is a channel through which the game ball enters is formed in the passage gate. Playing machine A13.

According to the game machine A13, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines A1 to A12, the following effect is obtained. That is, the game ball has a passage opening through which the game ball can pass, and a passage gate is provided in which the lottery conditions are satisfied by the game ball passing through the passage opening. When the movable piece is in the second state, a common flow path that is a flow path through which the game ball can enter the passage gate or the first entrance is formed. When the movable piece is moved to the first state, the movable piece is regulated from entering the game ball into the first ball inlet, and the single passage, which is the passage through which the game ball enters the passage gate, is formed. It is formed. Thereby, there is an effect that the player can play the game advantageously.

In any of the gaming machines A3 to A12, the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game and the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game are displayed at the same time. A gaming machine A14 having display control means capable of being displayed on the means.

According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A3 to A13, the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the determination means and the result of the second lottery determination are shown. Since the display control means simultaneously displays the second identification information on the display means, the player can efficiently play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

<Characteristic B group> (Freeze production produces a probabilistic period in time)
A win/loss determination means and a win/loss determination means for executing the win/no judgment of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first lottery condition and the win/no judgment of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second lottery condition Display control means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means the first identification information indicating the result of judgment of the first lottery game and the second identification information indicating the result of judgment of the second lottery game. A dynamic determination of a first dynamic display period of the first identification information and a second dynamic display period of the second identification information which are dynamically displayed by the display control means from a plurality of dynamic display periods. For the player, at least one of the display period determining means, the first benefit that is advantageous to the player when the result of the hit/miss determination is a win, and the second benefit that is advantageous to the player over the first benefit. In a gaming machine having a privilege determination means for determining to be awarded, the privilege determination means determines the second privilege based on the hit of the second lottery game rather than the hit of the first lottery game. A gaming machine B1 which is easy and has an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means.

According to the gaming machine B1, the win/loss judgment means executes the win/no judgment of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first lottery condition, and the win/no judgment of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second lottery condition. To be done. The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the determination unit and the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game are dynamically displayed on the display unit at the same time by the display control unit. The first dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information that are dynamically displayed by the display control unit are determined from the plurality of dynamic display periods by the dynamic display period determining unit. Each is decided. It is determined that the player is provided with at least one of the first benefit that is advantageous to the player and the second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit when the result of the determination is a win. Determined by means. Based on the winning of the second lottery game rather than the winning of the first lottery game, the second benefit is more easily determined by the privilege determining means. The effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. As a result, a novel effect can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine B1, the dynamic display period determining means determines the first dynamic display period from a first dynamic display period group including a plurality of dynamic display periods, A gaming machine B2, wherein the second dynamic display period is determined from the configured second dynamic display period group.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the first dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determining means from the first dynamic display period group including a plurality of dynamic display periods. Since the second dynamic display period is determined from the second dynamic display period group including a plurality of dynamic display periods, it is possible to select a dynamic display period rich in changes. ..

In the gaming machine B2, a storage unit that stores a plurality of first dynamic display period groups configured by a plurality of the dynamic display periods, and one of the first movements based on establishment of a predetermined condition from the storage unit. Group determining means for determining a dynamic display period group, wherein the dynamic display period determining means is the first dynamic display period of 1 from the first dynamic display period group determined by the group determining means. A gaming machine B3, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the storage unit stores a plurality of first dynamic display period groups each including a plurality of dynamic display periods. Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the one first dynamic display period group is determined from the storage means by the group determination means. One first dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determining unit from the first dynamic display period group determined by the group determining unit. This has an effect that the game can be easily controlled.

In the gaming machine B3, in the plurality of first dynamic display period groups, the first dynamic display period having a long dynamic display period is configured to be easily determined by the dynamic display period determining means, and the long first dynamic period is configured. A gaming machine B4, which includes a dynamic display period group.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the first dynamic display period of the plurality of first dynamic display periods is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. Since the long first dynamic display period group that is configured easily is included, the number of first lottery games can be made smaller than the number of second lottery games, and a game that is more advantageous to the player can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be expected to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine B4, the group determination means is configured to be able to determine the long first dynamic display period group based on the determination of the second privilege. Machine B5.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4, the long first dynamic display period group is decided by the group deciding means based on the fact that the second privilege has been decided. There is an effect that it can be improved.

The gaming machine B6 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, wherein the effect performing means displays on the display means effect information based on the information of the second dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the performance information based on the information of the second dynamic display period is displayed on the display means by the performance executing means, so that the entertainment of the game is improved. There is an effect that can improve.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the normal gaming state in which the probability of being hit by the hit/miss determining means is set at the normal probability, and the probability of being hit is set to be higher than the normal gaming state. A gaming state setting means for setting at least one of a gaming state, and the privilege determination means, the normal gaming state as one of the first benefits and the special gaming state as one of the second benefits. A gaming machine B7 characterized by determining at least one of them.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines B1 to B6, the following effect is obtained. That is, either one of the normal game state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit by the hit/miss determining means is set to a normal probability and the special game state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit is set higher than that of the normal game state is a game. It is set by the state setting means. At least one of the normal gaming state as one of the first benefits and the special gaming state as one of the second benefits is determined by the privilege determination means. As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the dynamic display period determining means determines the second dynamic display when determining the first dynamic display period based on the setting of the special game state. A gaming machine B8, characterized in that it is easy to determine a dynamic display period having a longer dynamic display period than the period.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, when determining the first dynamic display period based on the setting of the special gaming state, the second dynamic display period Since the dynamic display period having a longer dynamic display period is more easily determined by the dynamic display period determining means, there is an effect that the player can be provided with an advantageous state by further reducing the number of times of the first lottery game. ..

In the gaming machine B7 or B8, based on the establishment of the first lottery condition or the second lottery condition, an acquisition unit that acquires the lottery information used for the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination unit, and the acquisition unit. Storage means for storing lottery information; advance win/fail judgment means for executing win/loss judgment in advance before the win/no judgment is made by the win/no judgment means for the lottery information stored in the storage means; Pre-dynamic display period determination means for determining in advance the dynamic display period determined by the display period determination means, and determined by the advance dynamic display period determination means when the special game state is determined Based on the determination result, it has a period determination means for determining the period until the normal game state is set, the effect execution means, the effect based on the information of the period determined by the period determination means A gaming machine B9 which is to be executed.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B7 or B8, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the establishment of the first lottery condition or the second lottery condition, the lottery information used for the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is acquired by the acquisition means. The lottery information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means. The advance/non-preferred/non-preferred determination unit executes the pre/non-preferred/non-preferred determination of the lottery information stored in the storage unit, before the pre/non-preferred/non-preferred determination unit determines the proper/non-preferred result. The dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means is previously determined by the advance dynamic display period determination means. When the special game state is determined, the period determination unit determines the period until the normal game state is set based on the determination result determined by the advance dynamic display period determination unit. The effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the information on the period determined by the period determining means. Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine B9, when it is determined that the winning lottery information is stored as a result of the determination made by the advance winning/disabling determination means, the game state determined by the game state determining means is set in advance. If the pre-game state determining means determines that the normal game state is determined, the normal game state is determined. A gaming machine B10, wherein an effect is executed based on information of a period until the dynamic display of the identification information is completed.

According to the gaming machine B10, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B9. That is, when it is determined that the winning lottery information is stored as a result of the determination by the advance hit determination means, the game state determined by the game state determination means is determined in advance by the advance game state determination means. It When it is determined by the pre-game state determination means that the normal game state is determined, performance is performed based on the information of the period until the dynamic display of the identification information for which the normal game state is determined is finished. The effect is executed by the means. As a result, it is possible to give a novel effect to the player and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B9, when it is determined that the winning lottery information is stored as a result of the determination made by the advance winning/disabling determination means, the game state determined by the game state determining means is set in advance. When it is determined that the lottery information to be in the normal game state is not stored, the lottery information stored in the storage means has pre-game state determination means for determining. A gaming machine B11, which produces an effect based on information of a period within a period until the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to is ended.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B9, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is determined that the winning lottery information is stored as a result of the determination by the advance hit determination means, the game state determined by the game state determination means is determined in advance by the advance game state determination means. It When it is determined that the lottery information in the normal gaming state is not stored, the information in the period within the period until the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the lottery information stored in the storage means is completed Based on the effect, the effect is executed by the effect executing means. As a result, there is an effect that a novel effect can be provided to the player.

In any one of the gaming machines B7 to B11, the group determination means determines the long first dynamic display period group when the special gaming state is set. B12.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B7 to B11, when the special gaming state is set, the first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determination means. There is an effect that a rich production can be performed.

In any of the gaming machines B4 to B12, the long first dynamic display period group is easier to be determined by the dynamic display period determining means than the plurality of second dynamic display period groups. A gaming machine B13 characterized in that it is configured.

According to the gaming machine B13, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machines B4 to B12, the dynamic display period longer than the plurality of second dynamic display period groups is long by the dynamic display period determining means. Since it is configured to be easily determined from the group, there is an effect that it is possible to easily set an advantageous state for the player.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B13, a state setting means for setting at least a first state in which the second lottery condition is easily established and a second state in which the second lottery condition is more difficult to be established than the first state. And, the first benefit is configured such that the second state is set more easily than the second benefit, the gaming machine B14.

According to the game machine B14, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines B1 to B13, the following effect is obtained. That is, the state setting means sets at least the first state in which the second lottery condition is easily established and the second state in which the second lottery condition is more difficult to be established than the first state. The first benefit is configured such that the second state is more easily set than the second benefit. As a result, it is possible to easily set the advantageous state for the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early.

<Characteristic C group> (Freeze effect can be selected by switching the table when the probability changes in small or medium)
Based on the establishment of the first lottery condition, the determination of the first lottery game is executed, and based on the establishment of the second lottery condition, the determination means for executing the determination of the second lottery game, and the first by the determination means. Display control means capable of simultaneously displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the lottery game and the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game on the display means, and dynamically by the display control means. A dynamic display period determining means for determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information and a second dynamic display period of the second identification information to be displayed from a plurality of dynamic display periods; After the first identification information or the second identification information is displayed with the determination result indicating the hit, at least the first benefit that is advantageous to the player and the second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit. In a gaming machine having a privilege determination means for determining whether to grant one of the two, the privilege determination means displays the second identification information as a hit, as compared with the case where the first identification information is displayed as a hit. In this case, the second privilege is configured to be easily determined, and the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means is configured by a plurality of dynamic display periods. Storage means for storing a plurality of first dynamic display period groups, and group determining means for determining one first dynamic display period group from the plurality of first dynamic display period groups stored in the storage means And a long first dynamic display period configured to facilitate the determination of the first dynamic display period having a long dynamic display period by the dynamic display period determination means in the plurality of first dynamic display period groups. The group determining means may determine the long first dynamic display period group based on the determination result determined by the determination means. A gaming machine C1 characterized by being configured as possible.

According to the gaming machine C1, the determination means performs the determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first lottery condition, and the determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second lottery condition. The display control means simultaneously displays the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game by the determination means and the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game on the display means. The first dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the display control unit are respectively selected from the plurality of dynamic display periods by the dynamic display period determining unit. It is determined. After the first identification information or the second identification information is displayed with the determination result indicating the hit, at least the first benefit that is advantageous to the player and the second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit. The privilege determination means determines whether or not to grant one of them. The second privilege is more easily determined by the privilege determination means when the second identification information is displayed as a hit than when the first identification information is displayed as a hit. A plurality of first dynamic display period groups configured by a plurality of dynamic display periods are stored in the storage unit as the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination unit. One first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determination unit from the plurality of first dynamic display period groups stored in the storage unit. The plurality of first dynamic display period groups includes a long first dynamic display period group configured so that the dynamic display period determining means can easily determine the first dynamic display period having a long dynamic display period. The long first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determination means based on the determination result determined by the determination means. Thereby, it is possible to provide a novel game play. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired early.

In the gaming machine C1, the dynamic display period determination means, when the first dynamic display start condition for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is satisfied, the first When the dynamic display period is determined and the second dynamic display start condition for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is satisfied, the second dynamic display period is set. A game machine characterized in that the game machine is determined individually and has a performance executing means for executing a performance based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are produced. That is, the dynamic display period determination means determines the first dynamic display period when the first dynamic display start condition for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is satisfied, The second dynamic display period is determined when the second dynamic display start condition for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is satisfied. The effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. Thereby, a novel effect can be given to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired early.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, there is provided a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player, based on the judgment result being judged as the hit or the specific judgment result. A gaming machine C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the bonus game which is advantageous to the player is determined by the determination means as the hit or the specific determination result is the bonus game execution means. Since it is executed by, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect other than winning.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a normal gaming state in which the probability of being judged as a hit by the judging means is set with a normal probability, and a special probability with a higher probability of being judged as a hit than the normal probability is set. The game state setting means for setting at least one of the special game state to be set, and when the second benefit is determined, the special game state is set by the game state setting means as one of the second benefits. Is configured to be set more easily than the first privilege, and the gaming machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effect is produced. That is, at least one of a normal game state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit by the determining means is set with a normal probability and a special game state in which a probability of being determined to be a hit is higher than the normal probability. Is set by the game state setting means. When the second privilege is determined, the special game state is set more easily than the first privilege by the game state setting means as one of the second benefits. As a result, it is possible to further set a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine C4, the determination means is determined to be the specific determination result when the special gaming state is set, the gaming machine C5.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, when the special gaming state is set, the determination means determines that the result is a specific determination result, so that the value of the special gaming state can be further increased. There is an effect.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the plurality of first dynamic display period groups includes the first dynamic display period whose dynamic display period is longer than that of the long first dynamic display period group. A special length first dynamic display period group that is configured to be easily determined by the dynamic display period determination means, and the group determination means determines the long first dynamic display period group, The gaming machine C6, which is configured to be able to determine the special length first dynamic display period group when the determination unit executes the specific determination.

The gaming machine C6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5. That is, in the plurality of first dynamic display period groups, the first dynamic display period having a longer dynamic display period than the long first dynamic display period group is configured to be easily determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The special length first dynamic display period group is included. When the determination unit makes a specific determination while determining the long first dynamic display period group, the special length first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determination unit. As a result, the value of having a specific determination result can be further enhanced. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to expect that a specific determination result will be obtained in addition to the winning.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the group determination means determines the long first dynamic display period group, and then the predetermined first dynamic display is established based on that a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine C7 characterized by determining a period group.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, after the long first dynamic display period group is determined, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and then the predetermined time is determined by the group determination means. Since the determined first dynamic display period group is determined, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, a state setting means capable of setting a first state in which the second lottery condition is satisfied and a second state in which the second lottery condition is more easily satisfied than the first state A gaming machine C8, wherein the first benefit is configured so that the first status is set more easily by the status setting means than the second benefit.

The gaming machine C8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C7. That is, the state setting means sets the first state in which the second lottery condition is satisfied and the second state in which the second lottery condition is more easily satisfied than the first state. The first privilege is configured so that the first state can be set more easily by the state setting means than the second privilege. As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B14, C1 to C8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is moved to an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The gaming machine Z2, wherein any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B14, and C1 to C8 is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B14, and C1 to C8, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
64,640 1st starting opening, 2nd starting opening (1st entrance, 2nd entrance)
640a Normal electric accessory (part of movable piece)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the winning or failure of the game is drawn by lot, and a dynamic display of a special symbol for informing the lottery result is displayed. configuration has been proposed to be executed in.

JP, 2005-319221, A

By the way, for such a gaming machine, a gaming machine having a further interest has been demanded.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, the game area in which the game ball can flow down, and the firing strength can be varied, and the launching means that allows the game ball to reach the game area. And, the game area is at least a first game area in which a game ball that has been launched with one launch strength by the launch means can flow down, and a predetermined launch different from the one launch strength. There is a second game area different from the first game area in which the game balls fired with strength can flow down, and the first game area is provided with a first ball entering means into which the game balls can enter. A second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means into which the game ball can enter the second game area, and a first ball entering means and a second ball entering means into which the game ball can enter. And a third ball entering means different from, and the second ball entering means is provided in a position where the game ball launched by the launching means with the one launch strength cannot enter. First determining means for performing a first determination based on a game ball entering the first ball entering means or the third ball entering means, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means. Based on the second determination means for performing a second determination different from the first determination, first identification information for indicating a first determination result of the first determination means, and a second determination means of the second determination means. 2 Display control means capable of dynamically displaying simultaneously the second identification information for indicating the determination result on the display means, and the first dynamic of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means. First dynamic display period determining means for determining a display period, and second dynamic display period determining means for determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means, When the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, or the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed. If a specific game corresponding to each is executed, the first game condition is based on at least the first condition that can be satisfied by executing the first determination is satisfied. A second game state in which the specific game based on the second determination result is easier to be executed than a game state is set, and in the case of the second game state, the first determination may be executed to establish. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means for setting the first game state based on the establishment of the two conditions, the first dynamic display period is set. And a performance executing means for suggesting a period during which the second game state can be continuously set based on the information on the first dynamic display period determined by the interval determining means .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, having a game area in which the game ball can flow down, and a launching means capable of varying the launch strength and allowing the game ball to reach the game area. In the game area, at least a first game area in which a game ball that has been fired with one launch strength by the launch means can flow down, and a predetermined launch strength different from the one launch strength have been launched. There is a second game area different from the first game area in which the game balls can flow down, and the first game area is provided with a first ball entering means into which the game balls can enter, and the second game area. A second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means into which the game ball can enter, and a third ball different from the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means into which the game ball can enter. Ball entry means is provided, and the second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched by the launching means with the one launch strength cannot enter the ball. A first determining means for executing a first determination based on a game ball entering the means or the third ball entering means; and a game ball entering the second ball entering means based on the game ball The second determination means for performing a second determination different from the first determination, the first identification information for indicating the first determination result of the first determination means, and the second determination result of the second determination means are shown. Display control means capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the second identification information for displaying on the display means, and the first dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means. A first dynamic display period determining means; and a second dynamic display period determining means for determining a second dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means. When the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, or when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed, A specific game corresponding to each is executed, and based on at least the first condition that can be satisfied by the execution of the first determination is satisfied, the game state is set to be higher than the first game state. A second game state in which the specific game based on the second determination result is easily executed is set, and in the case of the second game state, the second condition that can be satisfied by executing the first determination is satisfied. Based on that, when the second game state is set by the game state setting means for setting the first game state, the first dynamic display period determination means determines the second game state. And a performance executing means for suggesting a period during which the second game state can be continuously set based on the information of the determined first dynamic display period. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the display mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the probability variation game state displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the probability variation game state displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the time of the probability variation upper limit in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the composition of various counters in a 1st embodiment, a special design reservation sphere storage area, a special design reservation sphere execution area, a normal design reservation sphere storage area, and a normal design reservation sphere execution area. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the jackpot random number table in 1st Embodiment typically, (C) is a diagram schematically showing the jackpot type table in the first embodiment, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing a random symbol per ordinary symbol in the first embodiment. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the variation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the variation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the variation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of RAM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, and (b) of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of RAM223 typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the addition time selection table 222b in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the rearrangement reservation storage area in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the subordinate rearrangement storage area in 1st Embodiment typically. .. It is the figure which showed the processing of the rearrangement of the pending symbol display in a 1st embodiment typically. It is the figure which showed the processing of the rearrangement of the pending symbol display in a 1st embodiment typically. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st pre-reading processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st pre-reading update processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd pre-reading processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd pre-reading update processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the through gate processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the change monitoring processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the illegality monitoring processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows probability change setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation quantity display renewal processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 1st execution form. 6 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a variation update process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a probability variation period notification process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process according to the present invention. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the change pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing according to the present invention. FIG. 9A is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 9B is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing an error command process performed. 6 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed the content typically in the small hitting random number table set to ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment, and (b) is the small hitting selection table in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically, (c) is the figure which showed the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table in 2nd Embodiment typically. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation start processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 63, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63a, 63b, 67, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front surface area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front surface area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the rear surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface and protruding toward the front, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when rearranging the reserved symbol displays (Ds1 to Ds8) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 which incorporate a light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when a jackpot or a reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right decorative portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more brilliance.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thus the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

In the present embodiment, the configuration described above is used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the main control device 110 and other control devices detect a game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a, and a solenoid of the ball launch unit 112a. May be configured to detect that a game ball has been launched. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a “dollar box”) placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and has a large number of nails and windmills for guiding balls and rails 61 and 62, a first starting opening 63a, and a first starting opening 63a. The second start port 63b, the first variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The first starting port 64, the second starting port 640, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed with wood screws. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted. At the inner position of the outer rail 62, a band-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear surfaces are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a winning opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down. In addition, the game area includes all areas where the game balls that have passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flow down until they pass through the outlet 66 and the winning port.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

On the right side of the center of the game board 13, a normal symbol starting port 67 is provided. The normal symbol starting port 67 is composed of a gate type starting port having a sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery performed for the game ball passing through the normal symbol starting port 67, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is hit.

When the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is selected, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display section 88 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and "○" and "x" are displayed. After the symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), a normal symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○" or "x") indicating the lottery result is stopped (lighted). When the sphere passes through the normal symbol starting port 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display portion 88, the number of passages is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol display device 37. Displayed by.

When it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, the symbol "○", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a winning symbol, is lit and displayed on the second symbol display portion 88. When the winning symbol is displayed, the normal electric accessory 640a is activated, and the normal electric accessory 640a, which is normally maintained in an upright position, is rotated counterclockwise from the upright position. A state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting port 640 by rotating the angle (40 degrees in the present embodiment) and guiding the game ball to the second starting port 640 by the ordinary electric accessory 640a (special State). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is off, the symbol "x", which is a symbol indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been off, is lit on the second symbol display portion 88. At this time, the normal electric accessory 640a is not operated, and the variation of the next normal symbol (second symbol) is executed.

The first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2) A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a is the number of balls (holding balls) for which variable display has not been executed among the balls won in the first starting opening 64, the second starting opening 640, and the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67. The number of balls is indicated by a lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds in a big hit and an error display are also indicated by a corresponding lighting state.

The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. The left 7 segment LED, the first special symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game is variably displayed (dynamic display). Specifically, the variable display is displayed until the variable time (dynamic display time), which is determined based on the winning of the first start opening 64, elapses (in the present embodiment, the central segment of the 7 segments is displayed in blinking). After that, it is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the determination result. When the determination result is out, a symbol "-" indicating that the central one segment is lit and displayed is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a hit, a symbol different from the symbol indicating the deviation such as the symbols “3” and “7” corresponding to the hit is displayed. The second lottery game is also configured similarly to the first lottery game. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

Further, the variation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, but a variation time is set for each variation mode, and corresponds to a dynamic display mode regarding time information. Furthermore, the variation pattern can be divided into a variation pattern with reach and a variation pattern with non-reach, a long-term variation pattern with a relatively long variation time and a short-term variation pattern with a relatively short variation time. In this way, even when sorting is performed based on a fixed time standard (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds or not)), the dynamic information regarding the time information is determined. It corresponds to the display mode.

Further, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, long reach 1 to 4 are set as the long time variation pattern. For this long reach 1 to 4, set as a variation pattern that can be selected in the case of a wrong judgment result in the high probability state (during probability change) with respect to the first special symbol (special diagram 1) Has been done.

Further, as will be described later, the time information until the fluctuation start time also corresponds to the time when the accurate fluctuation starts, and the time information of the rough fluctuation pattern described above (for example, whether it is a long time fluctuation pattern or not) Information about time information (for example, the number of long-time fluctuation patterns performed before the start of fluctuation) determined based on whether or not) is also applicable.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the winning of the first start opening 64 or the second start opening 640, the jackpot judgment is performed (big hit lottery), and the jackpot type is also determined. To do. As the jackpot type determined here, two types of jackpot A (15R jackpot) and jackpot B (14R jackpot) are set as jackpot types of the first special symbol. Further, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, one type of jackpot C (15R jackpot) is set (see FIG. 10(c)).

Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged as the winning devices that are operated in the open state during the big hit game. The first variable winning device 65 is operated such that the first specific winning port 65a is opened for the 1R (round) to 14R of the big hits A to C. In addition, the second variable winning device 650 is operated such that the second specific winning port 650a is opened at the 15th R of the big hit A and the big hit C.

In the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot is controlled to shift to the high probability state (probably changed state) by winning the second specific winning port 650a during the jackpot game. That is, in the jackpot B, since the second variable winning device 640 is not operated, it is configured not to shift to the high probability state. In addition, the jackpot A and the jackpot C are jackpots that can be shifted to a high probability state.

Further, based on the winning in the first start opening 64, if the executed winning/judgment determination result is a big hit, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in a grid pattern. Then, it is reported that it was a big hit. However, from the third pattern, it is difficult to determine whether the jackpot type is a jackpot A or a jackpot B, and the player, while playing the jackpot game, is the jackpot being executed. A game will be played with the expectation that it is a big hit A. Then, after the 14th round, the second variable winning device 650 is activated and the second specific winning port 650a is opened, and the player has the jackpot type of jackpot A. By recognizing, the game ball can be inserted into the second specific winning opening 650a, and the game can be performed so as to shift to the high-probability state after the big hit game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot type, it is determined whether or not to give the player a state capable of shifting to the high probability state. Then, the player can play the game by determining to shift to the high-probability state by allowing the player to win the game ball into the second specific winning port 650a. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a fresh game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 79 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) to the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 640, while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol (first symbol). A special symbol, a second special symbol) is provided with a third symbol display device 81 constituted by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that the third symbol display device 81 is displayed as shown in FIG. Shows the first special symbol or the second special symbol (depending on the game state) which is one of the third symbols in one display area Dm, left (left display area Dm1), middle (middle display area Dm2) and right (right side) Three symbol rows in the display area Dm3) are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. (Dynamic display).

The third symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is composed of 10 types of special symbols with numbers "0" to "9". .. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbol is aligned (for example, "777"), a variable display is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the end of.

Specifically, in the first display area Dm, three symbol columns L1, L2, and L3 are displayed for each of left, middle, and right. In each of the symbol columns L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol columns L1 to L3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from the top to the bottom with the periodicity for each of the symbol columns L1 to L3. In particular, in the left symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the right symbol column L3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order. On the other hand, in the right side display area Dm2, the second special symbol is displayed in the same manner as the first special symbol, the symbol rows R1, R2 and R3 are displayed, and the variable display is similarly performed.

Further, in the first display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line U1. If the third symbol is stopped in line on the activated line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

A second display area Dn is formed on the upper right of the first display area Dm. In the second display area Dn, a symbol row showing the first special symbol or the second special symbol (depending on the game state) is displayed. In this second display area Dn, two kinds of symbol rows of “◯” and “×” as shown in FIG. 4B are displayed in parallel, and two rows of “◯” are left and right. When displayed in a row, it is configured to inform the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been won.

In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal gaming state), the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display region Dm, and the second display region Dn. The third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. In addition, the game state is a high probability state (probability variation game state), in the case of a time saving game state, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. Then, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn.

In the jackpot gaming state, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in the state that was displayed before the jackpot game was started, and the display state is switched based on the switching of the gaming state after the jackpot game. Can be switched.

In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 4A, a sub display area Ds is formed below the first display area. In the sub-display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 4B, a reserved symbol "●" corresponding to the first special symbol and a reserved symbol "▲" corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed respectively. In the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to four, respectively, therefore, in the sub-table display area Ds, four reserved symbols “●” and the reserved symbol “ Four ▲” are displayed at the maximum. Although described later in detail, the reserved symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds are rearranged and displayed in a variation start order in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are combined.

Here, with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, the display contents during the probability change (during the probability change game state) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 5( a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case where the third symbol and the holding symbol are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the probability change. When the transition to the probability variation game state, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display region Dm (see FIG. 4A), and the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is the second display region. Displayed in Dn. Then, in the first display area Dm, the character "After the probability change ends..." is displayed to notify the shortest time until the probability change game state ends, and the shortest remaining time until the probability change end is displayed below it. It is digitally displayed in the order of minutes, seconds and milliseconds.

Here, the shortest time to the end of this probability change is determined by lottery within the time by determining the time until the big hit B is started in the first special symbol. In addition, it has not yet been determined that the jackpot B will be started in the first special symbol (during the fluctuation, it is determined that the one that has been won in the jackpot B is not set in the lottery of the held first special symbol) In the state, the shortest time is set within the time until the variation of the first special symbol which is the most variation start order of the stored first special symbol is finished. Furthermore, if there is no first special symbol that is changing and there is no lottery for the first special symbol that is being held, the shortest variation time of the first special symbol (3 seconds in this embodiment) is set. ..

Thereby, the probability variation gaming state is a configuration that continues for the player until the big hit B is started in the first special symbol, but the player can be notified of the remaining time of the probability variation gaming state. Therefore, the player can feel as if the period of the probability variation gaming state is set by time, and before the time elapses, the jackpot A or the jackpot C is won to continue the probability variation state. You can play games with the expectation.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 5(a), the first special symbol that is changing and the first special symbol that is stored in reserve are all wrong judgment results, and the first special symbol with the slowest variation start order. The time until the variation of the first special symbol with respect to the reserved ball of the symbol is finished is shown as an example when it is 10 minutes 9 seconds 05 milliseconds or more.

Next, FIG. 5(b) is an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the other case when the game ball enters the first starting opening 64 from the state shown in FIG. 5(a). It is the schematic diagram shown. The reserved symbol “●” of the first special symbol is increased by one and displayed. Here, the newly stored sphere of the first special symbol, the judgment result is wrong, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected that the fluctuation pattern of the deviation (5s) is selected. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 5B, the time until the fluctuation of the currently established first special symbol is finished is added by 5 seconds. Then, the addition timing (established by winning the first start opening 64 in the present embodiment) is established, and 5 seconds is determined by the additional lottery of the notification time (see FIG. 16) described later, and the notification time is set. The character "5 seconds extended!!" indicating that 5 seconds has been added is displayed, and the time when 5 seconds has been added is also displayed on the digital counter.

Next, referring to FIG. 6(b), the first special symbol and the holding ball of the second special symbol are not stored together during the probability change, and the fluctuations of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have stopped. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the state which is a state. In the configuration of the present embodiment, if the variation (lottery) is not started in the first special symbol, there is no chance to win the jackpot B, which is the trigger for ending the probability variation game state, so the probability variation game state continues to be continued. It becomes a state. However, the probability variation game state is informed to the player that it is managed as if it is timed and ends after a predetermined period has passed, so the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not changed. When the state is reached, the subtraction of the digital counter, which gives the notification until the end of the probability change, is stopped, and the character "Timer stopped!!" indicating that the subtraction is stopped is displayed.

As a result, the player can take a break with peace of mind when he/she wants to take a break such as a toilet after interrupting the game. In addition, in this embodiment, when the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are both stopped, it is configured to be set to stop the digital counter, but it is not limited thereto, and during the variation of the first special symbol. If there is no big hit A or big hit B among the pending storage, the subtraction of the digital counter may be stopped based on the fact that the fluctuation of the second special symbol has stopped. In the present embodiment, the player mainly plays the game paying attention to the fluctuation of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. The first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn, which has a small display area. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to notice the variation display, and the player is configured to play the game without paying attention to the variation. There is. Therefore, when the player wins the jackpot B for the first special symbol, it can be difficult to notice that the probability variation game ends.

In such a configuration, the player is paying attention only to the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, so if the variation of the second special symbol ends, then the first symbol Even if the special symbol is fluctuating, he/she has no interest and recognizes that he/she can take a break and interrupt the game. Here, if the subtraction of the digital counter is stopped, the player can stop the game without anxiety. On the other hand, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the subtraction of the digital counter does not stop in spite of the state that there is no holding ball, the player is sure that the period of the probability variation game is subtracted. It is possible to recognize and continue the game without interruption. Therefore, it is possible to let the player recognize whether or not the game such as a break can be interrupted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6(b), an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the probability variation game is completed by winning the big hit B with the first special symbol will be described. In FIG. 6B, the jackpot B is won in the first special symbol, and a symbol combination “◯” indicating that it is a jackpot is displayed in parallel in the second display area Dn. After the jackpot B is executed, the game state shifts to the normal game state. Therefore, the firing handle 51 is operated so as to launch the game ball with the strength to let the game ball flow down to the right side of the variable display unit 80 in the probability variation game state. Operate the firing handle 51 (left-handed game) so as to shoot the game ball with the strength to let the game ball flow down to the left side of the variable display unit 80 from the right-handed game state (left-handed game). The character "Please return to the left" is displayed to inform the player to perform.

Further, the remaining time of the digital counter is displayed as 0, and the character "probability change end!!" indicating that the probability variation game state has ended is displayed. In this case, with the end of the big hit B, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is switched to be displayed in the first display area Dm, and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the second display area Ds. To be

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a calculation method for determining the remaining maximum period of the probability variation game period in the probability variation game state in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 7 shows that three holding balls of the first special symbol have been established, and during the fluctuation, the fluctuation patterns of the holding balls 1 and 2 are out of order (is done), and the holding ball 3 Indicates that the jackpot B is determined to be won. In this case, when the variation of the hold ball 3 ends, the probability variation game state ends, so the maximum period until the probability variation end time is the time until the hold 3 ends the variation. Therefore, the sum of the remaining fluctuation time during fluctuation and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation patterns selected from the hold 1 to 3 is determined as the maximum period until the end of the probability change. When the end of the probability change is determined, the period is set in the digital counter (the difference time is added and displayed during the period being displayed).

In the present embodiment, the winning in the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 640 is withheld up to four times each. When the game ball wins the first starting opening 64 during the variable display of the first special symbol, the start of the first lottery game based on the winning is suspended, and in the display area of the reserved symbol display area of the lower display area Ds. Among the areas in which the reserved symbols are not displayed, the reserved symbol display area of the smallest number (the reserved symbol display area on the left side) displays "●" which is the reserved symbol of the first lottery game.

Further, when the game ball wins the second starting port 640 while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, as in the case of winning the first starting port 640, the "▲" which is the reserved symbol of the second lottery game is down. It is displayed in the reserved symbol display area of the side display area Ds.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 constituted by the first lottery game and the second lottery game has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and three, four, or more lottery games and corresponding start. Of course, each mouth may be provided so that each lottery result can be variably displayed at the same time.

When a game ball wins the first start port 64 and the second start port 640, the first start port switch or the second start port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. Due to the turning on of the first starting opening switch and the second starting opening switch, the main control device 110 makes a big hit lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first starting opening 64 and the second starting opening 640 are also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins.

Either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol showing a big hit, and if the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the measurement of the variation time is interrupted during the big hit period. However, the variable display is continued. After that, when the big hit game ends, the measurement of the fluctuation time is restarted, and the fluctuation display is executed in the remaining fluctuation period.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is hit with one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the measurement of the variation time is interrupted and the variation display is continued. The present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display during the change may be temporarily stopped, and the remaining change time may be changed and displayed after the jackpot is over.

Further, during the interruption, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be displayed in a blinking manner in a state of being stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode "for example, the letter h" in a predetermined cycle. By thus configuring, it is possible to notify the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (during suspension).

On the lower right side of the game area, a horizontally elongated rectangular first variable winning device 65 and a second variable winning device 650 having a width smaller than that of the first variable winning device 65 are arranged. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery related to the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed, it becomes a big hit stop symbol. While turning on the symbol display device 37, a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed in the corresponding display area (first display area Dm or second display area Dn) of the third symbol display device 81, and the jackpot is generated. Shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). It

The first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is closed after a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The order of opening and closing the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650a (opening round) is determined by the determined jackpot type. For example, in the case of jackpot A and jackpot C, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened from the first round to the fourteenth round, and the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in the fifteenth round. Further, in the jackpot B, the first specific winning opening 65a is not opened from the first round to the 14th round, and the second variable winning device 650a is not opened.

In this way, in the jackpot game, since the specific winning opening to be opened is changed to the jackpot type, the jackpot type can be determined by whether or not the second specific winning opening 65a is opened. Therefore, it is possible to let the player recognize the jackpot type through the specific winning opening that is opened, without notifying the player of the jackpot type with a design or the like.

Further, the second specific winning opening 650a is configured as a winning opening that triggers the player to be given the probability variation gaming state after the big hit game. The probability variation game state is set after the big hit game based on the fact that the game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. In addition, when a game ball enters each of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, 15 gaming balls are awarded as a winning ball, as opposed to one gaming ball being entered. It is configured to be paid out by the player.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit, the opening and closing operation based on the jackpot type It is set, and the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the present embodiment, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). To be done.

The first variable winning a prize device 65, the second specific winning a prize device 650, the second variable winning a prize device 650, the horizontal oblong rectangular opening and closing plate which covers the second specific winning a prize port 650a, respectively, and the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis forward And a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open and close. The first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a are normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. , The open state and the normally closed state are alternately repeated.

Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp etc. affixed to the adhesive space K1 is the front frame 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not won any of the winning openings 63 are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the out openings 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is a unit in which a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114) are mounted. The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as required.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

In the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102 or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Be cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the configuration>
A characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, below the variable display unit 80, a first starting port 64 (hereinafter referred to as the left first starting port 64) is provided. The left side first starting opening 64 has an opening of a size that allows one game ball to be inserted into the upper surface, and two nails are slightly smaller than the diameter of the two game balls at a position facing the opening. It is arranged at wide intervals. By adjusting the inclination of the nail, the winning rate of the game play to the left first starting port 64 (for example, when 250 game balls are shot, the number of game balls to win the left first starting port 64) The ratio) is variable.

Further, in the right region of the variable display unit 80, the second starting port 640 and the first starting port 64 (hereinafter, referred to as the right first starting port 64) are arranged in parallel vertically. The second starting opening 640 has an opening on the side surface of the decorative member attached to the game board 60, into which one game ball can enter. On the front side (opposing surface) of the opening, a normal electric accessory 640a associated with the second starting opening 640 is arranged. The ordinary electric accessory 640a has a length of about three game balls and is pivotally supported at one end side so as to be rotatable. Then, based on the fact that the second symbol is a winning, a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, once or twice), a predetermined number of seconds (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds or 1 second) a game ball Is configured to rotate at a predetermined angle (45 degrees in the present embodiment) in a direction in which the guide can be guided to the second starting port 640 (direction away from the opening). The ordinary electric accessory 640a is rotated by a solenoid. In addition, in a normal time (other than when the second symbol hits), the state in which the opening of the second starting port 640a is closed (the state in which it stands upright) is maintained.

In addition, the right side first starting port 64 is arranged below the second starting port 640, as shown in FIG. Then, when the ordinary electric accessory 640a is in the open state (inclined to the horizontal direction side), the ordinary electric accessory 640a is arranged at a position facing the opening of the right first starting opening 64. With this configuration, when the normal electric accessory 640a is in the open state, it is possible to configure a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the right side first starting opening 64.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game state is a high probability state (probability change state) and a time saving game state, it is configured to increase the probability that the second symbol is determined to be a hit. When the gaming state is the low-probability gaming state, the player shoots the gaming ball so that the gaming ball passes the left side of the variable display unit 80, and wins the gaming ball in the left first starting opening 64. Play the game as you would. Then, the third symbol is a hit, and the probability that the second symbol is determined to be a hit when the probability variation game or the time saving game is increased increases, so that the second symbol is easily hit when the game ball passes through the through gate 67. Has been done. As a result, the player executes the game by firing the game ball so as to pass the right side of the variable display unit 80 (right-handed game). In this case, since the probability that the ordinary electric accessory 640a will be in the open state is high, the second starting port 640 is configured to be easily won, while the right first starting port 64 is less likely to be won.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation game state, it is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to win the second special symbol than the first special symbol. Specifically, in the first special symbol, out of the big hits, 50% is a big hit that is likely to be given a certainty after the big hit game, and the remaining 50% is easy to be given a time saving game (low probability game state) after the big hit game ( It is configured so that a jackpot is awarded).

On the other hand, in the second special symbol, in the case of a big hit, the big hit is likely to be given a probability variation game after the big hit game at 100%. That is, it is configured that the probability variation game state is more likely to be given to the person who wins the second special symbol.

Further, the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80, when the normal electric auditors role product 640a is in an open state, the distance between the tip of the normal electric auditors role object 640a and the variable display unit 80 is one game ball or more and less than two balls. The intervals are. The through gate 67 is arranged so that the game ball flowing down the space easily passes through the through gate 67 having a gate type opening. The game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right side first starting opening 64 by the nail arranged on the downstream side of the through gate 67. Specifically, on the exit side (downstream side) of the through gate 67, a game ball flows down to the opening side of the right side first starting opening 64 by a nail arranged above the opening of the right side first starting opening 64. It is configured with a non-interval (less than one game ball), and is configured to flow downward through the wind turbine as it is. That is, when the player wins the right first starting opening 64, it is configured to be limited to the case where the ordinary electric accessory 640a is maintained in a closed state (a state in which it stands up in the vertical direction).

Further, during the probability variation state, the variation time of the second symbol is set as short as 3 seconds, and the normal electric accessory 640a is frequently opened. Therefore, it is configured such that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right side first starting opening 640a during the probability changing state. Therefore, when the probability variation state is reached, the number of times the probability variation state continues can be increased. Therefore, the player's motivation for the game can be increased.

In the present embodiment, when the normal electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the right first starting opening 64 is not won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing down from the exit of the through gate 67 is the first right starting. It may be configured such that the interval is set to allow winning in the mouth 64 and the ratio is reduced so that the right first starting opening 64 can win.

Further, on the lower right side of the game area, a first variable winning device 65 and a second variable winning device 650 are arranged directly below the first variable winning device 65. The first variable winning device 65 is configured such that the first specific winning opening 65a, which is a horizontally long opening into which the game ball can enter, is normally closed by a door member that prevents the game ball from entering the ball. There is. And, when it becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the door member is rotated to a position vertical to the game board 60 with both lower ends as rotation axes, and receives the game ball flowing down by the door member, It is configured to guide the player to the inside of the first specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, the second variable winning device 650 is arranged so that the second specific winning port 650a, which is an opening portion having a width smaller than that of the first variable winning device, is a door member and restricts a game ball from entering normally. Has been done. Then, when the special symbol is a big hit, the door member is rotated about both lower ends of the rotation axis to a position perpendicular to the game plate 60, and is configured to receive the flowing down game ball. By the game ball winning the second specific winning opening 650a, it is determined that the probability change state is set after the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot A that is given when the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is a jackpot and the jackpot C that is given when the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is a jackpot. When is executed, the first variable winning device 65 is operated from the 1R (round) to the 14R, and the second variable winning device 650 is operated only in the 15th round.

On the other hand, in the jackpot B that is awarded when the first special symbol is a jackpot, the first variable winning device 65 operates and the second variable winning device 650 operates from the 1R to 14R. Since it does not exist, the opportunity to win the second specific winning opening 650a is not given, and it is difficult to provide the probability variation state.

In the present embodiment, in the low-probability game state, it is prohibited to play a right-handed game, and when the game ball wins the second start opening 640 in the low-probability game state, abnormal processing is executed, The warning display "please play with left-handed characters" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a similar warning is given by voice. Further, in the low probability game state, when a game ball is won in the second starting port 640, the jackpot may be controlled to be invalid, or an abnormal signal is output to a hall computer or the like. May be.

<Electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display portion 88 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 9) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 9, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, in order to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display unit 88, etc., the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Used in.

For the jackpot lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a special symbol per random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a special jackpot type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol A fluctuation type counter C3 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern and an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the special winning random number counter C1 are used. In addition, a normal hit random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display portion 88), and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the normal hit random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), and some counters are not included in the main process (S1250) (see FIG. 41). It is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for the winning for the first starting opening 64 and each counter value for the winning for the second starting opening 640. The second special symbol reserve ball storage 203b is provided. In the present embodiment, the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640 are respectively provided with up to four holding balls, so that a maximum of eight holding balls can be stored in total. Therefore, when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game, the gaming ball wins during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, and the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 64, each counter value Is stored in the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a, and when the game ball wins the second starting opening 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b. After that, the respective counter values stored in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a are moved to the first special symbol reserved sphere execution area 203c, and various settings for variably displaying the first special symbol (dynamic display) And control processing is executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203b is moved to the second special symbol reservation sphere execution area 203d, various settings and control processing for variably displaying the second special symbol Is executed.

On the other hand, during the period during which the special symbol cannot be selected during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball is the first starting opening 64 or When the second starting opening 640 is won and the number of holdings for the winning opening is less than the upper limit value (four in the present embodiment), each counter value is acquired and the winning opening is won. Is stored in the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203b corresponding to. In addition, when the number of holdings for the winning opening is equal to or more than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (5 game balls in this embodiment) ) Only is treated as an invalid ball that is paid out to the player.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four for each of the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b, but is not limited to this, and may be four for each, or the upper limit value. You may not make money.

Each counter shown in FIG. 9 will be described in detail. The special winning random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1. The special winning random number counter C1 is commonly acquired for the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 640.

The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the special winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special winning random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1250) (see FIG. 41).

The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball wins the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 640 (start winning). At a timing, the RAM 203 is stored in the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b corresponding to the winning opening. The value of the random number to be a big hit is set by the big hit random number table 202a (FIG. 10B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is set by the big hit random number table 202a. When the value of the generated random number that becomes a jackpot (in the present embodiment, "7" when the probability is low and "0-9" when the probability is high) is determined as a jackpot.

The special random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this special winning random number counter C1, the number of random number values (hit values) to be a big hit is 1 when the probability is low, the value "7" is 10 when the probability is high, and the value "0-9" is a big hit. It is stored in the random number table 202a.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the big hit type in the case of a big hit, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) to obtain the maximum value (99 in the present embodiment). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching. The value of the special winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball wins the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 640 (starting winning). At the timing, the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203 corresponding to the winning opening is stored.

Here, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, a random number that is out. For example, the variation pattern in the variation display effect and the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) are those at the time of disconnection. On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere execution area 203b is a random number, it is a variation pattern or stop in the variation display effect. The type will be that of a big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The value of the special win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the special jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 10C) stored in the ROM 202. Here, as shown in FIG. 10A, various tables are stored in the ROM 202. 10B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a, and FIG. 10C is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. The big hit type table 202b (FIG. 8C) is a table in which the big hit type and the value of the special hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, the jackpot A and the jackpot B are set as the jackpot type dedicated to the first special symbol, and the jackpot C is set as the jackpot type dedicated to the second special symbol. The jackpot A is a jackpot composed of 15R (round), the first variable winning device 65 is operated from the 1R to the 14R, and the second variable winning device 650 is operated at the 15R. Here, the second variable winning device 650 is operated (opened), the game ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a, and the game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. The gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the probability changing state. As a result, the jackpot A becomes a jackpot type in which a probability variation game can be given. This jackpot A is determined based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting opening 64, and when it is a big hit, the value of the special winning type counter C2 (first starting opening) It is a jackpot type that is determined to be any of 0 to 49 when the player enters the ball 64.

In addition, the big hit B is a big hit type composed of 14R, and the first variable winning a prize device 65 operates from the 1R to the 14R, and the big hit game is executed. Therefore, since the second variable winning device 650 is not operated, the probability changing state is not set after the jackpot B ends. As a result, the jackpot B becomes a jackpot type in which the probability variation state is not given. The jackpot B is determined based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting opening 64, and if it is a big hit, the value of the special winning type counter C2 (first starting opening) It is a jackpot type that is determined to be any of 50 to 99 when the player enters the ball 64.

Similar to the big hit A, the big hit C is a big hit of 15R, the first variable winning device 65 operates from the 1st to 14th eyes, and the second variable winning device 650 operates from the 15th prize. As a result, the jackpot C becomes a jackpot type in which the probability variation state can be set after the jackpot game. The jackpot C is determined based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second starting opening 640, and when it is a big hit, the value of the special winning type counter C2 (the first starting opening). It is a jackpot type that is determined to be any of 0 to 99 when the player enters the ball at 64. That is, in the lottery for the second special symbol, when a big hit occurs, the big hit C is always determined and executed.

In this way, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed based on entering the first starting opening 64, when it is a big hit, big hit A and big hit B are respectively selected with a probability of 50%. On the other hand, in the lottery for the second special symbol executed based on the fact that the player has entered the second starting opening 64, the jackpot C is selected with a probability of 100% when the jackpot is a jackpot. Therefore, the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol, the lottery will be executed. As a result, the player feels that it is more advantageous that the lottery is performed with the second special symbol than the first special symbol, so the player expects to win the jackpot with the second special symbol and play the game. You can

As described above, in the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 10C), the value of the special hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 10C, the jackpot A is associated with the value “0-49” of the special hit type counter C2, and the jackpot B is associated with the value “50-99” of the special hit type counter C2. The value “0 to 99” of the special winning type counter C2 is associated with the big hit C.

When the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is a big hit, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d The jackpot type table 202b determines the jackpot type associated with the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 stored in. For example, if the value of the special winning type counter C2 is "20", if the first special symbol, the big hit A, if the second special symbol, the big hit C is determined.

Returning to FIG. 9, description of various counters will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, reaches a maximum value (that is, 198), and then returns to 0.

The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball wins the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 640 (start winning). At a timing, it is stored in the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

11A and 11B show a variation pattern selection table 202d for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the gaming state is the normal gaming state. It is a schematic diagram. The variation pattern selected in the normal game state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be described.

FIG. 11A shows that the gaming state is the normal gaming state, and the variation patterns for selecting the variation patterns of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set when the result of winning/disagreement determination is out. This is a deviation (normal) common variation pattern selection table 202d. In this outlying (normal) common variation pattern selection table 202d, each variation pattern type is assigned corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, with respect to the value “0 to 100” of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the deviation is constituted by the fluctuation time of 5 seconds (the third symbol is stopped in the display mode of the reach without being in the reach display mode). Display pattern) is set. For “101 to 160”, a variation pattern of normal reach constituted by a variation time of 10 seconds is set. Further, for "161 to 198", a variation pattern of super reach constituted by a variation time of 30 seconds is set. The variation patterns selected here are variation patterns in which the result of the hit/miss determination is incorrect.

In this way, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the win/fail judgment result is out, a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time (5 seconds), which is a variation pattern, is selected at a rate of about 50%. To be done. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a problem that a variation pattern with a long variation time is selected and the game is delayed and the player gets tired early even though the result of the determination is wrong. Further, by making the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol common, the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed evenly.

FIG. 11B is a normal game state in which the game state is a hit state (normal) common variation pattern for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the result of winning/decision determination is a hit. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the selection table 202d typically. In this hit (normal) common variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern of normal reach constituted by a variation time of 10 seconds is set for the value "0-10" of the variation type counter CS1. For "11 to 150", a variation pattern of super reach constituted by a variation time of 30 seconds is set. For “151 to 198”, a fluctuation pattern composed of fluctuation patterns for 60 seconds is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 11(c) to FIG. 12(b), when the game state is a time saving game state, the variation pattern selection of the variation pattern selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The table 202d will be described. As the variation pattern selection table 202d in which the variation pattern selected in the time saving game state is set, the common variation pattern selection that is referred to when the result of the determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a hit (time saving) Table 202d (Fig. 11 (c)) and the first special symbol lottery result is referred to in case of deviation (time saving) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d (Fig. 12 (a)) and second special symbol The deviation (time saving) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d (FIG. 12B), which is referred to when the lottery result is incorrect, is set.

FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning (shortening) common variation pattern selection table 202d. This hit (time saving) common fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is a fluctuation pattern selection table that is selected when the win/fail judgment result in the time saving game state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a hit. In the hit (time saving) common variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern of normal reach constituted by a variation time of 5 seconds is set for the value "0-198" of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the gaming state is a time saving state, the variation pattern of the normal reach is selected in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are hit when the hit/no hit determination result is hit. As a result, in the time saving game state, when the hit determination result is a hit, the change pattern of the normal reach, which is a change pattern of a relatively short change time (5 seconds), is selected. You can move to jackpot games. Here, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the variation display in which the hit/miss determination result is a big hit is started in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation starts later. The special symbol is controlled so that it is forcibly determined to be the hit/miss judgment result. Therefore, when the hit/no hit determination result is a big hit, it is possible to prevent the game from being unnecessarily lengthened by selecting a relatively short variation time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured such that the variable display that is a big hit does not change at the same time, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and it is possible to display a variable display that is a big hit at the same time. When configured, the variable display time that is a jackpot of the second special symbol is shorter than the first special symbol (for example, 5 seconds) or extremely short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the first special The variation time which is a big hit of the symbol may be configured such that a variation time longer than the second special symbol (for example, 60 seconds) or an extremely long variation time (for example, 5 minutes) is selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to postpone the jackpot with the second special symbol which may determine the jackpot B, which is a type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, during which the second special It is possible to make a big hit with a design and give a big hit C to the player. In this case, when the jackpot is started with one special symbol, a configuration is conceivable in which the lottery game being changed with the other special symbol is invalidated. With such a configuration, the jackpot C, which is an unfavorable jackpot type, is given to the player, and the probability variation gaming state is set immediately after the probability variation gaming state is set, so that the probability variation gaming state ends in a short period of time. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the configuration described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed at the same time in a variable display in which the hit determination result is a big hit. In the configuration, the hit determination result in the first special symbol is a deviation. By setting the display time long (for example, 100 seconds), and setting the variation time per hit determination result in the second special symbol to be short (for example, 1 second), the first special symbol during the time saving game The number of times the lottery result is displayed can be reduced (the number of times the first special symbol is variably displayed) can be reduced, and the number of lottery with the second special symbol advantageous to the player can be increased. In addition, when the time saving number is set to be displayed until the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed 100 times, the variation time of the first special symbol is 100 times in succession due to deviation of the second special symbol. It is possible to effectively reduce the number of times the second special symbol is variably displayed during the time saving game by configuring the time longer than the time when the variable display is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12(a), it is one of the variation pattern selection tables 202d in which the variation pattern selected when the result of the determination whether or not the first special symbol in the time saving game state is out is set. The deviation (time saving) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the outlier (shortening) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d. In this deviation (time saving) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a deviation pattern with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds, a fluctuation pattern of normal reach with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, and a fluctuation time The special reach variation pattern configured for 30 seconds and the semi-long variation pattern configured for a variation time of 300 seconds are set by assigning the values of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 50", a far variation pattern is set, and for "51 to 100", the normal reach variation pattern is set. , “101 to 169”, the special reach variation pattern is set, and “170 to 198”, the semi-long variation pattern is set.

Here, in the time saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set high until the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100, and the opening time of the ordinary electric auditors role 640a is long. Ordinarily (0.2 seconds in normal time is extended to 1 second), and the number of times of opening is set to be large (1 time in normal time is 2 times). As a result, as a player, the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player (the jackpot C that can give the probability variation game state when a jackpot is surely decided) is variably displayed as many times as possible. Expect to play games. Therefore, in the outlier (time saving) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d, a special reach or semi-long variation pattern having a relatively long variation time is selected more than in the outlier (time saving) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d described later. It is set easily.

Therefore, the variation pattern of the first special symbol having a long variation time is often selected, and the number of times the first special symbol is varied in the time saving game state can be reduced. Therefore, in the case of a big hit during the time saving game state, the big hit C can be easily given to the player.

In the semi-long variation pattern, the symbol corresponding to the first special symbol keeps fluctuating at high speed for 300 seconds, and then stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the deviation. In addition, since the second special symbol described later is configured to easily select the variation pattern of the throat that is configured by the variation time of 5 seconds if the result of the hit determination is out during the time saving, the maximum is the second. It is possible to start 60 fluctuations with a special symbol. Therefore, the variation (lottery) in the second special symbol can be performed during the shorter time game more.

In the present embodiment, the semi-long variation time is set to 300 seconds, but the variation time is not limited to this, and the second special symbol may be configured to have a variation time that can vary up to a minimum of hourly times in a variation pattern. In addition to the semi-long, a variation pattern having a longer variation time may be set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12(b), the variation pattern selected when the result determination result of the second special symbol in the time saving game state is out (off time saving) special figure 2 variation pattern selection The table 202d will be described. FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (time saving) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 12(b), in the time saving game state, the deviation pattern of the second special symbol is composed of a fluctuation pattern of deviation of 5 seconds and a fluctuation time of 10 seconds. The normal reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern are set. "0-180" is set as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the outlying fluctuation pattern, and "181-198" is set as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the normal reach fluctuation pattern. It is set.

As a result, in the time saving game state, a variation pattern with a probability of 181/199 is selected with a probability of deviation of the second special symbol if the result of judgment is wrong. Therefore, since the variation of the second special symbol can be executed in a short time, more lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. Therefore, by utilizing the time saving game state, it is possible to give the player more advantageous lottery opportunities.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 12(c) to 13(c), a variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation patterns of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the probability variation gaming state will be described.

FIG. 12(c) is a deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table which is a variation pattern selection table 202d for selecting variation patterns when the result of determination of whether or not the first special symbol in the probability variation gaming state is out. It is 202d. FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d. In this deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a fluctuation pattern of deviation in which the fluctuation time is constituted by 5 seconds, a fluctuation pattern of long reach 1 constituted by fluctuation time of 30 seconds, and fluctuation time Of the long reach 2 composed of 100 seconds, the variation pattern of the long reach 3 composed of variation time of 500 seconds, and the variation pattern of the long reach 4 composed of variation time of 1000 seconds, respectively. , The variation type counter CS1 is set. To be more specific, the variation pattern of the variation type counter CS1 is set to “0 to 10”, and the variation pattern of the long reach 1 is set to “11 to 120”. The variation pattern of long reach 2 is set for “121 to 149”, the variation pattern of long reach 3 is set for “150 to 189”, and the variation pattern of “190 to 198” is set. The variation pattern of long reach 4 is set.

As described above, the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d is set so that the variation pattern having the variation time of 30 seconds or more is selected at a ratio of 188/199. Therefore, in the probability variation game state, the variation display of the first special symbol is relatively easy to select a variation pattern of a relatively long variation time (30 seconds or more), and the variation number of the first special symbol is small. In addition, as will be described later, in the probability variation game state, the variation time when the result of the determination whether or not the second special symbol is incorrect is set so that the variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected at a rate of 151/199. It is set so that the variation time extremely shorter than that of the first special symbol is selected.

Therefore, in the probability variation game state, the number of times of fluctuation of the second special symbol is large as compared with the first special symbol. In addition, in the probability variation game state, the normal electric auditors product 640a is set to be easily activated in the second starting opening 640 that triggers the start of variation of the second special symbol (execution of lottery), and thus the game ball is the first. It is configured to be easier to enter than the starting opening 64. Thereby, it is possible to increase the number of times the second special symbol changes more than the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to give many opportunities for variation (lottery) in the second special symbol, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, the probability-varied game state can be continued for a longer period and given to the player.

With reference to FIG. 13(a), a variation (selection variation) special figure 1 variation which is a variation pattern selection table 202d for selecting a variation pattern when the hit determination result of the first special symbol in the probability variation gaming state is a hit. The pattern selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit (probable variation) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d. In this hit (probable variation) special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202d, a special 1 variation pattern having a variation time of 3 seconds and a special 2 variation pattern having a variation time of 30 seconds are each a variation type counter. It is set corresponding to the value of CS1. Specifically, the special 1 variation pattern is set for the value “0 to 190” of the variation type counter CS1, and the special 2 variation pattern is set to “191 to 198”.

In this way, in the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the probability variation gaming state, either one of the variation time of 3 seconds and the variation time of 30 seconds is configured to be selected. Since the variation time of 3 seconds is mainly selected, if the jackpot B is determined by using these 3 seconds, the ending of the probability variation period that indicates the end of the probability variation gaming state. The display mode is displayed. On the other hand, when the special 2 variation pattern is selected and the big hit B is determined, the effect that the probability variation period remains for up to 30 seconds is executed. Further, in the special 2 variation pattern, the ending effect similar to that of the special 1 variation pattern may be executed when the remaining variation time is 3 seconds.

In addition, when the variation pattern of special 1 and special 2 is selected and the big hit A is determined, the effect indicating that the probability variation gaming state continues is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, an effect in which the counter indicating the remaining time of the probability variation period shown in FIG. 5A is stopped is executed, or an effect is added in which the remaining time of the probability variation period is not 0 seconds. Furthermore, once the ending is executed and the end of the probability variation period is informed, there is a case where a recovery effect is performed to show the player that it is restored and the probability variation period is set again.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13(b), the variation pattern selection table 202d in which the variation pattern to be selected when the result determination result of the second special symbol in the probability variation gaming state is out (displacement) The special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d. In this deviation (probability change) special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a fluctuation pattern of deviation 1 composed of a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds and a fluctuation pattern of deviation 2 composed of a fluctuation time of 3 seconds A variation pattern of normal reach composed of a variation time of 10 seconds and a variation pattern of super reach composed of a variation time of 20 seconds are set corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, a deviation pattern of "1" is set for the value "0-150" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, a fluctuation pattern of "2" is set for "151-170", and a fluctuation pattern of "171-171" is set. The normal reach variation pattern is set for "190", and the super reach variation pattern is set for "191 to 198".

In this way, the variation pattern selected when the hit determination result of the second special symbol in the probability variation gaming state is out, the variation pattern of out of 1 with a variation time of 0.5 seconds at a rate of 151/199 is selected. Will be done. Therefore, in the second special symbol, since the variation pattern of the extremely short variation time is selected as compared with the first special symbol when the result of the hit determination is out, it is configured to be more than the first special symbol. The number of times the second special symbol changes can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chance of lottery with the second special symbol, and increase the chance of being awarded the jackpot C to the player. Therefore, the jackpot C is continuously determined, and the period in which the probability variation gaming state is continuously imparted can be lengthened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13(c), the variation pattern selection table 202d in which the variation pattern that is selected when the result determination result of the second special symbol in the probability variation gaming state is a hit (probability variation The special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit (probability variation) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d. In the hit (probable variation) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern of normal reach composed of a variation time of 10 seconds, a variation pattern of super reach composed of a variation time of 20 seconds, and a variation time of 30 seconds And the variation pattern of the special reach constituted by (1) are set respectively corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the change pattern of the normal reach is set for the value of the change type counter CS1 of "0 to 150", the change pattern of the super reach is set to "151 to 190", and the special pattern is set to "191 to 198". Each reach variation pattern is set.

In this way, in the probability variation game state, when the winning/discarding determination result of the second special symbol is a hit, a variation pattern having a variation time of 10 seconds or more is selected. If the second special symbol is a hit, the jackpot C that can be given the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game is always determined, so using the variation time set in the variation pattern, the probability variation It is possible to perform various notification effects for the period. Specifically, an effect such as temporarily stopping a counter indicating the remaining time (period) of the probability variation period or adding a time of 10 seconds or more, as shown in FIG. 5A, is executed. It Here, if it is a notification effect indicating that the probability variation game state is continued for a long time, it can be appropriately executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be variable at the same time, and when a variation that is a big hit is started in one of them, in the other special symbol. It is configured to start the variable display forcibly being disengaged. In this configuration, when the jackpot in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, by setting to change the selection ratio of the type of jackpot that can be given a probability variation gaming state, For the player in the lottery between the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, the advantage and disadvantage are set to be different, and the deviation variation time of the disadvantageous special symbol is easily set to be long. It is possible to give a lot of advantageous lottery to the player by configuring to execute a lot of lottery in a short time with a special symbol that is advantageous to.

Further, when the probability variation gaming state, one special symbol (in the present embodiment, the first special symbol), the jackpot type to which the normal gaming state is given is set, and the other special symbol (present embodiment) In the form, in the second special symbol), by setting so that the probability variation gaming state is always set, it is possible to vary the period during which the variation of the deviation is executed in the special symbol to which the normal gaming state is given. The player can be notified as a period in which the gaming state continues.

Furthermore, whether or not a holding ball for which a jackpot B (a jackpot type to which a normal gaming state is given) is determined is stored in the holding ball of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a described later. It is possible to determine the time until the big hit B stops changing as the maximum remaining period of the probability variation period, and perform the notification effect to the player for the remaining period of the probability variation within the maximum remaining period. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the probability variation period is preset. In addition, by configuring the notification effect of the remaining time of the probability variation period to be linked with the actual time and subtracted, the player can start changing the special symbol quickly and in a high probability state advantageous to the player. I can get excited to run lots of lottery. Therefore, a novel game effect can be provided to the player. In addition, by giving an effect that the remaining time of the probability variation period is added little by little, or by performing the effect of stopping the subtraction of the remaining time of the probability variation period, it is possible to give the player a sense of security that the probability variation game state continues for a long time. In addition to the jackpot, it is possible to perform an effect that makes the player expect.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the content of the rough fluctuation pattern, reach, non-reach, etc., and also determines the fluctuation time, and the detailed fluctuation pattern contents are Although it is configured to be determined by the MPU 221 of the lamp control device 113, the present invention is not limited to this, and the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 may be configured to determine the details of the detailed variation pattern (display contents of reach, etc.). Alternatively, the main control device 110 may be configured such that the voice lamp control device 113 or another control device executes the determination control for the variation pattern without determining the variation pattern.

It should be noted that "reach" means that there are many things in which the effect contents are different even in each reach.For example, in the super reach, a reach in which the rear image is rapidly changed and displayed, or a certain character is suddenly displayed. There is a reach to be displayed, and in addition to that, a plurality of reach with different effect contents are included, such as one to which a notice effect before the start of variable display is added, and one to which a big hit in re-variable display is added.

Returning to FIG. 9, description of various counters will be continued. The ordinary hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the sphere passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, it is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h (see FIG. 7) of the RAM 203. Then, the value of the random number that is a big hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal symbol per random number table 202c (FIG. 10(d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the normal per random number counter C4 is set. , If it matches the value of the random number that is a hit set by the normal symbol per random number table 202c (FIG. 10(d)), it is determined as the normal symbol hit.

Also, when the normal hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4. The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) in this embodiment, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening 67 (through gate). .. The number of random number values to be won is 24 in the normal gaming state, and the range is “5 to 28”. Further, in the high-probability game state, it is 200, and the range is "5-204". That is, in the normal game state, it is determined that the winning value is the normal random number counter C4 in the range of "5-28", in the high probability game state, the value of the normal random number counter C4 is acquired. Is determined to be in the range of "5-204", the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display unit 88, and the normal electric accessory 640a is displayed. When the blade 640a is in the normal game state, the opening operation is performed once for a predetermined time (1.2 s in the present embodiment), and in the high probability game state, the opening operation is performed twice for the predetermined time (1 s in the present embodiment). Done. The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 41).

When the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being displayed in a variable state, and if each counter value based on the reserved ball is not stored in the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203h, A random number value is acquired from the normal hit random number counter C4 in the normal symbol holding sphere execution area 203i, and is stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203i1. Further, in the case where the normal symbol (second symbol) is being variably displayed or the random number value corresponding to the reserved sphere stored in the ordinary symbol reserved sphere storage area 203h is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment). Is stored in the ordinary hit random number counter storage area 203h1 corresponding to the number of times of holding (normal symbol holding 1 to 4) corresponding to the random number value obtained from the normal hit random number counter C4. In addition, when a random number value is stored in each area, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to ON, the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped based on the random number value, or the previous one is held because the holding is exhausted. It is set to OFF when data is shifted into the area. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the reserved area newly shifted and stored is set to ON. Whether or not data is stored in the holding area, or whether or not the normal symbol is being variably displayed is executed depending on which holding area or the normal symbol flag of the execution area is turned on.

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display unit 88 can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, about the lottery of the first lottery game and the second lottery game, it is configured to select various common counter values, but the first lottery game (first special symbol) and the second lottery With the game (second special symbol), set various dedicated counters, and update different counters by changing the update timing and initial values of the various counters of the first lottery game and the second lottery game. Of course, the counter values may be configured.

By configuring in this way, in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the counter value is acquired at the same trigger, it is possible to acquire the counter value of a different value. It is possible to suppress a variation pattern selected by the 1 special symbol and the second special symbol, and a problem that the determination result of the winning or hitting is synchronized.

Even if the variation patterns are selected from the common variation pattern tables for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation pattern to be selected is prevented from being synchronized with each other, and various effects are produced. It can be performed. Further, it is possible to suppress the storage data of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and to have an inexpensive configuration (using a RAM or the like having a small storage area).

Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 9, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and I/O. And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. It should be noted that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power cutoff (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power-on by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 41), and each value written in the RAM 203 is restored in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 40). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

RAM203, 1st special design reservation sphere storage area 203a, 2nd special design reservation sphere storage area 203b, 1st special design reservation sphere execution area 203c, 2nd special design reservation sphere execution area 203d, 1st special design reservation sphere number Counter 203e, second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f, ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203g, ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203h, ordinary symbol holding ball execution area 203i, ordinary symbol flag 203j, time reduction counter 203k, after jackpot state area , Jackpot flag 203o, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s, rearrangement pending storage area 203t, state setting area 203u, abnormality It has at least a monitoring flag 203v and other memory area 203z.

The first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on winning the first starting opening 64 up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). is there. In addition, the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b stores various counter values acquired based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting opening 640 up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). This is a storage area for

The first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops variable display, the first special symbol When various counter values are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol, and the details are the same as the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. ..

The first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserve sphere execution area 203c, the second special symbol reserve sphere execution area 203d, for the counter with the detection of the start winning The values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired from the buffer (see FIG. 9) are stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first starting opening 64 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), the MPU 201 acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer, and the first The special winning random number counter storage area 203a1, the special winning type counter storage area 203a2, and the variation type counter storage area 203a4 of the holding ball storage area 203a are stored. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second starting opening 640, the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer, and the corresponding values are obtained, as in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. It is similarly stored in each area (not shown).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, it performs the jackpot lottery, the first symbol display device 37 or the process of setting the display of the third symbol display device 81, or the like described above. Among the data (each value of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1) corresponding to each starting winning stored in the special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a and the second special symbol holding sphere storing area 203b, it corresponds to one starting winning. Data is shifted to this special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. The shift in this embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reservation sphere number counter 203e, the second special symbol reservation sphere number counter 203f, the first start detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) that is regularly executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning in the mouth 64 or the second starting opening 640, the number of balls to hold (the number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (the variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed on the first symbol display device 37. Each is a counter that counts up to four times. The first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e and the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203f are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process (FIG. 40, S1242) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the winning a prize for start is detected and the number of balls held in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203a, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed.

Further, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of holding balls) is a counter value in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a based on the game ball winning the first starting opening 64. When is stored, the voice lamp controller 113 is notified by the first special symbol holding ball number command output from the main controller 110. The first special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. Is.

Further, the value of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203f (that is, the number of reserve balls) is based on the game ball winning the second starting opening 640, the counter value in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b When is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f is incremented by 1. Is.

MPU201, when the respective values of the counters C1 to C2, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer are stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203d, respectively, Data stored in the 1 special symbol reserve sphere execution area 203c or the second special symbol reserve sphere execution area 203d, the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, In S206), the jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, by the control of the main control device 110, a variable display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

The fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, by the control of the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, the variable display effect is performed based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is a game ball passing through the normal symbol starting opening 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) that is regularly executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter, "start prize"). Based on that), the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the second symbol display unit 88 of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display effect performed by the second symbol display device 88). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) up to 4 times each. This normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is a counter that stores the total number of holding balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67. Zero is set as an initial value by the initial setting process (S1242 in FIG. 40) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls held for variable display is increased, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203g is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed (see FIG. 35, S1169).

The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h is a storage area in which the normal hit random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 9) is stored along with the detection of the starting winning into the normal symbol starting opening 67. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), the normal hit random number counter C4 of the counter buffer is detected. The value is acquired and stored in the normal hit random number counter storage area 203h1 of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h. The normal symbol flag 203j is set to ON in the normal symbol flag storage area 203h2 and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h has four holding areas so that the data corresponding to one starting winning (the value of the counter C4, the normal symbol flag 203j) can be stored (held) up to four times. There is. In the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h, the data of the holding spheres in the order of passing through the normal symbol starting port 67 (start winning) is stored in order from the holding area in which the data is vacant in the earliest order to be consumed. To be done.

Further, the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i, when it is detected that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol based on the starting winning, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol hit lottery or the first. It is a memory for storing data (value of the counter C4) to be referred in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) on the symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol, the winning lottery and the setting of the display of the second symbol display unit 88 or the second symbol display device 88 are executed. In the data (value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary) corresponding to each starting winning stored in the above-mentioned ordinary symbol holding sphere storing area 203h, the data corresponding to one starting winning is the ordinary symbol holding sphere. Shift to execution area 203i. The shift in this embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol flag 203j is a flag indicating that the data for the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored and is held, and is also a flag indicating that the normal symbol is being variably displayed. It is set to ON when the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere execution area 203i or the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h. Further, when the value of the normal hit counter C4 is shifted to the next holding area (the holding area corresponding to the holding number obtained by reducing the holding number by one when the holding is exhausted), the value of the holding area before the shift is changed. The normal symbol flag 203j is set to OFF, while the normal symbol flag 203j of the reserved area shifted and stored is set to ON. Further, when the variable display of the normal symbol is subjected to the fluctuation stop process, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to OFF.

The hour/hour counter 203k is a counter area in which the hour/hour count 100 is set after the 15R normal jackpot game is executed. When the time saving number is set, until the time saving number is set to 0, the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability is set in the normal symbol per random number table 202c. Further, when the symbol "○" indicating the hit of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display portion 88, the opening time of the blade of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is longer than that in the normal game state (1s in the present embodiment). The operation of opening is repeated twice. This gaming state is hereinafter referred to as a time saving gaming state.

The time saving counter 203k is decremented by 1 each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and stopped, and when the value of the time saving counter 203k becomes 0, the time saving gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and the normal symbol. The normal symbol per random number table for low probability of the hit random number counter 202c is set, and when the symbol "○" indicating the hit of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display portion 88, the opening time is 0.2 s. The blade of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is opened by setting the number of times of opening once.

The jackpot after-state area 203m is a storage area in which the gaming state (time saving gaming state, probability variation gaming state) set when the jackpot is executed is stored. In the initial setting, data corresponding to the time saving game state is stored, and data corresponding to the probability variation game state is stored based on the fact that the game ball enters the second specific entrance 650a during the jackpot game. It Thereby, even if the big hit A or C that allows the game ball to enter the second specific entrance 650a is executed, the data set in the big hit post state area 203m becomes the data corresponding to the time saving game state, 2 By the game ball entering the specific entrance 650a, the data corresponding to the probability variation gaming state is set (overwritten). As a result, unless a game ball enters the second specific ball entrance 650a, it can be configured not to shift to the probability variation game state, and whether or not the game ball enters the second specific ball entrance 650a. The player can expect the game to be played.

The big hit flag 203o is turned on when it is determined that the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired based on winning in the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 640 is a win at the start of fluctuation. This is the flag that is set. Also, when the jackpot game is over, it is set to off. In addition, it is composed of a flag that can identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit. Specifically, it is made up of 2 bits, and the jackpot flag 203o is set to "10" for the first special symbol, and the jackpot flag 203o is set to "01" for the second special symbol, When "00", the big hit flag 203o is set to OFF.

Here, the jackpot flag 203o is commonly used by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so at the start of fluctuation, one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to ON first. In the case where the other lottery result is a big hit, the big hit flag 203o is not overwritten, and the other lottery result is processed in the same manner as a win. Thereby, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to process so that the variable display that is a big hit is not executed at the same time.

That is, when the variation display that is a big hit is started with one of the special symbols, the variation display that is a big hit is not started on the other, and only the out-of-phase variation mode is displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured with the common big hit flag 203o, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol each have an independent big hit flag. Then, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that the variable display which is a big hit is executed at the same time. With such a configuration, the first special symbol during the probability variation gaming state, even if the variation display that is the big hit B is started, the variation time is set long, and the short variation in the second special symbol By making the lottery easy in time, it is possible to easily make a big hit with the second special symbol until the big hit B is started. Therefore, by executing an effect that informs the player of the time until the jackpot B is started (that is, the period until the probability variation gaming state ends), the player is rushed to win the jackpot with the second special symbol. It is possible to execute an effect that causes a game to be performed. Therefore, the player can be provided with a fresh effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the second special symbol is started to be executed while the first special symbol is variably displayed. In S1005 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S207) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. Further, in the process of S613 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 25, S204), it is set to OFF.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q is a flag that indicates that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. In S605 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 25, S294) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. Further, in the process of S1012 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S207), it is set to OFF.

Special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. When the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S507 in FIG. 24). After that, in the processing of S602 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 25, S204), the counter value (in this embodiment, one by one) corresponding to the elapsed fluctuation time is subtracted and updated.

Special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. When the variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S907 in FIG. 28). Then, in the process of S1002 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S207), the counter value (in this embodiment, one by one) corresponding to the elapsed fluctuation time is subtracted and updated.

The rearrangement storage area 203t is the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114). It is a storage area in which each determination result determined based on each data of the holding areas 1 to 4 stored in is stored.

FIG. 17A is a diagram schematically showing the rearrangement storage area 203t. The rearrangement storage area 203t corresponds to a pending data storage area in which each determination data corresponding to each of the numbers of holdings in the holding areas 1 to 8 is stored, and a first special symbol and a second special symbol that are being variably displayed. And a changing data storage area in which each determination data to be stored is stored.

In each of the holding areas 1 to 8 of the pending data, the judgment result storage area 203t1, the big hit type storage area 203t2, the variation pattern type storage area 203t3, the variation order storage area 203t4, the variation start time storage area 203t5, the prefetch probability variation flag 203t6. Are provided respectively. It should be noted that the holding areas 1 to 8 are stored in order from the holding area 1 in the order in which the respective holding balls are established (a total formation order in which the first starting opening 64 and the second starting opening 640 are combined). That is, the holding areas 1 to 8 show the order in which the holding balls are established in the pachinko machine 10 by combining the holding balls of the first special symbol and the holding balls of the second special symbol.

In the variable display data storage area, a win/fail judgment result storage area 203t1, a big hit type storage area 203t2, a variation pattern storage area 203t3, and a pre-reading probability variation flag 203t6 are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Has been.

The hit determination result storage area 203t1 is, in the first prefetching process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 33, S1114), the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b. This is a storage area in which the result of previously determining whether or not the special winning random number counter C1 stored in is stored.

Big hit type storage area 203t2, in the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114), in the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b It is a storage area in which the big hit type determined by the stored special hit type counter C2 is stored.

The variation pattern type storage area 203t3 is a first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or a second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114). This is a storage area in which the types of fluctuation patterns determined based on the various data stored in are stored. This variation pattern is data that can identify which variation pattern is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the data in the reserved area is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is also used as data for identifying whether or not this is data.

The variable display order storage area 203t4 is the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114). This is a storage area in which the actual variable display start order in the determined holding areas 1 to 8 is stored based on various data stored in. The fluctuation display start order is specifically determined by calculating the fluctuation start time of a newly stored holding ball and comparing it with the fluctuation start time of each previously stored holding ball. ..

The fluctuation start time storage area 203t5 is the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114). This is a storage area for storing the time until the actual display of the respective data in the holding areas 1 to 8 calculated based on the various data stored in FIG. When the variable display start time is stored in the holding area, it is updated at any time in the other process (S112) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The prefetch probability change flag storage area 203t6 is turned on when it is determined that the type of the stored jackpot type storage area 203k2 is the jackpot A or the jackpot C in the first prefetch update process (FIG. 32, S1133) described later. Is a storage area that is set and stored. Further, the pre-reading probability change flag storage area 203t6 is set to OFF every time the data is shifted and stored in the upper reserved area, because the area before the shift is cleared to 0. In other words, the pre-reading probability variation flag storage area 203u6 which has been set to ON once is shifted to the changing data storage area, and new data is overwritten (shifted) in the changing data storage area to be set to OFF. .. Further, when the game machine is powered on and the RAM clear process is executed, it is set to OFF as an initial value.

Each data in the rearrangement storage area 203t is backed up and stored in a backup area (not shown) of the RAM 203 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. Then, when the power is turned on again, it is read from the stored backup area and set.

The state setting area 203u is a storage area in which the current game state is stored. In this embodiment, based on the data stored in the post-big hit state setting area 203m after the big hit game, the data corresponding to the game state is set in the state setting area 203u, so that the game state after the big hit is switched. Is set. Further, in the time saving game state, when a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) is executed, the data corresponding to the normal game state is set in the state setting area 203u, so that the game state is changed. The time saving game state is shifted to the normal game state. In the initialized state, data corresponding to the normal gaming state is set.

The abnormality monitoring flag 203v is a flag for determining whether or not the player is playing the game in a correct game method corresponding to the current game state.

It is correct to execute the right-handed game in the probability variation game state or the time saving game state (except during the jackpot game). In this case, it is usual that the lottery is executed with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but during the period when the game is executed only with the second special symbol, it is an illegal game method. There is a possibility that you are playing a game. Therefore, this abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON. As will be described later, when the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON, a period during which the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is continuously set to ON is measured by an abnormality monitoring counter (not shown), and a predetermined time (in the present embodiment, , 20 seconds) or more, abnormality notification (display of voice and warning image) is executed.

Also, in the normal game state, it is the correct game method to play the game by left-handing, but the game ball enters the normal symbol starting opening 67 that should only enter by right-handing, and the normal symbol has changed. When the determination is made, the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON, and the abnormality notification is executed.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

In this way, when a game ball is won in the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 640 and a holding ball is generated, each holding ball is formed by combining the first starting opening 64 and the second starting opening 640. Various determination data of the reserved ball is stored. Therefore, the winning command is generated based on the rearrangement storage area 203u, the voice lamp control device 113, based on the winning command, the holding of the combination of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is established. It is possible to generate a command to be output to the display control device 114 so as to display the reserved symbols in order. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in the order of establishment of the reservation, which is a combination of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, since the variable display start order of each hold is also discriminated and stored in association with the established order, the voice lamp control device 113 also receives the winning command by generating the winning command based on the variable display start order. Based on the received winning command, it is possible to determine the order of establishment of each hold and the actual start order of variable display.

In addition, since the variable start time of each hold is stored in each hold area and that time is managed (updated as time passes), the change display start order of newly stored hold data can be easily performed. Can be determined.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display part 88, and the opening/closing drive to the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to them via the input/output port 205.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variable display ( This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it is displayed in the winning order displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. The audio output device 226 is controlled so that the displayed reserved symbol display is rearranged and displayed in the variable display start order, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

A vibration sensor (not shown) is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, since the winning of the winning hole is an important factor that determines the gaming state, it is necessary to prevent the player from intentionally winning the winning hole by changing the flow of the ball by vibration. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that the pachinko machine 10 is vibrated by the player or the like, an error command for notifying the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 determines an error in accordance with the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and issues an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, control for displaying an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay is performed.

<About the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. At least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an addition time selection table 222b are set in the ROM 222.

The fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining the detailed contents of the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110. This fluctuation pattern selection table 222a corresponds to the fluctuation time and the rough fluctuation pattern (reach, non-reach, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and a plurality of kinds of fluctuation contents (for example, fluctuations). One variation content is determined from the reach variation patterns with different display content of the reach A to D configured with the same time and the same determination result.

The addition time selection table 222b is for determining the addition time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the addition time (the extended display time shown in FIG. 5B) with respect to the remaining time of the probability variation period. It is a data table. The addition time is set in the addition time selection table 222b corresponding to each addition time. It should be noted that the addition time is the maximum time until the fluctuation display of the big hit B is started, and when the selected addition time exceeds the maximum time, it is set in the addition time selection table 222b. It is controlled so that a large value within the maximum time is selected from among the added times that are set.

In the present embodiment, the time until the fluctuation of the first special symbol that becomes the big hit B is set as the start time, but the time until the fluctuation of the first special symbol that becomes the big hit B stops is the maximum time. May be configured as.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, the command storage area 223a, the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b1, the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223d1, the special figure 2 variation start flag 223c1, the sub-special figure 1 variation stop flag 223c2, the second special symbol On-hold ball number counter 223d1, dependent feature 2 variation stop flag 223d2, dependent feature 1 variation time counter 223e, dependent feature 2 variation time counter 223f, performance counter 223g, dependent state setting area 223h, probability variation upper limit storage area 223i, At least the probability variation period storage area 223j, the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k, the update stop flag 223m, and the other memory area 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until a process for the command is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 46) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination processing is executed. , The command is analyzed, and the process according to the command is performed.

Outside 1 special symbol reservation sphere number counter 223b1 is, like the first special symbol reservation sphere counter 203a of the main controller 110, the first special performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) It is a variable display of symbols (dynamic display), and is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting number) of the variable display effect held in the main controller 110 up to four times at maximum.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223b2 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. Is set (step S1502 in FIG. 46). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S1612).

The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. Is set to (step S1505 in FIG. 46). On the other hand, when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81, it is turned off (FIG. 48, S1617).

The subordinate figure 1 stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received ( FIG. 46, S1508). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S1622).

The sub-special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 223c2 is a flag indicating the content of the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p in the main control device 110. As a result, the changing state of Toku-zu 1 can be determined by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The second special symbol reservation sphere counter 223d1 is the second special performed in the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the second special symbol reservation sphere counter 203a of the main controller 110. It is a variable display of symbols (dynamic display), and is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting number) of the variable display effect held in the main controller 110 up to four times at maximum.

The second stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to ON when the second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received (FIG. 46). , S1508). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 48, S1622).

The sub-special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 223d2 is a flag indicating the content of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q in the main control device 110. As a result, the changing state of Toku-zu 2 can be determined by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

Sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

Sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223f is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

The effect counter 223g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, selecting an addition time from the addition time selection table 222b, and the like. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Each time the main process is executed, it is incremented by 1 and updated.

Data corresponding to the status command output from the main controller 110 is set in the slave status setting area 223h. Based on the data set in the sub-state setting area 223h, the current gaming state can also be determined by the voice lamp control device 113. The state setting command is output from the main control unit 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backup game state can be determined by the voice lamp control unit 113.

The probability variation upper limit storage area 223i is a storage area in which the time until the variation that becomes the big hit B of the first special symbol is started is stored. In addition, when the holding ball which is the big hit B is not stored in the holding ball of the first special symbol, the time until the fluctuation of the last holding ball of the stored holding balls of the stored first special symbol is ended. It is stored in the probability variation upper limit storage area 223i.

As shown in FIG. 9B, the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k has the same data as the rearrangement storage area 203u of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 based on the winning command output from the main controller 110. Is a storage area that is stored based on the winning command output from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113.

FIG. 9B is a diagram schematically showing the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k. The subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k stores a variety of data of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which are being variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the holding area of the pending data from the holding area 1 to the holding area 8. And a storage area for data during variable display. Each of the holding areas includes a win/fail judgment result storage area 223k1, a big hit type storage area 223k2, a variation pattern type storage area 223k3, a variation order storage area 223k4, a variation start time storage area 223k5, a subordinate reading probability variation flag storage area 223k6, and a rearrangement flag 223k7. And each data extracted from the received winning command is stored in the corresponding holding area. Also, every time a display variation pattern command for starting the variable display of the special symbol is generated, the data of the reservation area of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is shifted and stored in the previous reservation area. The reserved data in the reserved area 1 is a storage area for the changing data of the first special symbol in the case of the first special symbol, and a changing data of the second special symbol in the case of the second special symbol. Each is shifted and stored in the storage area.

The hit determination result storage area 223k1 is, in the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914), the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b. This is a storage area in which the result of previously determining whether or not the special winning random number counter C1 stored in is stored is extracted from the received winning command and stored. The information on the hit/miss judgment result extracted from the winning command is one of the hit/no hit judgment result storage areas of the holding areas 1 to 8 corresponding to the number of holdings (corresponding holding area of the rearrangement holding storage area 203u of the main controller 110). It is stored in 223k1.

The jackpot type storage area 223k2, in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914), in the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b This is a storage area in which the jackpot type determined by the stored special winning type counter C2 is extracted from the received winning command and stored.

The variation pattern type storage area 223k3 is the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914). This is a storage area in which the type of variation pattern determined based on various data stored in is extracted from the received winning command and stored. This variation pattern is data that can identify which variation pattern is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the data in the reserved area is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is also used as data for identifying whether or not this is data.

The variable order storage area 223k4 is the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b in the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, S914). This is a storage area in which the actual variable display start order in the determined holding areas 1 to 8 is extracted from the received winning command and stored based on various stored data.

The fluctuation start time storage area 223k5 is the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914). Is a storage area in which the calculated time until each data in the holding areas 1 to 8 actually starts variable display is extracted from the received winning command and stored. .. The variable display start time, when stored in the holding area, is updated at any time in the holding number display processing (FIG. 35, S1406) of the main processing (FIG. 35, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. It

In the present embodiment, the winning command is a command indicating the time until the calculated respective data of the holding areas 1 to 8 actually start the variable display. Each counter value for calculating the time (for example, the type of the selected fluctuation pattern, the counter value for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol in fluctuation (interruption count, etc.)), and fluctuation display start It may be a command corresponding to the time until.

The subordinate read probability variation flag storage area 223k6 is a storage area that is set to ON and stored when the type of the stored jackpot type storage area 223k2 is 15R certainty variation jackpot or 2R certainty variation jackpot.

The rearrangement flag 223k7 indicates that the player operates the frame button 22 to request the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display (a reserved symbol display displayed when the frame button 22 is operated). It is a flag.

In this way, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63a and a reserved ball occurs, based on the data extracted from the winning command, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b. Various determination data of each reserved ball is stored according to the order of establishment of the reserved balls including the above. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113, based on the data of the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k, the display control device to perform the hold symbol display in the order of establishment of the hold, which is the combination of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A command to be output to 114 can be generated. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in the order of establishment of the reservation, which is a combination of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, based on the winning command, the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k is updated with the data synchronized with the rearrangement storage area 203u of the main controller 110, and the suspension data is changed (new suspension is established). Also, the data can be sequentially synchronized and updated.

The other memory area 223m is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch (see FIGS. 3 and 122) (see FIG. 3). The RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253 is provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline thereof, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors and the like, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

When a power failure occurs, MPU 201 of main controller 110 stores each data in rearrangement storage area 203u in the backup area of RAM 203 as backup data. Then, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 again, each backed up data in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u is read out from the backup area, and the respective pending areas corresponding to the rearrangement pending storage area 203u or in transition. It is stored in the data storage area.

Then, in the start-up process (FIG. 32), based on the rearrangement-reserved storage area 203u in which the backed-up data is read and stored, as in the winning command generated in the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S939). All winning commands are generated and output to the voice lamp control device 113, so that data that is synchronized with the same rearrangement pending storage area 203u is also set in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k.

Further, in the start-up process (FIG. 32), by transmitting a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113, the data in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u and the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k can be restored even after a power failure. Although the configuration for synchronizing has been described, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is not limited to this, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 backs up each data in the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k to the RAM 223 when a power failure occurs. Of course, it may be configured to be stored as.

The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 has the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3) pressed when the power is turned on (the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122)). In this case, it is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to main controller 110. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 executes control processing such as detection of winning of a special symbol or normal symbol, and various lottery such as selection of winning or variation pattern for the winning. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably execute the control of the pachinko machine 10, as in the present embodiment, a lottery on whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is performed as a sub-control. The control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device.

The control boards of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are covered with a box (box) which is called a board box and is composed of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member. The substrate box is crimped by a member for preventing fraud called a "sealing member" so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated from each other. Generally, when the base member and the lid member are fitted to each other, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member (or Therefore, it is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method of leaving an unopened mark such as breaking the member forming the through hole or breaking the sealing member. ..

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a ROM 234, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a model having a completely same design as the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model having a different winning probability for the jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, various processes are executed according to the control program stored in the ROM 234.

As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234. The ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 at any time, and controls the display of the third symbol display device 81.

When the game ball enters the distribution device 630, is distributed by the passive distribution member 640, and the game ball wins the first starting opening 63a, each counter value (C1 to C3 and CS1) is acquired and acquired. Based on each counter value, after the determination of the lottery and the variation pattern, etc., the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first lottery game is the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Variable display (dynamic display). Further, during the variable display of the first special symbol, when the game ball enters the distribution device 630, the game ball is distributed by the passive distribution device 640 and wins the second starting opening 63b. When the game ball wins the second starting opening 63b, each counter value (C1 to C3) for the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second lottery machine, as in the case of winning the first starting opening 63a. And CS1) are acquired, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are configured such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously varied. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, of the two 7-segment LEDs of the 7-segment display 37b, the left 7-segment LED, the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, the right 7 In the segment LED, the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 5A, the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed in the left display region Dm1, and the second special symbol is displayed in the right display region Dm2. The variable display corresponding to the symbol is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the player can efficiently execute the first lottery game and the second lottery game. ..

When the game ball wins the first starting opening 63a during the variable display of the first special symbol (the remaining variable time is set), the respective counter values (C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired based on the winning. Since the first lottery game which variably displays the lottery result cannot be executed immediately, each counter value is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a, a mode showing the number of reserved "1" of the first special symbols of the plurality of light emitting diodes 37a of the first symbol display device 37 (for example, one The light emitting diode lights up in red). When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the value of the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is updated (the number of holding spheres is incremented by 1).

When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 outputs a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113. The winning command can identify which of the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b is the winning, and the number of reserved balls (reserved number) can be identified.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning command command, it extracts holding information such as the number of holdings and information about the winning opening from the received command, and based on the holding information, the third symbol display device. A process of displaying the reserved symbol in the corresponding reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the lower display area Ds at 81 is executed. As for this reservation design, as shown in Figure 5 (b), if it is the reservation design which corresponds to the reservation information of the 1st special design (1st starting mouth 63a), “O”, 2nd special design (the 2nd starting) If it is a hold symbol corresponding to the hold information of the mouth 63b), "●" is displayed for each hold information (one hold symbol for each hold).

Similarly, during the variable display of the second special symbol (the remaining variable time is set), each counter value is acquired when the game ball wins the second starting opening 63b, the second special symbol reserve ball storage area It is stored (stored) in 203b, and the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f is updated. Then, the hold symbol indicating that the hold information is stored in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

The reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed in a comprehensive winning order in which the game balls that have won the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b are combined. The example shown in FIG. 18 will be specifically described. This is, first, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed, the first special symbol has a variation time of 10s remaining, the second special symbol has a variation time of 5s remaining Showing. In the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, the holding symbol indicating that it is the holding information of the second special symbol in the holding symbol display area Ds1 (holding information based on winning in the second starting opening 63b). "", the holding symbol "○" indicating that the holding symbol display area Ds2 is the holding information of the first special symbol, the holding symbol "○" indicating that it is the holding information of the second special symbol in the holding symbol display area Ds3 "," is displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds4, which is a reserved symbol "○" indicating that it is the reserved information of the first special symbol. In this case, it is shown that the order of winning in the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 63b is in the order of the reserved symbol display area Ds1 from the reserved symbol display area Ds1 in ascending order.

In other words, after the game ball is won in the second starting port 63b, the first starting port 63a is won, then the second starting port 63b, then the first starting port 63a is won. It shows that it did.

As shown in FIG. 18, each suspension data is stored in advance by predicting the variation time of the variation pattern selected when the suspension starts to vary (the type of the determined variation pattern is stored. Has been). Then, since the second special symbol is stored in the first winning order (in the rearrangement storage area 203u, the storage area 1 corresponds), the second special symbol that is currently displayed in a variably manner remains. When the variable time (5 s) has elapsed, the variable display starts, so the variable display start time is calculated to be 5 seconds later. Also, since the first special symbol is stored in the second winning order (the rearrangement storage area 203u corresponds to the retaining area 2), the remaining of the first special symbol which is currently displayed in a variable manner. When the variable time (10 s) has elapsed, the variable display starts, and the variable display start time is calculated to be 10 seconds later. Next, since the second special symbol is stored in the third winning order (in the rearrangement storage area 203u, the storage area 3 corresponds), the second special symbol is currently displayed. When the variation time (40 s) of the pending data stored in the first winning order has elapsed in the remaining variation time (5 s), the variation display starts, so the variation display start time is calculated to be 45 seconds later. Next, since the first special symbol is stored in the fourth winning order (in the rearrangement storage area 203u, the storage area 4 is applicable), the first special symbol currently being displayed is changed. When the fluctuation time (10s) of the pending data stored second in the winning order elapses in the remaining fluctuation time (10s), the fluctuation display starts, so the fluctuation display start time is calculated as 20 seconds later.

In this way, in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u, the variable display start times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are calculated in the order in which they are established, and the variable display start time is in the descending order based on the variable display start time. In, the variable display order is assigned.

At this timing, when the player operates the frame button 22, the reserved symbol display of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in the rearrangement display mode shown in FIG. 18, the fourth special symbol in the winning order is reserved. The symbol display is rearranged with the reserved symbol display of the second special symbol of the third winning order (the reserved symbol display of the fourth winning order is interrupted before the reserved symbol display of the third winning order).

FIG. 19 shows the first pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 25, S907) by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when a game ball wins the first starting opening 63a after 1 s from the state of FIG. 27, S914) is a diagram schematically showing a process of determining a variable display start order of newly stored reserved symbols.

Since FIG. 19 is a state after 1 s from FIG. 18, the first special symbol in the variable display has a remaining fluctuation time of 9 s, and the second special symbol has a remaining fluctuation time of 4 s. Further, the fluctuation start time of each holding area of the rearrangement holding storage area 203u is also updated.

The newly established first starting opening 63a (first special symbol) is reserved in the fifth winning order, and in the rearrangement storage area 203u, each data is stored in the storage area 5. First, the same as the newly stored first special symbol, the remaining variation time of the first special symbol in the variable display, the variation time of the suspension of the first special symbol of the winning order 2 and 4 are added respectively, and newly. The time when the hold of the established (stored) first special symbol becomes the variable display start is calculated (in this case, 24 s).

Next, as shown in the rearrangement schematic diagram of FIG. 19, the rearranged order (variable display start order) is re-arranged based on the variable display start time of each holding area. At this time, when the player operates the frame button 22 and requests the rearrangement of the reserved symbol display, as shown in the display mode after rearrangement of FIG. 19, the fourth and fifth reserved symbols in the winning order are displayed. Is displayed in rearrangement with the third winning symbol display in the winning order (the winning symbol display of the fourth and fifth winning symbols is interrupted before the displaying of the third winning symbol in the winning order).

In this way, each time a hold occurs, the variable display start time is calculated, and the sorting order is determined in advance, so that the player can perform an operation (operation of the frame button 22) requesting sorting. In this case, the reserved symbol display after rearrangement can be promptly displayed.

Further, the variation patterns of the 15R certainty variation jackpot and the 15R regular jackpot are likely to be longer than the variation pattern selected when the variation time is out of sync. As shown in FIG. 19, the variation time of the first winning order hold is 40 seconds, which is long. Therefore, the hold of the same second special symbol that is established after that, the variable display start time is later than the hold of the first special symbol that was established later, and when rearranged, a long variable time is selected. Behind the pending symbol display that is present, a type (difference between the first special symbol and the second special symbol) that is different from the pending that the long variation time is selected is collectively displayed. Therefore, the greater the number of reserved symbol displays that are displayed by being interrupted in the subsequent reserved symbol display area of the reserved symbol display, the more the player holds the expectation of a big hit for the previous reserved symbol display, and the player is You can rearrange with the expectation of a big hit. Therefore, interest in the game is increased and the game can be continued without getting tired.

<Regarding control processing executed by main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 20 to 43. The process of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process (FIG. 40) started when the power is turned on, a main process (FIG. 41, S1250) executed after the startup process, and periodically (in the present embodiment). Then, there is a timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) that is activated (at a cycle of 2 milliseconds) and an NMI interrupt process (FIG. 39) that is activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. The timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process (FIG. 40) and the main process (FIG. 41, S1250) will be described.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. By the MPU 201 executing this timer interrupt process, various processes that should be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) and the main process (FIG. 41, S1250), a command or the like to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, or the like is generated based on various processes, and is provided in the RAM 203. Once stored in the command transmission ring buffer. In the external output process of S101, output data such as a command stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

For example, the number-of-holding-balls command set in the starting winning process (FIG. 30, S108) described later is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then, in the case of the jackpot state, the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed. A large opening opening/closing process for executing is performed (S103). That is, the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a has elapsed, or the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is filled with a ball. Determines whether the player has won the specified number. When either of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S104). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the winning detection information is set in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S105). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated in the RAM 203. It is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of.

Further, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the normal winning random number counter C4 are updated (S106). Specifically, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1 and the normal winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, 399, respectively). 99, 100, 198, 239), each clears to 0. When the special hit random number counter C1 or the ordinary hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 or the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is set to the special hit random number counter C1 or the ordinary hit random number counter. It is read as the initial value of C4, and the initial value is set in the special hit random number counter C1 or the normal hit random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed. (S107), and then the start winning process associated with winning the first start opening 64 or the second start opening 640 is executed (S108). The details of the special symbol variation process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 21, and the details of the start winning process (S108) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the start winning process (S108), the normal symbol starting process 67 is a normal symbol changing process that is a changing process of the normal symbol for the game ball passing through (S109), and then the normal symbol starting port 67. A through gate process for the game ball passing through is executed (S110). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, and the details of the through gate process (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG. A firing control process is executed to control the game ball to be launched (S111), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process (S111) detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of firing. Then, when the sphere is turned on, in order to send the sphere launch signal to the launch control device 112, the information of the sphere launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203. As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interruption process to be executed next.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a special symbol variation process (S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S107). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107), the first special symbol and the second special symbol, based on each acquired counter value, performs various determinations and determinations, and the determined variable display by predetermined control. In the mode, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are controlled to enable variable display at the same time, or to be stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the determination result. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107) will be described.

In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (S201). When it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed (S202). When it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is in progress (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). The first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 23, S204) will be described in detail later, but when the prescribed fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the variable display has elapsed, the symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game. With the process of stopping the variable display, the second special symbol is variably stopped with a symbol showing a big hit, and when the jackpot game of the second lottery game is executed, the process of temporarily stopping the first special symbol in the variable display Is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not being variably displayed (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203) will be described in detail later, but when the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, the process for restarting the variable display is executed, while the temporary stop is performed. If not held, if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol hold number storage area 203a, the jackpot determination and variation pattern selection processing based on the hold data is executed. ..

After the first special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 22, S203) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed (S205). When it is determined that the second special symbol is being variably displayed (S205: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 29, S207) is executed. The second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S207) will be described in detail later, but like the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 25, S204), the specified fluctuation of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display. When the time has passed, the process of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game and the variable display stop of the first special symbol with the symbol indicating the big hit are performed, and the jackpot game of the first lottery game is executed. In this case, the process of temporarily stopping the second special symbol which is being variably displayed is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not being variably displayed (S205: No), the second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206). This second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S206) will be described in detail later, but like the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203), if the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, While the process for restarting the variable display is executed, if the temporary stop is not performed, and if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol hold number storage area 203b, The jackpot determination and variation pattern selection processing based on the pending data are executed. Then, this process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the first special symbol variation start process (S203) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107) will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

In the first special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 22, S203), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e is acquired (S301). It is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S302). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203e is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding sphere counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S303). .. The data stored in the holding areas 1 to 4 of the first special symbol holding number storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S304). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of holding area 1→execution area, holding area 2→holding area 1, holding area 3→holding area 2, holding area 4→holding area 3.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S305). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 23, S305) will be described in detail later, but based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c, the game that is set. Based on the state, the jackpot judgment of whether or not it is a jackpot is executed.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S306). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, S306) will be described later in detail, but based on the result of the hit/miss judgment based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. Processing for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 23, S305), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is acquired (S401). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state (probability variation in progress) (S402). Whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state is determined by whether or not a probability variation flag (not shown) is set to ON. If the probability variation flag is on (that is, the game state is a probability variation game state (during probability variation)) (S402: Yes), based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability, special winning It is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is acquired (S403). On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is off (that is, the game state is a low probability game state (not in probability variation)) (S402: No), the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability time (Fig. 10(b)), it is determined whether or not the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches the big hit random value, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

It is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203o is on (S405). Here, when the big hit flag 203o is set to ON, it indicates that it is a case where the change to be a big hit is started in the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203o is commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that the variation that is a big jackpot is not executed at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. I am configuring. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that the jackpots are continuously generated in a short time and the loss on the amusement store side becomes excessively large.

In S405, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203o is off, that is, if it is determined that the change to be a big hit in the second special symbol is not started (S405: No), in the process of S403 or S404. It is determined whether the executed lottery result is a big hit (S406). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S406: Yes), the big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S407). After that, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S408), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the jackpot type (S409). Then, this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S405, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203o is on (S405: Yes), or if the lottery result is determined to be out of the process of S406 (S406: No), the The symbol indicating the deviation of the first special symbol is set in the 1 special symbol display device 37 (S410).

In this way, even if the lottery result based on the value of the special symbol jackpot random number C1 actually obtained is a jackpot, the jackpot flag 203o is already set to ON, that is, by the second special symbol, When the variation that becomes a big hit has been started, the setting of the disengagement is forcedly executed with the first special symbol. As a result, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation that is a big hit is not executed at the same time, and in the short period, the variation that becomes a big hit is started continuously, and the game store side It is possible to suppress the problem of excessive damage.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have a configuration in which a variation that is a big hit is not executed at the same time, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be configured to be executed simultaneously. In this case, the special jackpot flag may be set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, when the jackpot game is executed with the other special symbol, in the variation of the one special symbol, the measurement of the variation time is temporarily stopped, and the special symbol is fluctuated in a pseudo manner. It is conceivable to make a temporary stop.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S306).

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, S306), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 23, S305), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined by whether or not a big hit is set in the process of S408. Here, a dedicated flag (not shown) is set to ON so that it can be determined whether or not it is a big hit.

In the processing of S501, if it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol has been set (S501: Yes), in the current gaming state (any of the normal gaming state, probability variation gaming state, time saving gaming state) The variation pattern selection table 202d in which the hit determination result of the corresponding first special symbol is a big hit is set (S502). The jackpot type is determined based on the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 acquired from the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 10B) (S503). Then, the process of S505 is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S501, when it is determined that the first special symbol is set off (S501: No), the variation pattern selection table 202d in which the lottery result of the first special symbol corresponding to the gaming state is out Is set (S504). Then, the process of S505 is executed.

In the process of S505, a fluctuation pattern is selected from the set fluctuation pattern selection table 202d based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S505). A special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command indicating the selected fluctuation pattern is generated (set) (S506). Based on the selected variation pattern, a counter value is set in the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r (S507). Then, this process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the first special symbol variation stop process (S204) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S204).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 25, S204), first, it is determined whether the first fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S601). When it is determined that the first fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to OFF (S601: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r indicating the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol is subtracted and updated (( S602). The value of the updated special 1 variation time counter 203r is 0, that is, it is determined whether it is the variation end timing of the first special symbol (S603). If it is determined that it is not the change end timing (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S603, when it is determined that it is the change time end timing (S603: Yes), it is determined whether or not a big hit is set for the changing first special symbol (S604). When it is determined that the big hit is set for the first special symbol (S604: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q for setting the temporary stop of the second special symbol is set to ON. (S605). The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q is set to the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command which shows that it is on (S606) After that, the big hit game start which is based on the big hit classification which is selected is set (S607). Then, the process proceeds to S610.

On the other hand, in the processing of S604, when it is determined that the deviation is set for the changing first special symbol (S604: No), it is determined whether the time saving counter 203k is 0 (S608). .. When it is determined that the time saving counter 203k is greater than 0 (S608: Yes), the value is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving counter 203k (S609). Then, the process proceeds to S610. On the other hand, in the process of S608, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203k is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to S610.

In the processing of S610, the special figure 1 decision command for instructing to stop the main symbol corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S610). The variation stop of the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S611). The time saving counter 203k is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S612). Then, this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S601, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p is turned on, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to off (S613), and the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set. A special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating that the switch is off is set (S614). Then, this process is completed.

With this configuration, when the big hit and the big hit game is started with the first special symbol, the second special symbol can be set to be temporarily stopped. After that, after the jackpot game is over, for the changing second special symbol, the remaining changing time can be changed and restarted. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time, when one special symbol is a big hit, the other is temporarily stopped and waiting until the big hit game is finished. This allows the player to concentrate on the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the second special symbol variation start process (S206) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S206).

In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S206), the above-described first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S203), the first special symbol holding ball number of each process from S301 to S306 Counter 203e, the value of the first special symbol reservation sphere number counter (N1), the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S306) In each process of S701 to S710, the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203f, the value of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter (N2), the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705), the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706) is the same except that it is changed, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S206) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705).

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 27, S705), the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 23, S305), the process of S401, the first special symbol holding ball execution area In the process of S801 is 203c, in the second special symbol reservation sphere execution area 203d, for the process of S408, the special diagram 1 (first special symbol) is the process of S808, in the special symbol 2 (second special symbol). , S409 and S410, the first special symbol is the same in the process of S809 and S810, except that it is changed to the second special symbol, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S206) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S706).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 28, S706), the special symbol 1 lottery result (first) with respect to the process of S501 of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, S306) described above. Special symbol lottery result) In the process of S901, in the special symbol 2 lottery result (second special symbol lottery result), for each process from S506 to S507, the special symbol 1 variation pattern command (first special symbol) Change pattern command) and the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r are changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s for each processing of S906 to S907. Therefore, the description thereof is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the second special symbol variation stop process (S207) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207).

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S207), in contrast to the above-mentioned first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 25, S204), each special process 1 fluctuation stop flag of S601 to S602 203p, the special figure 1 variation time counter 203r is changed to the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203q, the special figure 2 variation time counter 203s in each processing of S1001 to S1002, and in the processing of S603, the variation of the first special symbol Although it is determined whether or not the time is the end timing, in the processing of S1003, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the second special symbol is the end timing, and for each processing of S604 to S607 and S610 to S611. In the special figure 1 (first special symbol), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203q, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command, the start of the jackpot of the first special symbol, the special figure 1 confirmation command is S1004 to S1005, S1009 to S1010. , Special figure 2 (second special symbol), special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203p, special figure 1 fluctuation stop command, start of big hit of the second special symbol, except that the special figure 2 confirmation command is changed respectively Since they are the same, description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed at the same time. Can be made. Therefore, the lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within the predetermined time, and the probability that the jackpot is awarded to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can efficiently play the game.

Further, even in the configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time and the lottery game is executed, if the jackpot game occurs on one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbols is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

In addition, the special symbols that have been temporarily stopped are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that they are temporarily stopped, so that the player has confirmed that the lottery game that was in the middle of variable display has not disappeared. It is possible to grasp and play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a start winning process (S108) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S108). The start winning process (FIG. 30, S108) determines whether a game ball has won in the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 640, and if a winning is achieved, the upper limit number of holdings (first starting opening 64, It is a process of storing each acquired counter value in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b, up to four in each of the two starting ports 640). Moreover, each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a Alternatively, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol holding sphere storage areas 203b, a process of predicting a win/fail judgment result, a variation pattern to be selected, or the like is executed in advance. The start winning process (FIG. 30, S108) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (FIG. 30, S108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first starting opening 64 (starting winning) (S1101). Here, the winning of the first start opening 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting opening 64 (there is a starting winning) (S1101: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is acquired (S1102). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103). This is determined whether it is less than 4 which is the upper limit value of the number of holdings for the first starting port 64 (that is, whether the number of holdings is not stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (1104). A reserve ball number command for notifying the voice lamp controller 113 of the reserve number is set (S1105). Various counter values, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1 each value is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c special hit random number 203c The counter storage area 203c1, the special winning type counter storage area 203c2, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4 are respectively reserved (stored) (S1106).

Next, the first prefetching process is executed (S1107). The first look-ahead processing (FIG. 31, S1107) will be described in detail later, but the first special display in which the variable display start order based on each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is stored. The combination of the symbol and the second special symbol is used to determine in advance what the order is, and from the variation display order and each of the stored counter values, the judgment result, the variation pattern to be determined, the stop type, etc. The process of determining is executed.

Next, regarding each processing of S1108 to S1114, the same processing as the processing performed for winning the game ball into the first starting opening 64 executed in each processing of S1101 to S1107 is performed. The only difference is the process executed for the starting port 640, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the first prefetching process (S1107) which is one process of the starting winning process (FIG. 20, S108) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch processing (S1107).

In the first look-ahead processing (FIG. 31, S1107), first, various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area 203a, that is, a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, and fluctuations. Each value of the type counter CS1 is read (S1121). The read data is stored in the area having the smallest winning order among the empty storage areas of the rearrangement storage area 203t, and the variable display is started based on the newly stored suspension data (each counter value). The variable display start time is calculated (S1122).

This variation start time is, as shown in FIG. 18, the special symbol in the variation display corresponding to the newly stored suspension data (if the suspension data based on the first starting opening 64, the first special symbol, the second special symbol. If it is the hold data based on the starting port 640, the remaining variation time of the second special symbol) and the respective holding data previously stored based on the same starting port 64, 640 as the newly stored holding data are determined. It is calculated by adding the respective fluctuation times.

Here, each of the hold data previously stored based on the same starting port as the newly stored hold data means that the newly stored hold data is the hold data based on the first starting port 64. Hold data based on the first start port 64 (corresponding to the first special symbol) stored in, on the other hand, if the newly stored hold data is hold data based on the second start port 640, it is stored first. It is the pending data (corresponding to the second special symbol) based on the second starting port 640 that has been made.

When the variable display start time is calculated, the rearranged order is renumbered in ascending order of the variable display start time of all the pending data stored in the sorting pending storage area 203t (S1123). Here, with regard to the renumbering of the variable display start time, in the present embodiment, renumbering is performed for all the pending data, but not limited to this, when the variable display start order is changed from the previous time, that is, However, if the newly stored variable display start order of the pending data is interrupted by the previously stored variable display start order of the reserved data, it is obvious that only the changed order is renumbered. Good.

It is determined whether the game state at the time when the newly stored hold data starts changing is the high-probability game state (S1124). Regarding the game state when the fluctuation starts, although there is a thing that the pre-reading probability change flag 203t6 is on, although it is stopped by the time when the newly stored hold data starts to change, after that, the 15R normal jackpot is held and stopped. It is determined by determining whether or not there is. When it is determined that the game state when the newly stored hold data starts to change is the high probability game state (S1124: Yes), the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability case is the jackpot determination value. On the basis of the above, it is predicted whether or not the first special symbol is correct, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding rearrangement storage area 203t (S1125). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state when the newly stored hold data starts changing is the low-probability game state (normal game state) (S1124: No), the special symbol jackpot for the low-probability case Based on the jackpot determination value of the random number table 202a, it is predicted whether or not the first special symbol is valid, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding rearrangement storage area 203t (S1127).

The first prefetch update processing is executed (S1127). The first prefetch update process (FIG. 32, S1127) will be described in detail later, but the judgment result of the hold data (various counter values) stored in the rearrangement storage area 203t in the order in which the variable display is actually started. Based on, the jackpot type (whether it is a probable change) and the variation pattern (variation time) are stored (updated).

Next, the first prefetch update process (S1127) which is one process of the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first prefetch update processing (S1127).

In the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 32, S1127), first, it is determined whether or not the win/fail judgment result predicted in the process of S1125 or S1127 in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) was a big hit (S1131). When it is determined that the hit determination result predicted in the processing of S1125 or S127 in the first look-ahead processing (FIG. 31, S1107) is a jackpot (S1131: Yes), was the predicted jackpot A or jackpot C? It is determined (S1132). When it is determined that the predicted jackpot is the jackpot A or the jackpot C (S1132: Yes), the prefetch probability change flag 203t6 of the rearrangement hold storage area 203t corresponding to the newly stored hold data is set to ON. (S1133). The prefetch probability change flag 203t6 is set to OFF because the data in the reserved area before the shift is cleared to 0 when the data is shifted and stored in the upper reserved area. In other words, the pre-reading probability variation flag 203t6 which has been set to ON once is shifted to the holding area in order, and is set to OFF by shifting and overwriting (clearing to 0) the next new data in the changing data storage area. To be done.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the predicted jackpot is not the jackpot A or the jackpot C (S1132: No), the process of S1134 is executed.

From the special winnings variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state at the start of variation display (whether it is probability variation or time reduction), variation display start based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 of newly stored pending data The fluctuation pattern that is determined at some time is predicted (S1134).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the win/no determination result predicted in the process of S1125 in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 31, S1107) is wrong (S1131: No), the game state at the start of variable display (probable change or time saving). The fluctuation pattern table 202e corresponding to (whether it is in the middle or not) predicts the fluctuation pattern determined at the start of the fluctuation display based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of the newly stored pending data (S1135). ..

The predicted hit/miss, stop type, and variation pattern are stored in an area corresponding to the winning order in the rearrangement storage area 203t (corresponding to newly stored suspension data) (S1136). The variable display start order of the pending data newly stored in the rearrangement pending storage area 203t is determined by interrupting (changing the order) the previously displayed variable display start order (S1137). .. When it is determined that the variable display start order of the pending data newly stored in the rearrangement pending storage area 203t is interrupted (changed in order) to the previously stored variable display start order, (S1137: Yes), about the pending data after the variable display start order of the newly stored pending data (the pending data in the order of starting to vary after the special symbol corresponding to the newly stored pending data fluctuates and stops) Then, again, the win/fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern are predicted and updated (S1138). Based on the hit/failure, stop type, variation pattern, winning order, variation display start order, and pre-reading probability variation flag 203t6 corresponding to all the pending data stored in the sorting pending storage area 203t, the respective data is converted into a voice lamp control device. A winning command for notifying 113 is generated for each hold data (S1139).

In this way, when the game ball wins the first start opening 64 or the second start opening 640 and is held until the variable display of the corresponding special symbol can be started, it is judged or selected before the variable display is started. The fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation start order in the hold is also calculated. Therefore, when the reserved symbol display is displayed, the reserved symbol display can be rearranged in the order of variation start by the player's operation.

Further, when a new hold is stored and the order in which fluctuation starts is changed due to the new hold (the newly stored fluctuation start order of the hold is stored by being interrupted), the rearrangement storage area 203t is again displayed. Of the stored hold areas, the newly stored hold is newly stored because the judgment of acceptance, stop type, and variation pattern are updated for the hold that starts changing after the newly stored hold is stopped. By doing so, even when the gaming state at the start of fluctuation (whether it is the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability gaming state) changes, it is possible to update it to accurate data.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the newly stored hold start sequence is interrupted and stored, the hold data in the hold area (whether the judgment is correct, the stop type, or the fluctuation pattern) is updated again. Not limited to this, when a new hold is stored, the judgment may be performed again for all the hold areas every time. With this configuration, the data in the holding area can be updated each time new holding is stored, and more accurate data can always be formed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the second prefetching process (S1114) which is one process of the starting winning process (FIG. 30, S108) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the second prefetching process (S1114).

The second prefetching process (FIG. 33, S1114) prefetches the pending data based on the winning of the first starting opening 64 by the first prefetching process (FIG. 31, S1107) described above, and is stored. In contrast to the process of determining the variable display start order of the pending data and making various determinations, the pending data based on winning the second starting opening 640 is pre-read in advance and the stored pending data is stored. The same processing is executed except that the variable display start order is determined and various determinations are performed, and the detailed description is omitted.

Further, as for the second prefetch update process (S1147), which is one process of the second prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114) shown in FIG. 34, the above-described first prefetch update process (FIG. 32, S1127) is the first. While the process of predicting various selection data and generating the winning command based on the variable display start order of the pending data based on winning the first starting port 64, the second starting port 640 is won. Based on the variable display start order of the pending data based on the above, the same process is executed, only the process of predicting various selection data and generating the winning command, and detailed description is omitted. To do.

In this way, the game ball is won in the first starting opening 64 or the second starting opening 640, and various counter values are newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. When the reserved data is stored (the reserved data is stored), the first prefetching process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 33, S1114) is executed. The newly stored reservation data is stored in the rearrangement reservation ball storage area 203t in the first pre-reading process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second pre-reading process (FIG. 33, S1114) in which the order in which variable display is started is sorted first. Since it is decided by comparing with the variable display start time of each held data that is stored, the gaming state (whether it is during the probable change) is accurately determined when the stored data stored is started to display. can do. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the result of the judgment, the stop type, the fluctuation pattern displayed in a variable manner, and the like. Therefore, next, even when the pending data is newly stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b, the first prefetch process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second The variable display start time of the newly stored pending data can be accurately predicted based on the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of each pending data predicted in the prefetch process (FIG. 33, S1114). As a result, the correct variable display start order can be predicted.

In addition, when the variable display start order of newly stored hold data is stored by interrupting the variable display start order of previously stored hold data (the order is earlier), the newly stored hold display is performed. For each pending data in the variable display start order after the data, the game state at the start of variable display is predicted again by the first prefetching process (FIG. 31, S1107) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 33, S1114). Then, since the winning/prohibition, the stop type, and the variation pattern are predicted (look ahead), the winning command can be generated based on the more accurate prediction result. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the accurate prediction result of the stored hold data from the winning command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a normal symbol variation process (S109) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S109). The normal symbol variation process (S109) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device section 88, the opening time of the ordinary electric auditors role 640a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 35, S109), first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit. (S1161). The normal symbol (second symbol) is in the middle of hitting the second symbol display portion 88 until the hit is displayed and the middle opening/closing control of the normal electric accessory 640a is being performed. When it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hitting (S1161: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1161: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol on the second symbol display unit 88 is being variably displayed (S1162). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1162: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the normal symbol executed in the second symbol display unit 88 has elapsed ( S1163). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S1184 and the process of S1185, which will be described later, before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 88.

In the processing of S1163, if the variation time has not elapsed (S1163: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1163, when it is determined that the variation time of the normally displayed variable symbol has elapsed (S1163: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display unit 88 is set (S1164). .. In the process of S1164, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S1178, the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed as the second symbol (lighting display). ) Is set. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is missed and the display mode at the time of disengagement is set by the process of S1177, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) as the second symbol on the second symbol display unit 88. Display) is set. By the process of S1164, when the stop display is set, the variable display in the second symbol display unit 88 ends, the process of S1177, the display mode set in the process of S1178, the stop symbol (second symbol) is The stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the two symbol display portion 88.

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the regular design lottery this time is a win (S1165). When it is determined that the regular symbol lottery result of this time is a win (S1165: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the regular electric accessory 640a is set (1166). On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the regular design lottery this time is out (S1165: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1162, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S1162: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g (the number M of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1167).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is larger than 0 (S1168). If it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203g is 0 (S1168: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203g is not 0 (S1168: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S1169).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203h is shifted (S1170). In the process of S1170, the data stored in the normal symbol reserve 1 to the normal symbol reserve 4 in the normal symbol reserve sphere storage area 203h is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, ordinary symbol hold 1 → execution area, ordinary symbol hold 2 → ordinary symbol hold 1, ordinary symbol hold 3 → ordinary symbol hold 2, ordinary symbol hold 4 → ordinary symbol hold 4, etc. within each area Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding sphere execution area 203i is acquired (S1171).

Next, it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, is not 0) (S1172). When it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203k is 0 (that is, it is not during hour/hour) (S1172: No), the hit determination value of the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability time (FIG. 10(d)) Based on, the result of the judgment is obtained (S1173). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203k is not 0 (that is, during hour saving) (S1172: Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit (( S1174). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (S1174: Yes), the process of S1173 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not a big hit (S1174: No), the hit determination value of the high random probability per normal symbol random number table (FIG. 10 (d)) Based on the result, the result of the judgment is obtained (S1175).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is a win (S1176). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not winning (that is, it is out) (S1176: No), the display mode of "x" which is the display mode at the time of removal is set. (S1177). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (that is, it is a win) (S1176: Yes), the display mode of "○", which is the display mode at the time of winning, is It is set (S1178).

It is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the time saving gaming state (including the probability variation gaming state) (S1179). If it is determined that the time saving game is in progress (S1179: Yes), the process of S1181 is executed. When it is determined that the time saving game is not in progress (S1179: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1180). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a big hit, the process of S1181 is executed.

In the process of S1181, the opening time of the blade of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is set to 1 s, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1181). On the other hand, in the processing of S1180, when it is determined that the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in progress (that is, in the low probability game state) (S1180: No), the normal electric auditors product 640a The blade opening time is set to 0.2 s and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1182).

It is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the time saving gaming state (including the probability variation gaming state) (S1183). When it is determined that the time is shortening (S1183: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 3 s (S1184). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is not shortening (S1183: No), the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 30 s (S1185). After the processing of S1184 and S1185 is executed, this processing ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S110). This through gate passage process (S110) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 20), and it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening 67, and when the game ball has passed. , Is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4 for ordinary hits.

In the through gate passage process (FIG. 36, S110), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (gate) 67 (S1191). Here, the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 (S1191: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is acquired (S1192). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1193).

Whether the sphere does not pass through the normal symbol starting port (gate) 67 (S1191: No), or even if the sphere passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is If it is not less than 4 (S1193: No), this process ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67 (S1191: Yes), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203g is less than 4 (S1193: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value (M) of 203 g is incremented by 1 (S1194). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the above-described timer interrupt process, and the first normal symbol flag, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203 empty holding area (ordinary symbol holding 1 to ordinary symbol) It is stored in the first area of the reservation 4) (S1195). In the process of S1195, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol holding 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the area of the normal symbol reserve 2, if the value is 2, the area of the normal symbol reserve 3, if the value is 3, the area of the normal symbol reserve 4, first, respectively. Area.

Next, the fluctuation monitoring process (S111), which is one process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of this fluctuation monitoring process (S111). In this fluctuation monitoring process (S111), a process of monitoring whether the player is playing the correct game corresponding to the game state is executed. In the present embodiment, in the normal game state (low-probability game state), a method of performing a game by hitting the game ball with a strength such that the game ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (hereinafter, left hitting) Is a regular game method, and during a big hit game, a time saving game state, and a probability variation game state, a method of shooting a game ball with the strength with which the game ball passes the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (hereinafter, right hitting) ) Is a regular game method. In the normal game state, the state in which the normal electric auditors's figure 640a closes the second starting port 640 becomes the normal state, and the winning rate for the first starting port 64 on the right side is lower than that for the first starting port 64 on the left side. Since it is set, it is disadvantageous for the player to hit right in the normal gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage to the player by monitoring whether the player is playing the game correctly. Further, it is possible to monitor that the player rightly hits the player right and wins the prize in the second starting opening 640, and damage caused by the cheating can be reduced.

In the fluctuation monitoring process (FIG. 37, S111), first, it is determined whether the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1201). When it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1201: No), it is determined whether the probability variation game state or the time saving game state is in progress (S1202). When it is determined that the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state is in progress (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol fluctuates or stops (S1203). When it is determined that the first special symbol is in a fluctuation stop (S1203), the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON (S1204). Then, this process is completed. Here, the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is a flag for determining whether or not the player is playing the game in the correct game method (left-handed or right-handed) corresponding to the gaming state. As will be described later, if the time during which the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON becomes a predetermined time or more (for example, 20 seconds or more), an abnormality notification command is set, and the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the abnormality by the command. (A character indicating that the third symbol display device 81 is abnormal (for example, a character display suggesting a correct game method (please right-handed, etc.) is executed, and an error sound or an instruction voice for a correct game is given by voice. Is output and an abnormal signal is output to the hall computer)).

Thus, in the probability variation game state or during the time saving state, in the correct game method, the right-handed game is the state in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed, respectively. If the 1 special symbol is not displayed for a certain period of time, it is possible to monitor whether an illegal game is performed in which the first special symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player by notifying the abnormality, is not displayed in a variable manner. it can. Therefore, fraud can be detected at an early stage, and damage to the gaming shop can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S1201: Yes), in S1203, if it is determined that the first special symbol is changing (S1203: No), abnormal monitoring The flag 203v is set to off (S1205).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1202 that the probability variation game state or the time saving game state is not in progress (S1202: No), it is determined whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is being performed (S1206). When it is determined that the normal symbols are being changed and displayed (S1206: Yes), the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON (S1204).

In this way, in the normal game state in which the right-handed game is not executed, when the normal symbol that can be changed only in the right-handed game is variably displayed, the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON. It should be noted that the abnormal warning command is set when 20 seconds have elapsed while the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON, but after the jackpot game, the time saving game, the probability variation game is over, the normal design holding ball (up to 4 balls) ) Is stored, even if the state shifts to the left-handed state, the normal symbol is variably displayed, so the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON, but in that case, the variation time of the normal symbol is Since it is 3 seconds, the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to OFF before the abnormality alarm command is set. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the abnormality notification is executed even though the player is playing the game in the correct playing method.

On the other hand, in the process of S1206, when it is determined that the normal symbol is stopped (S1206: No), it is determined whether the second special symbol is being variably displayed (S1207). When it is determined that the second special symbol is changing (S1207: Yes), the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON (S1204).

In this way, when the gaming state is not the time saving gaming state or the probability variation gaming state, that is, when it is the normal gaming state, it is the normal gaming method to play the game by left-handed play, but when the player hits right-handed, the variation display If the possible second special symbol is changing, it means that the player is playing the game in the wrong game method. Therefore, by setting the abnormality monitoring flag 203v to ON, the abnormality notification is executed if the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON for a predetermined time (20 seconds in the present embodiment) or more, so an illegal game is executed. Can be discovered earlier. Therefore, it is possible to reduce damage to the game store due to fraud.

On the other hand, in the process of S1207, when it is determined that the second special symbol is in the fluctuation stop (S1207: No), the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to OFF. Then, this process is completed. In addition, in this fluctuation monitoring process (S111), the determination whether the normal symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol are stopped is a state in which the holding ball is stopped in a variable state without being stored. .. In the state where the holding balls are stored, the temporary stop state (stop state from the fluctuation stop to the start of fluctuation by the next holding ball) is determined not to be the fluctuation stop but the fluctuation.

Here, when the game state is the normal game state, and the second special symbol is variably stopped, since the game is being performed by left-handing, which is a correct game method, the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to off. Thus, it is possible to prevent the abnormal alarm command described below from being set. Therefore, even if the player plays the game for a short time by the wrong playing method without any innocence, the abnormality is not immediately notified, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the abnormality.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the fraud monitoring process (S112) which is one of the processes in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fraud monitoring process (S112). In the fraud monitoring process (FIG. 38, S112), when the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to ON, the abnormality alarm command is set when the time exceeds a predetermined time (20 seconds or more in this embodiment). The process is executed.

In the fraud monitoring process (FIG. 38, S112), first, it is determined whether the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is on (S1211). When it is determined that the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is on (S1211: Yes), the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is incremented by 1 and updated (S1212). It is determined whether the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is equal to or more than the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 20 seconds) (S1213). When it is determined that the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is less than the upper limit value (S1213: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is equal to or more than the upper limit value (S1213: Yes), the abnormality alarm command is set (S1214). Then, this process is completed.

This abnormality alarm command is output to the voice lamp controller 113 by the external output process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In the voice lamp control device 113, when the abnormality warning command is received, a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output device 226 to output the abnormality warning mode is executed. As a result, it is possible to detect fraud and defects early.

In addition, when the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is set to be on and is kept set to be on for a predetermined time (20 seconds in this embodiment) or more, the abnormality alarm command is set. Even if there is a period (for example, a period in which the right-handed state is switched to the left-handed state) in which the game is not played by the regular game method for a short time (less than 20 seconds) when the game state is switched, etc., immediately, Since the abnormal alarm is not output, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player feels uncomfortable.

Although the predetermined time is set to 20 seconds in the present embodiment, the predetermined time is not limited to this, and the predetermined time may be configured to be longer than the necessary switching time during the normal game when switching the game state. Good. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the problem that the abnormal alarm is erroneously output while the player is changing the game operation.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1211, when it is determined that the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is off (S1211: No), processing of resetting the abnormality monitoring counter 203w to 0 which is the initial value is executed. Then, this process is completed.

In this way, when it is determined that the abnormality monitoring flag 203v is off, the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203w is reset to the initial value, so the process of setting the abnormality alarm command is avoided, and the regular game method is used. While playing a game, it is possible to suppress a problem that an abnormal alarm is output.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1221), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this startup processing.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 40), first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1231). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Then, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1232). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1233).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1234), and if it is turned on (S1234: Yes), the process proceeds to S1240. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1234: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (1235), and if it is not stored. (S1235: No), since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S1110 in this case as well.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1235: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1236), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1237: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S1240. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S1240, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1240). Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1241, S1242) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is pressed during the startup process, the initialization process (S1241, S1242) of the RAM 203 is executed.

In addition, the initialization processing (S1241 and S1242) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization process (S1241, S1242), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1241), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1242). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process shifts to S1243.

On the other hand, the RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1234: No), the information about the occurrence of power failure is stored (S1235: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) If it is normal (S1237: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S1238). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1239), and the process proceeds to S1243. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, the production permission command which permits execution of various productions is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1243). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1244). Then, the process proceeds to the main process (S1250) described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the main processing (S1250) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1250). In the main process (S1250), roughly, a counter update process and a power-off process are executed.

In the main processing (FIG. 41, S1250), first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is output to each sub side. The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1251).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1252). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1253). After the processing of S1253 is executed, the probability variation setting processing is executed (S1254). This probability variation setting process (S1254) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but when the big hit A or big hit C is executed, the game ball enters the second specific entrance (not shown). If it is determined whether or not the player has entered the ball, a process of setting data indicating that the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the probability variation gaming state in the jackpot state setting area is executed.

When the probability variation setting process (S1254) is executed, the jackpot control process is executed (S1255). This jackpot control process (S1255) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 43, but a process of setting the operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the jackpot game process (S1255) is executed, the electric accessory opening/closing process is executed (S1256). In this electric power accessory opening/closing process (S1256), the opening/closing process of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is executed. Then, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1257).

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, a symbol of "O" or "x") by the second symbol display unit 88 is executed (S1258). Briefly, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball normally passes through the symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, and the second symbol display portion 88 is acquired. The variable display of the second symbol is carried out. Then, the lottery for the second symbol is carried out according to the value of the normal hit random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is hit, the normal electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S1260). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1260: Yes), the process proceeds to S1251 and the above-described processes after S1251 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S1260: No), the initial period is reached during the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1261, S1262).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1261). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffers of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1252 (S1262).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1251 to S1258 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated by using the remaining time, so that the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special random number counter C1 Of the random number counter C4 per ordinary number) can be updated at random, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1256, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 40 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1263 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1263), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1264). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1265), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1266), and the endless loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

The processing of S1259 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1251 to S1258 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1261 and S1262 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1251. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1251 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S1301). By setting the value to the predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S1251. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the probability variation setting process (S1254), which is one of the main processes (S1250 in FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the contents of the probability variation setting process (S1254).

In the probability variation setting process (FIG. 42, S1254), first, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the jackpot game of jackpot A or jackpot C is being executed (S1261). When it is determined that it is not the timing when the big hit A or the big hit C is executed (S1261: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the timing when the big hit A or the big hit C is executed, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second specific entrance 650a (S1262). When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second specific ball entrance 650a (S1262: Yes), the probability change setting data is set in the after-big hit state area 203m (S1263). After that, a ball entry notification command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that a ball has entered the second specific ball entrance 650a is set. In addition, after the jackpot state area 203m, in the default setting, the time saving game state is set, and data for setting the probability variation game state by the game ball entering the second specific ball entrance 650a. Can be rewritten as When the probability variation game state is set, it is automatically rewritten to the default time saving game state data.

As a result, when the game ball does not enter the second specific entrance 650a, the time saving game state is automatically set after the big hit game regardless of the big hit main, so the control of the main controller 110 The load can be reduced.

Further, as will be described later, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the entry notification command, the third pattern display device 81 and the voice output device 226 output a notification mode for notifying that the probability variation gaming state is given. To be controlled. This makes it easy for the player to understand and informs the player of the gaming state after the big hit game.


Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 40. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing (S1400) that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 34, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1301). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1418 (see FIG. 35) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the current startup processing. It is determined whether or not the process is started during the execution of () (S1302). As described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1415 in FIG. 35), the power-off process in S1418 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1418 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1302: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S1418 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction of the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S1418 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1302: Yes), the startup processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1418, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1304, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1306). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

In the process of S1308, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1308). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1418 is executed (see FIG. 35, S1417). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1418 is executed, the process of S1308 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1418 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1109), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1113), and the process proceeds to the main process (S1400). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1308 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, so that the process of S1304 to S1306 is performed. This is the case where the processing is started or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset by noise or the like and started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1309, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1310, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310).

It should be noted that the clear processing of S1309 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1304 when the processing of S1308 is reached through the processing of S1304 through S1306. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1400). When the main processing (S1400) is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing (S1400) was started or since the processing of S1401 was executed last time ( S1401) If 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1411 without performing the processes of S1402 to S1410. In the process of S1401, it is the process related to the display (effect) of S1402 to S1410 that determines whether 1 millisecond has elapsed, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , It is preferable to execute the variable display processing of S1411 and the command determination processing of S1412 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1414 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1414 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to set the variable display effect without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1403 to S1414 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1402). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1409 described later (S1403), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1404). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the power supply notifying process is not performed and the process proceeds to S1405.

In the process of S1405, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the retained quantity display updating process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting production, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the setting of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is a command as a display control device. Sent to 114. In the number-of-holds display update process (S1406), which will be described in detail later, a process of updating the display of the pending symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the data in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k. ..

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1407). In this frame button input monitoring/rendering process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the rendering effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the rearrangeable period (a period during which the jackpot game and the state where there is no hold) are pressed, the hold symbol display that has been displayed in the order in which the hold is established starts variable display. It is sorted and displayed in order.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is then executed (S1408), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1409, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1410). After this, the process proceeds to S1411. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit/output process of S1409 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the processing of S1411, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed by the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission to the user, is executed. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the fluctuation display setting process (S1411), the temporary fluctuation stop process is executed (S1412). This temporary fluctuation stop process (S1412) is a temporary first fluctuation stop command indicating that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped from the main control device 110 or a temporary second fluctuation stop command indicating that the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. Based on having received, the process for temporarily stopping the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed. Details of this temporary fluctuation stop processing (S1412) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the temporary fluctuation stopping process (S1412), the pending rearrangement process is executed (S1413). This reservation rearrangement processing displays the reserved symbol displays in a rearranged display start order from the winning order based on a player's button operation based on a winning command output from the main control device 110, based on the player's button operation. Execute the process. Details of the reservation rearrangement process (S1413) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the reservation rearrangement process (S1413), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1414). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S1414 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power RAM occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1415). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1417), and the power-off process is executed (S1418). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1419), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1416), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1416: No), the process returns to the process of S1401 to repeatedly execute the main process (S1400). On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1416: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process (S1400) is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the command determination processing (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1414). The command determination process (S1414) is executed in the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. To judge. Details of the command determination process (S1414) will be described below.

In the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read and analyzed from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, and the main controller 110 is read. It is further determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S1501). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a special symbol showing a variation display mode for variably displaying the first special symbol. When it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S1501: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag 223b2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1502). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 1 variation pattern command (S1503). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 so as to be distinguishable from the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in a variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) described later. It is used when setting the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol for notifying the control device 114 of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is not received (S1501: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (S1505). Here, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a special symbol showing a variation display mode for variably displaying the second special symbol. When it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S1504: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command (S1506). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) described later. It is used when setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

When it is determined that the special pattern 2 variation pattern command is not received (S1504: No), it is determined whether the first or second stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S1507). When it is determined that the first or second stop type command is received (S1507: Yes), the first stop type selection flag is set to ON when the first stop type command is received. When the second stop type command is received, the second stop type selection flag is set to ON. (S1508). The stop type (either 15R probability jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot) is extracted from the received first stop type command or second stop type command (S1506). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the first stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the second stop type command is the stop type of the second special symbol. Is stored so that it can be identified.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the first or second stop type command has not been received (S1507: No), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1510). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S1510: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e or the second special symbol reserved ball of the main control device 110 included in the received reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter f (that is, the number of holding balls of the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main controller 110) is extracted, and the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is a voice lamp. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 of the control device 113, the holding ball number of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol holding ball counter 223d1 (S1511).

Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b (starting winning), every time there is a starting winning. , S1508, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223b1 and the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e of the main controller 110 and the second It can be adjusted to the value of the 2 special symbol holding ball counter 203f. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223b1 or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e of the main control device 110. Or even if it deviates from the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f, at the time of starting winning detection, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b1 or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d1 of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected. However, the value can be set to the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e or the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f of the main control device 110.

When it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1510: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received (S1512). When it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1512: Yes), information of each holding area of the rearrangement holding storage area 203u of the main control device 110 is extracted from the received command (S1510). Here, the information of each holding area in the rearrangement holding storage area 203u that is extracted is the judgment result, jackpot type, change pattern type, change display order, and time until start of change display for each hold. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1512: No), it is determined whether the temporary first fluctuation stop command or the temporary second fluctuation stop command has been received (S1515). When it is determined that the temporary first fluctuation stop command or the temporary second fluctuation stop command is received (S1515: Yes), when the temporary first fluctuation stop command is received, the slave first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set. When the temporary second fluctuation stop command is received and set to ON, the secondary second fluctuation stop flag 223f is set to ON (S1516).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the temporary first fluctuation stop command or the temporary second fluctuation stop command is not received (S1515: No), the first special symbol fluctuation restart command or the second special symbol fluctuation restart command is received. It is determined whether or not it is (S1517). When it is determined that the first special symbol variation restart command or the second special symbol variation restart command is received (S1517: Yes), the first special symbol variation restart command corresponding to the received command is received. In this case, the subordinate first fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to ON. When the second special symbol fluctuation restart command is received, the sub second fluctuation restart flag 223h is set to ON (S1518).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol variation restart command or the second special symbol variation restart command has not been received (S1517: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1519).

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the pending quantity display update processing (S1406) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this reserved quantity display update processing (S1406). This reservation number display update process (S1406) is a process for updating the reservation symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the data of each reservation area of the subordinate rearrangement storage area 223k. ..

In the reservation quantity display update process (FIG. 37, S1406), first, the fluctuation display start time of the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5 of each reservation area of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is updated (S1431). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each time data stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5. Further, the update of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may be another method.

The holding symbol display corresponding to the holding area in which the sorting flag 223k7 of the subordinate sorting holding storage area 223k is turned on is a variable display start order, and is held corresponding to the holding area in which the sorting flag 223k7 is turned off. As for the symbol display, the held symbol display is displayed in the order in which the hold is established (S1432).

Here, in the rearrangement flag 223k7, the frame button 22 is operated during the rearrangeable period in the pending rearrangement processing (FIG. 40, S1413) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, which will be described later. When the button is pressed), it is set to ON in all hold areas in which hold data is stored. As a result, all the displayed hold symbol displays are rearranged and displayed based on the hold variable display start order from the hold hold order. On the other hand, after the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON, since the rearrangement flag 223k7 is OFF for the newly stored hold, the order established without rearrangement, that is, the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed at the end of the pending symbol display displayed in.

Therefore, when the player wants to rearrange the reserved symbol displays and operates the frame button 22, the reserved symbol displays displayed at that time are rearranged in the variable display start order, and thereafter. Also, the rearranged hold symbol display is maintained in the variable display start order, while the newly stored (reoccurring) hold symbol display is displayed in the established order first. Since it is displayed at the end without being displayed by interrupting the reserved symbol display that is being performed, the player can suppress the problem that the current display is confused as to which sequence is displayed. You can

Further, as described above, by rearranging only the reserved symbol displays that are displayed when the frame button 22 is operated, it is possible to notify the variable display start order only when the player wants to know.

Also, in the case of the 15R certainty variation jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot, a relatively long variation pattern is usually selected. Therefore, the variable display start time is delayed for the hold held by the same start ports 63a and 63b as the big hit hold. Therefore, in some cases, the variable display start time may be earlier in the case of the holding order having a later establishment order that occurs in the starting ports 63a and 63b different from the holding that is a big hit. In such a case, when the holding symbols are rearranged, the holding symbols having a late establishment order are displayed in front of the holding symbols having a faster establishment order than that (the holding symbol display area Ds1 side). It Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the reserved symbol display, when the reserved symbol having a slower establishment order is displayed before the reserved symbol having a faster establishment order is displayed. Of the pending symbols displayed before the interrupt symbol displayed in the interrupt, the pending generated by winning in the starting opening 63a, 63b different from the interrupt symbol displayed in the interrupt is a big hit. You can have expectations.

Therefore, when operating the frame button 22, the player thinks that there may be a big jackpot in the hold symbol display, and can operate the frame button in the expectation that the arrangement order will change. , The frame button 22 can be operated with the expectation of a big hit.

Next, the variable display setting process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1411). The variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is generated, and the process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, a process of setting a display first or second stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type based on the extracted stop type (15R certainty big jackpot, 15R normal big jackpot, 2R certainty big jackpot) To execute.

In the variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223b2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1601). If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223b2 is off (S1601: No), it means that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus the process of S1606 is performed. To execute. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223b2 is on (S1601: Yes), the first fluctuation start flag 223c is set to off (S1602).

In the process of S1603, the variation pattern in the variable display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special diagram 1 variation pattern command in the process of S1503 of the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) is acquired from the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223. Then, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is generated (S1603). The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is configured to be distinguishable from the display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the high-order 2 bits of the high-order byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte structure is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if "01", the second special symbol Is configured to indicate that

The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S1603 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is output by the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbols is performed.

Here, in the display control device 114, when the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is received, in the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81, in the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command, Variable display (dynamic display) of the first special symbol (third symbol).

With the setting of the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set variation pattern command for display is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol). In accordance with (display setting was performed), the value of the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b1 is decreased by 1, and the holding data stored in the subordinate rearrangement holding storage area 223k is set to the previous holding area. It is shifted (S1604). More specifically, holding area 1→first special symbol or second special symbol of variable display data, holding area 2→holding area 1, holding area 3→holding area 2, holding area 4→holding area 3, holding The data in each area is shifted such as area 5→holding area 4, holding area 6→holding area 5, holding area 7→holding area 6, holding area 8→holding area 7. Using the subordinate first variation time storage area 223i, measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol is started (S1605).

It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1606). When it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223c1 is not on (that is, it is off) (S1606: No), the state where the special figure 1 variation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110. Therefore, the processing of S1611 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is on (S1606: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to off (S1607). In the process of S1506 of the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223, and A variable pattern command for display of two special symbols is generated (S1608).

The variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S1608 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400). It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbols is performed.

Here, in the display control device 114, when the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol is received, in the right display area Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81, in the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command, Variable display (dynamic display) of the second special symbol (third symbol). With the setting of the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set variation pattern command for display is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the second special symbol). In accordance with the display setting), the value of the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223d1 is decremented by 1, and the holding data stored in the subordinate rearrangement holding storage area 223k is set to the one holding area before. It is shifted (S1609). More specifically, holding area 1→first special symbol or second special symbol of variable display data, holding area 2→holding area 1, holding area 3→holding area 2, holding area 4→holding area 3, holding The data in each area is shifted such as area 5→holding area 4, holding area 6→holding area 5, holding area 7→holding area 6, holding area 8→holding area 7.

Using the sub second variation time storage area 223j, measurement of the variation time of the second special symbol is started (S1610).

It is determined whether the subordinate figure 1 stop type selection flag (not shown) or the second stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to ON (S1611). If it is determined that the special feature 1 stop type selection flag (not shown) and the second stop type selection flag (not shown) are not set to ON (that is, OFF) (S1611: No). ), and ends this processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the subordinate figure 1 stop type selection flag (not shown) or the second stop type selection flag (not shown) is on (S1611: Yes), the subordinate figure 1 stop type If the selection flag (not shown) is ON, the subordinate figure 1 stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to OFF, and the second stop type selection flag (not shown) is ON. If so, the second stop type selection flag (not shown) is set to off (S1612).

In the process of S1509 of the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), the stop type extracted from the received first stop type command or second stop type command is set (S1613). When the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, based on the stop type, the display control device 114 has a stop type (either 15R probability jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability jackpot). A first stop type command for display for notifying (whether there is) is generated. Further, when the set stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, based on the stop type, the display control device 114 has a stop type (15R probability jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability jackpot). Then, a second display stop type command for notifying whether or not) is generated (S1614). It should be noted that the first or second stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the big hit type when a big hit occurs, and is notified even if the determination result is out of order. .. If the determination result is out, the stop type is not referred, and the out symbol is set.

With such a configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 can control the display control device 114 so as to variably display both the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time.

Further, based on that the variation pattern of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, by also shifting the data of the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k, a dedicated command for shifting from the main control device 110. The control load of main controller 110 can be reduced without the need to control the transmission of.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the temporary fluctuation stop processing (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this temporary fluctuation stop processing (S1412). This temporary fluctuation stop process (FIG. 39, S1412) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, in the temporary fluctuation stop process (FIG. 39, S1412), one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is being variably displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, and the other variable display is changed. During the jackpot game, a process for temporarily stopping is executed.

In the temporary fluctuation stop process (FIG. 39, S1412), first, it is determined whether the first subordinate fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to ON. When it is determined that the subordinate first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to ON (S1701: Yes), the subordinate first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to OFF (S1702).

A first temporary stop command for display is generated (S1703). The first temporary stop command for display is a command for controlling the display control device 114 to temporarily stop the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the display control device 114 sets the first temporary stop command for display, after stopping the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol (main symbol on the left middle right) is slightly shaken to be displayed. Then, the player is informed that the variable display is temporarily stopped. Further, by displaying the character "The first special symbol is temporarily stopped" in the left side display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81, it is easier for the player to understand and the variable display is temporarily stopped. It is configured to notify.

In this way, the player can recognize that the special symbol that was being displayed variably was temporarily stopped because a big hit occurred, and the lottery that was being displayed variably disappeared or became invalid. You can play games with peace of mind by preventing anxiety when it happens.

Further, the display mode of the temporary stop is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and the first special symbol may be erased from the left display area Dm, and the temporary stop may be informed only by the characters. However, other configurations are naturally possible.

When the first temporary stop command for display is set, the measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol measured in the secondary first variation time storage area 223i is interrupted (temporarily stopped).

With such a configuration, the variation time of the first special symbol can be accurately managed, and even when the variation display is restarted, the variation display can be accurately performed with the remaining variation time.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the subordinate first variation stop flag 223e is not set to on (that is, off) (S1701: No), is the subordinate second variation stop flag 223f set to on? It is determined (S1705). When it is determined that the second subordinate fluctuation stop flag 223f is set to ON (S1705: Yes), the second subordinate fluctuation stop flag 223f is set to OFF (S1706), and the second display temporary stop command is displayed. Is generated (S1707). The second temporary stop command for display, similarly to the first temporary stop command for display, controls the display control device 114 to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol that is being variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a command to do. Similarly to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is also temporarily stopped in the display mode of temporary stop.

When the display second temporary stop command is set, the measurement of the variation time of the second special symbol measured in the secondary second variation time storage area 223j is interrupted (temporarily stopped).

With such a configuration, the variation time of the second special symbol can be accurately managed, and even when the variation display is restarted, the variation display can be accurately performed with the remaining variation time.

It is determined whether the subordinate first fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to ON (S1709). If it is determined that the subordinate first variation restart flag 223g is set to ON (S1709: Yes), the subordinate first variation restart flag 223g is set to OFF (S1710).

It is determined whether the measured variation time of the first special symbol stored in the subordinate first variation time storage area 223i is 3 s or less (S1711). When it is determined that the measured remaining variation time of the first special symbol stored in the subordinate first variation time storage area 223i is 3 s or less (S1711: Yes), the first short variation mode for display. A restart command is set (S1712). When the display first short variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display first short variation mode restart command causes the display control device 114 to display the text "Display the temporarily displayed lottery result of the variation display!" in the left display area Dm1 for the remaining variation time. After that, based on the confirmation command output from the main controller 110, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the lottery result. In addition, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the character display changes to the character "I have displayed the lottery result of the variable display that was temporarily stopped!", and continues to be displayed until the next fluctuation starts. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured variation time of the first special symbol stored in the sub-first variation time storage area 223i is longer than 3s (S1711: No), the display first normal variation mode restarts. The command is set (S1713). When this display first normal variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display first normal variation mode resuming command displays the character "temporarily changing the variation display which is changing!" in the left side display area Dm1 for the remaining variation time, and all of the first special symbols. The main symbols (three symbols on the left middle right) are variably displayed for the remaining fluctuation time, and then, based on the confirmation command output from the main controller 110, the first special symbol is a symbol showing the lottery result. Display the stop. Next, the measurement of the fluctuation time in the sub first fluctuation time storage area 223i is restarted (S1714).

With this configuration, the main control unit 110 does not have to perform a process for giving an instruction about the remaining variation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the remaining variation time, and the voice lamp control is performed. Since the device 113 determines the remaining fluctuation time and selects the remaining fluctuation mode, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, the player may overlook it or may be too short to understand the notification result. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, if the remaining time is within the reference time (3 s in the present embodiment), the player is informed immediately that the lottery result will be displayed, and then the notification result is displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the interrupted (temporarily stopped) notification result is displayed.

Furthermore, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character is displayed to inform that the variable display that has been suspended is stopped and displayed, so when the remaining variable time is extremely short (for example, within 1 second) Moreover, the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

Further, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3 s in the present embodiment), the player is notified that the notification result that has been interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being variable displayed, so the game The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the subordinate first variation restart flag 223g is off (S1709: No), it is determined whether the subordinate second variation restart flag 223h is set to on (S1715). When it is determined that the second subordinate fluctuation restart flag 223h is set to ON (S1715: Yes), the second subordinate fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to OFF (S1716).

It is determined whether the measured remaining variation time of the second special symbol stored in the sub second variation time storage area 223j is 3 s or less (S1717). When it is determined that the measured remaining variation time of the second special symbol stored in the secondary second variation time storage area 223j is 3 s or less (S1717: Yes), the second short variation mode for display. A restart command is set (S1718). When this display second short variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display second short variation mode restart command causes the display control device 114 to display the text "Display the temporarily displayed variation display lottery result!" in the right side display area Dm2 for the remaining variation time. After that, based on the confirmation command output from the main controller 110, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the lottery result. In addition, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the character display changes to the character "I have displayed the lottery result of the variable display that was temporarily stopped!", and continues to be displayed until the next fluctuation starts. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured variation time of the second special symbol stored in the sub second variation time storage area 223j is longer than 3s (S1717: No), the display second normal variation mode restarts. The command is set (S1719). When the display second normal variation mode restart command is set, it is output to the display control device 114. This display second normal variation mode resuming command displays the characters "temporarily stopped variation display is changing!" in the right side display area Dm2 during the remaining change time, and all of the second special symbols are displayed. After the main symbol (three symbols in the left middle right) is variably displayed for the remaining fluctuation time, based on the confirmation command output from the main control device 110, the second special symbol is shown in the symbol indicating the lottery result. Display the stop. Next, the measurement of the fluctuation time in the sub second fluctuation time storage area 223j is restarted (S1720). On the other hand, if it is determined that the second subordinate fluctuation restart flag 223h is off (S1715: No), this process ends.

With this configuration, the main control unit 110 does not have to perform a process for giving an instruction about the remaining variation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the remaining variation time, and the voice lamp control is performed. Since the device 113 determines the remaining fluctuation time and selects the remaining fluctuation mode, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, when the remaining fluctuation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted fluctuation mode is displayed, the player may overlook it or may be too short to understand the notification result. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, if the remaining time is within the reference time (3 s in the present embodiment), the player is informed immediately that the lottery result will be displayed, and then the notification result is displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the interrupted (temporarily stopped) notification result is displayed.

Furthermore, even after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a character is displayed to inform that the variable display that has been suspended is stopped and displayed, so when the remaining variable time is extremely short (for example, within 1 second) Moreover, the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

Further, even when the remaining fluctuation time is longer than the reference time (3 s in the present embodiment), the player is notified that the notification result that has been interrupted (temporarily stopped) is being variable displayed, so the game The person can easily recognize that the suspended variable display was effective without disappearing.

Further, in the present embodiment, when resuming the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been interrupted, the fact is informed to the player by characters, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the voice is not limited thereto. Alternatively, it may be configured to notify by a lamp or the like. In addition, like the display mode in which the player knows that the change has been resumed (for example, it is displayed as an animation notifying that the variable display in which the character etc. has been interrupted is displayed) Of course, the notification may be made in a display mode only for restarting the display. By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the suspended variable display is restarted.

In the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to select the variation pattern according to the remaining variation time. Not limited to this, when the main control device 110 restarts the temporary stoppage of the fluctuation timetable, the fluctuation pattern of the same fluctuation time or the fluctuation time slightly shorter than the remaining fluctuation time is used depending on the remaining fluctuation time. The variation pattern may be selected. When a variation pattern with a slightly shorter variation time is selected, the voice lamp control device 113 controls by delaying the difference between the remaining variation time and the variation pattern with a slightly shorter variation time to display the variation. , It is possible to perform a variation table time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol according to the remaining variation time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the pending rearrangement process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this reservation rearrangement processing processing (S1413). The hold rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the hold rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413) is a hold symbol displayed in the hold establishment order on the third symbol display device 81 when the player operates the frame button 22 during the valid period. The process of setting the display to be rearranged in the variable display start order is executed.

In the pending rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413), first, it is determined whether the rearrangement is possible (S1801). The sortable period is a row of gaming states other than during a jackpot game or a state where there is no hold established by different starting ports 63a and 63b (a state where there is no more than one hold for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). It is set in the exchangeable period.

When it is determined that the rearrangement is possible (S1801: Yes), a display button operation display command is generated (S1802). Upon receiving this display button operation display command, the display control device 114 displays the characters "may be rearranged!!" on the third symbol display device 81, and allows the player to operate the frame button 22. Is notified for a certain period. The notification mode is not limited to this, and may be performed by voice or the like, or may be configured to control to turn on a dedicated lamp or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the rearrangement period is provided, the player can easily recognize the timing when the rearrangement operation becomes possible, and the frame switch 22 can be operated at an appropriate timing. it can. Further, the rearrangement period is not particularly provided, and if the rearrangement is possible when the frame button 22 is operated, the rearrangement display may be executed.

It is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated (S1803). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (S1803: Yes), the sorting flags 223k7 of all the holding areas in which the holding data of the subordinate sorting holding storage area 223k is stored are set to ON. (S1804).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the rearrangeable period (S1801: No), and when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not operated (S1803: No), the process ends.

With such a configuration, when the player wants to sort, it is possible to sort only the reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The player can know the actual variable display start order, and can know in advance the special symbol to be noticed next (the special symbol that will be the variable display start). Therefore, a game can be played while assuming a display area to be viewed in advance, and the game can be played smoothly.

In addition, in the configuration of the pachinko machine, the distribution device 630, the first starting opening 63a and the second starting opening 64a is alternately configured because it is easy to win the game ball, the first special symbol and the second special symbol The game can be played evenly and efficiently.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the arrangement of the holding symbols is executed based on the player operating the frame button 22, but the arrangement is not limited to this, and is executed every time a new holding is stored. Of course, it may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the player can always accurately recognize the variable display start order by the reserved symbols rearranged in the variable start order.

In the present embodiment, the rearrangeable period is other than during a jackpot game or in a state where there is no hold established by different starting ports 63a and 63b (a state in which there is no one or more hold for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set as a rearrangeable period even during a jackpot game. Conversely, the rearrangeable period is a period in which a specific variable display mode is displayed. It may be set to other than the above, and may be appropriately determined.

When the jackpot game is set to the rearrangeable period, it is necessary to perform the rearrangement in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display temporarily stopped during the fluctuation display. Specifically, the variation start time is calculated based on the determined variation time (variation display mode) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is being held and the remaining variation time during the temporary stop. Then, the rearrangement order is determined, and the rearrangement is performed based on the rearrangement order. With this configuration, even when a new hold display mode is displayed during the jackpot game, the hold display mode and the display mode already displayed before the hold display mode are displayed together. By rearranging in an accurate variation start order, it is possible to notify the player of the accurate variation start order even during a jackpot gaming machine.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rearrangement hold storage area 203u of the main control device 110 and the subordinate rearrangement hold storage area 223k of the voice lamp control device 113 are configured to store data that is rearranged. Not limited to this, the main control device 110 is configured to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of various data necessary for rearrangement (winning judgment result, jackpot type, variation pattern type, etc.) by a winning command. The voice lamp control device 113 alone may be configured to perform rearrangement.

With this configuration, the main control device 110 backs up various data necessary for rearrangement in the RAM 203 even when a power failure occurs, and when the power is restored, the various types of data are restored in the startup process (FIG. 32). By outputting the data to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 rearranges the data based on the various data, so that it is possible to easily recover from the power failure.

In the present embodiment, by the remaining variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol during the start of variation and the variation pattern type of the data stored in the rearrangement storage area 203u, the first special symbol or the first reserved symbol The fluctuation start time of 2 special symbols was calculated, and the fluctuation start order was calculated. Not limited to this, at the time of winning a game ball, by determining whether or not the variation mode is a reach, it is determined whether or not the variation mode is longer than a certain time (time information), and the time information and the variation The variation start order may be roughly determined and rearranged from the remaining variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. With such a configuration, at the time of winning, it is determined whether or not the variation mode is a reach (whether the long-time variation mode or the short-time variation mode), and the accurate variation time (variation mode) is determined. Even with the pachinko machine 10 that is determined by information such as the number of reserved balls at the start of fluctuation, the player can be notified of the rough fluctuation start order.

Therefore, the player may not be in the exact change start order, but the fact that the rearrangement has been performed is included in the long-term change mode (reach change mode) being held. , You can play games with the expectation of a big hit.

In the present embodiment, the rearrangeable period is determined by the game state, but is not limited thereto, it is determined whether the rearrangement is possible (for example, the state where the pending symbol display is displayed), It may be configured to notify that rearrangement is possible. With such a configuration, it is possible to flexibly set the period during which sorting is possible, and it is possible to give the player more opportunities to sort.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 68. In the above-described first embodiment, the configuration has been described in which the type of the fluctuation pattern table 202d for acquiring the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is switched depending on the game state.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment, a special symbol is variably displayed a predetermined number of times as the type of the variation pattern table 202d when a small hit different from the big hit is won. Up to the above, the configuration is different from the first embodiment in that the configuration is switched to a specific variation pattern table.

Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
In the electrical configuration of the second embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed from those of the electrical configuration of the first embodiment. Specifically, a small hit random number table 202e (see FIG. 63(a)) and a small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63(b)) are added, and the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d are changed. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit random number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hitting random number table 202e. In the present embodiment, when making a big hit determination for the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the big hit determination value that have been acquired match, and if they do not match, the small hit random number table 202e. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value set in (see FIG. 63(a)).

In the small hit random number table 202e, as shown in FIG. 63(a), the number of small hit determination values is differently assigned for each of the normal game state and the probability variation game state. In the normal game state, the judgment value is not set. As a result, in the normal gaming state, the small hit determination value is not set, and the small hit is not won (determined) in the normal gaming state. Further, in the probability variation gaming state, the value of "100 to 129" is set as the determination value of the small hit with respect to the value of the special hit random number counter C1. That is, in the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 being acquired is any of "100 to 129", it is determined to be a small hit. The determination value for the small hit is set to a value different from the determination value (“0 to 9” in the present embodiment) determined to be the big hit. Therefore, when it is determined that it is out (not a big hit), it is determined whether it is a small hit, and it is possible to add a difference in added value even in the out.

As will be described later, when it is determined that a small hit, a small win of 2R (round) in which the first variable winning device 65 opens for a short time (1 second) is executed. The small hit is configured so that the number of game balls (prize balls) that the player can obtain is smaller than that of the big hit (big hits A to C) (because the number of rounds is small and the opening time is short). In addition, the game state is not changed even after the small hit game. On the other hand, after the small hit game, since the variation pattern selection table 202d that is relatively easy to select a relatively long variation time is easily set, the long variation time of the first special symbol is easily selected.

Here, in the probability variation gaming state, the lottery of the first special symbol is disadvantageous for the player as compared to the lottery of the second special symbol (the jackpot B is determined and the continuation of the probability variation gaming state ends). Since it is set, the player expects to reduce the number of times of lottery (the number of times of variation) in the first special symbol as much as possible. Therefore, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, by winning the small hit, by facilitating the selection of a long variation time of the first special symbol thereafter, it is possible to give an advantageous state to the player. it can. Therefore, the player can feel an advantage even with a small hit with few prize balls. As a result, small hits can be expected in addition to the big hits, and it is possible to suppress the problem of getting tired of the game early.

Next, the small hit selection table 202f stored in the RAM 202 of the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63(b). FIG. 63(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit selection table 202f. The small hit selection table 202f is a data table for determining the type of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d to be transferred based on the value of an acquired transfer counter (not shown) described later when the small hit is won.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the small hit is configured to be determined only in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability variation gaming state. When this small hit is won, the type of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d for selecting the fluctuation pattern selected when the win/no judgment result is out of order is deviated (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is selected. If it is in a state (hereinafter referred to as normal table selection), one of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 transition tables 1 to 3 (see FIGS. 64(a) to 64(c)) becomes the value of the transition counter. It is decided based on.

In the small hit selection table 202d, when the normal table is selected, the transition counter deviates (probability change) variation table 1 from “0 to 100”, and the deviation counter deviates (probability variation) variation table 2 from “101 to 150”. However, the deviation (probability change) variation transition table 3 is set for each of "151 to 198". Further, the number of transitions is set in each of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition tables 1 to 3. The number of transitions is the number of variations of the first special symbol until the table is set and automatically switched to the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63(c)). ..

For example, in the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition table 1 (see FIG. 64(a)), as shown in the small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63(b)), the number of transitions is set to 10 times. As a result, if the result of the judgment is out of the range from the time that the first special symbol is changed 10 times after the table is set, this deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 (Fig. 64(a ) See)), the variation pattern is selected. If the first special symbol fluctuates 10 times, the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63(c)) is set, and if the result of judgment is wrong, this deviation (probability change) special figure A variation pattern is selected from the 1 normal variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63(c)).

As will be described later in detail, in the outlier (probable change) special figure 1 variation transition tables 1 to 3, a variation pattern having a longer variation time than the outlying (probable variation) normal variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63(c)) is generated. It is configured to be easily selected. Here, in the present embodiment, it is advantageous for the player to be drawn more in the second special symbol than in the first special symbol, that is, to reduce the number of times the first special symbol is drawn. Therefore, the number of times of lottery in the first special symbol, which is set to have a long variation time of the first special symbol, can be reduced per unit time, which can be in an advantageous state for the player. Therefore, by setting the deviation (probability change) variation transition tables 1 to 3 that are won for the small hit, it is possible to give the player a state advantageous to the player. In addition, as the number of transitions is larger, the number of times a variation pattern having a longer variation time is selected can be increased, so that the number of variations of the first special symbol can be further reduced, and a state advantageous to the player is set. can do.

If any of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3 is selected and the small hit is won, as shown in the small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63(b)), the transition counter is displayed. If the value of is any of “0 to 10”, the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition table 4 is set. In the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition table 4, 100 is set as the number of transitions. Further, as will be described later, in the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4 (see FIG. 65), a fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time is easily selected than in the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3. It is configured. Therefore, setting the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 variation transition table 4 can be more advantageous for the player than setting the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition table 1 to 3. ..

Further, the number of shifts of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 variation transition table 4 is 100 times, and this deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition table 4 is set over a long period of time. Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is drawn by the second special symbol, since the jackpot C is always determined, the probability variation game state is continuously set even after the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to be done. If the probability variation gaming state is continuously set, the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition table 4 continues to be set until the first special symbol is variably displayed up to the number of times set by the number of transitions, so the game An advantageous state for the person can be continuously set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63(c), a deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern table 202d which is one of the fluctuation pattern selection tables 202d in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 63C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern table 202d. The deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal variation pattern table 202d is a probability variation gaming state in the game state, and the winning/disapproval determination result is deviation, and one of the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition tables 1 to 4 is set. If not, it is a table in which the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected.

In this deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63(c)), a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds and a normal reach composed of a fluctuation time of 60 seconds are used. And the variation pattern of the super reach, which has a variation time of 90 seconds, are set.

Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each variation pattern and set, and the type of one variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired at the start of variation. ..

The outlying (probable variation) special figure 1 normal variation pattern selection table 202d is configured to determine an outlying variation pattern with a probability of 101/199. The variation time of the out-of-range variation pattern selected in the probability variation game state is 30 seconds, and the variation time of the out-of-range variation pattern determined in the normal game state is 5 seconds (FIG. 11(a)). The fluctuation time is longer than that of the reference). Therefore, in the probability variation gaming state, the variation pattern having a longer variation time than the normal gaming state is configured to be easily selected in the first special symbol, and is set to be advantageous to the player. Further, the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, which are set to have a lower probability of being selected than the outlying variation patterns but have a longer variation time, are set. As a result, a variation pattern of a longer variation time is determined, so that a state advantageous to the player can be given (in the present embodiment, the probability variation game state is given to the player for a long period).

Next, with reference to FIG. 64(a), the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 variation transition table 1 will be described. FIG. 64A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 change transition table 1. This deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 is set to the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 63(c)) in the probability variation game state, and the small hit is won. In this case, the table is selected if the value of the transition counter (not shown) is one of the values "0-100". This deviation (probability change) special figure 1 transition table 1 has been set the number of times of transfer 10 times, until the first special symbol fluctuates 10 times, or until the change of the game state is executed continuously set Is configured to be.

As shown in FIG. 64( a ), the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 shows the deviation pattern of the deviation of the throat composed of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds and the normal reach composed of the fluctuation time of 60 seconds. A variation pattern, a variation pattern of super reach composed of a variation time of 90 seconds, a variation pattern of long reach 1 constituted of a variation time of 180 seconds, and a variation pattern of long reach 2 constituted of a variation time of 600 seconds. The fluctuation patterns and are set respectively.

In this deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 1 (see FIG. 64(a)), a long that was not set in the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 63(c)) The variation patterns of reach 1 and long reach 2 are set. The long reach 1 and the long reach 2 are set to have a long variation time of 180 seconds and 600 seconds. Therefore, during this variation time, a new variation is not started in the first special symbol, so the probability variation gaming state will be continued by being drawn by the second special symbol in that period. That is, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation game state, the variation time of the deviation of the first special symbol can be considered as a period in which the continuation of the probability variation game is confirmed.

Here, in the probability variation gaming state, the variation time of the second special symbol is, as described in the first embodiment, if the result of the hit determination is incorrect, the deviation (probability variation) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d (Fig. 13(b)), the variation pattern is selected from the hit (probable variation) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 13(c)) if the result of the win/loss determination is a big hit. In the outlier (probable change) special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 13B), the outlying variation pattern configured with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected with a probability of 151/199. It is configured so that a variation pattern that is out of the ordinary can be extremely easily selected. Further, even the variation pattern of the super reach, which has the longest variation time, has a variation time of 20 seconds, and the selection probability is 8/199, which is hard to be selected as compared with other variation patterns. Therefore, in the probability variation gaming state, if the result of the determination whether or not the second special symbol is off, the variation pattern of the short variation time is easy to be selected, and therefore more lottery is selected until the first special symbol varies once. It can be executed with 2 special symbols.

Furthermore, in the hold of the first special symbol, the big hit B is stored as a hold, and the period until the lottery result is displayed (actually, the period until the variation display is started) has a high probability. It can be replaced as a period in which a winning/winning lottery of the second special symbol is executed in a state (a period during which the actual probability variation gaming state continues).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, an effect as if the probability variation game state is set for a finite time is performed as shown in FIG. This effect determines the variation time (time until the variation that becomes the jackpot B of the first special symbol is started) in which the hit determination result of the first special symbol executed in the probability variation gaming state is out, and the time is determined. It is performed as an effect of notifying the player as the remaining time of the probability change within the range. By this effect, the player can play the game with the expectation that as many big hits as possible with the second special symbol will be executed while the probability variation game state remains, and that as many big hit games as possible will be executed.

Further, the content of the newly stored first special symbol storage is determined, the remaining period of the probability variation gaming state is determined, and the remaining period of the probability variation gaming state is extended within the range (FIG. 5 ( By executing b)), the player can be given a sense of relief. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the remaining period of the probability variation gaming state will be extended. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation other than the jackpot, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the present embodiment, in the probability variation game state, the symbol indicating the first special symbol is a symbol row consisting of two types of "○" and "x" in the second display area Dn of the third symbol display device 81. Displayed in parallel in two columns. Even if it is a variation pattern that is out of reach, even if it is a variation pattern that reaches, a display mode is displayed in which "○" and "x" are repeatedly displayed at high speed and alternately, and the success/failure determination result is shown when the variation time elapses (big hit). If there is, "○" is aligned, and if they are out of alignment, "X" is aligned, or a combination of "○" and "x" is displayed.

Therefore, the player, when in the probability variation game state, will mainly play the game by paying attention to the symbol indicating the second special symbol displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first special symbol from being bored even if the first special symbol is variably displayed for a long time. In addition, even if the player does not know that the longer the deviation change time of the first special symbol is, the more advantageous it is for the player. It can be carried out.

In the present embodiment, the symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn, and the symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The symbols corresponding to the first special symbol may be displayed in the first display area Dm, and the symbols corresponding to the second special symbol may be displayed in the second display area Dn.

Furthermore, the symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn, and the symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is also an inconspicuous symbol like the second display area Dn and is displayed in a small display area. Alternatively, instead of displaying on the third symbol display device 81, an LED display may be used. With this configuration, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the effect display of the probability variation period rather than the variable display of the special symbol, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the game play in a complicated manner. In the case of displaying with an LED display or the like, for example, a plurality of petals may be respectively lit with LEDs, and the winning/decision determination may be notified by a combination of the lighting. With this configuration, it can be difficult to understand that the LED corresponds to the second special symbol, and the player can concentrate on the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 64(b) to 64(c) and FIG. 65, the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 2 to 4 will be described. FIG. 64B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 2. In the outlier (probability change) special figure 1 variation transition table 2, the probability of selection of the outlier is lower than that in the above-mentioned outlier (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition table 1, while the super reach and long reach 1 are selected. , Long reach 2 is selected at a higher probability. Further, the number of transitions is also set to 20 times, which is set to double (see FIG. 63(b)). That is, the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 variation transition table 2 (see FIG. 64(a)) has a longer fluctuation time than the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 variation transition table 2 (see FIG. 64(b)). Since the variation pattern thus selected is easily selected, the probability variation game state is likely to be continued for a long time, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to change the size of the value that is advantageous to the player by the table selected from the small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63(b)), and predict which table has been selected by the player. You can expect that a better table will be selected.

FIG. 64C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 3. The outlier (probability change) special figure 1 variation transition table 3 is set to have a lower probability that the normal reach is selected than the outlier (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition table 2 (see FIG. 64(c)). On the other hand, the super-reach, long-reach 1, and long-reach 2 are set to have a high probability of being selected. Further, the number of shifts is set to 30 times, which is larger than that of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 change shift table 2. That is, the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 3 is configured so that the probability variation period can be set longer than the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 2, and is set as a table advantageous to the player. There is.

FIG. 65 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 change transition table 4. Compared with the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 3, the probability of selecting a deviation pattern of normal deviation or normal reach is set to be low in the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4. The probability of selection of reach and long reach 2 is set high, and instead of long reach 1, the variation pattern of long reach 3 composed of 1200 seconds, which has a longer variation time than long reach 2, deviates (probably changes) It is set to be selected with a higher probability than the long reach 2 of the 1-variation shift table 3. Further, the number of transitions is set to 100, which is larger than the number of deviation (probability change) special figure 1 transition transition table 3.

Therefore, the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 variation transition table 4 is configured so that the variation pattern having the longest variation time is easily selected from the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 variation transition tables 1 to 3. , The probability variation gaming state is configured to be most easily continued for the longest time. Therefore, it is constructed as the most advantageous table for the player.

In addition, this deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition table 4 wins the small hit when any of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3 is determined, and further shift counter Is configured to be selected only with a probability of 0 to 10, that is, with a probability of 11/199. Therefore, since it is not determined that the frequency is low for the player, it is possible to suppress the problem that the damage on the game store side becomes excessively large. Further, in the state where the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 fluctuation transition tables 1 to 3 are set, the player has high expectation for the small hit, and can expect the player to obtain a result of winning/deciding other than the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Main Controller 110 in Second Embodiment>
Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment is different from the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the first embodiment by a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20). ) The special symbol variation start process (FIG. 22, S107) of the one special symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S107) which is one process is the first special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 66, S230). The difference is that it has been changed to. The other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and therefore the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

With reference to FIG. 66, the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S230) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation start process 2 (S230).

In the first special symbol fluctuation start process 2 (FIG. 66, S230), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding counter 203e is acquired (S311). It is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S312). If the value (N1) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203e is greater than 0 (S312: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding sphere counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S313). .. It is determined whether or not the value of the transition number counter (not shown) is greater than 0.

Here, when any of the deviation (probability change) special figure 1 variation transition tables 1 to 4 is set, the transition number counter indicates the number of transitions set in each table (see FIG. 63(b)). This is a counter for counting the number of transitions by being set and subtracted by one each time the first special symbol is variably displayed. It should be noted that this transition number counter is set to an initial value of 0 in the initialized state. In addition, when the power is cut off or the like, the count value is backed up and held for a certain period (for example, one week).

If it is determined that the value of the transition number counter is greater than 0, that is, if the transition number is set (S314: Yes), the value of the transition number counter is decremented by 1 and updated (S315). .. It is determined whether the updated value of the transition number counter is 0 (S316). When it is determined that the value of the transition number counter is 0 (S316: Yes), the deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (normal table) is set (S317). Then, the process of S318 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S316 that the value of the transition number counter is larger than 0 (S316: No), the process of S318 is executed.

In this way, when the value of the transition number counter becomes 0, the normal table is set, so that it is possible to switch and set to the type of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d determined by the number of transitions. In addition, since the number of transitions is set differently depending on the set table, the player can enjoy different variation pattern effects up to different number of variations.

In the process of S318, the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S318). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of holding area 1→execution area, holding area 2→holding area 1, holding area 3→holding area 2, holding area 4→holding area 3.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 is executed (S319). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (FIG. 67, S319) will be described in detail later, but is set based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. Based on the game state, the jackpot determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is executed.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S306). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, S306) is the same process as the process already described in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S319) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S319).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S319), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is acquired (S421). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state (probability variation in progress) (S422). Whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state is determined by whether or not a probability variation flag (not shown) is set to ON. If the probability variation flag is on (that is, the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state (during probability variation)) (S422: Yes), based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability, special winning It is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 matches the jackpot random number value, and the lottery result is acquired (S423). On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is off (that is, the game state is a low probability game state (not in probability variation)) (S422: No), the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability time (Fig. 10(b)), it is determined whether the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches the big hit random value, and the lottery result is acquired (S424).

It is determined whether the big hit flag 203o is on (S425). Here, when the big hit flag 203o is set to ON, it indicates that it is a case where the change to be a big hit is started in the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203o is commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that the variation that is a big jackpot is not executed at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. I am configuring. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that the jackpots are continuously generated in a short time and the loss on the amusement store side becomes excessively large.

In the process of S425, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203o is off (S425: Yes), the big hit flag 203o is set to on for the first special symbol (S427). The lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S428). Based on the acquired value of the hit type counter, the big hit symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S429).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S425 that the big hit flag 203o is on (S425: No), the process of S430 is executed. Further, in the processing of S426, when it is determined that the hit/miss determination result in the processing of S423 and S424 is out (S426: No), the processing of S430 is executed.

In the process of S430, it is determined whether or not the hit/no hit determination result is a small hit (S430). When it is determined that the hit/no hit determination result is a small hit (S430: Yes), a small hit process is executed (S431). The details of this small hitting process (S431) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68, but the value of a migration counter (not shown) is acquired, and the migration destination table is determined based on that value. The process is executed.

After the processing of S431 is executed, it is set to display the symbol indicating the small hit of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 (S432). Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the process of S430, the hit/no hit determination result is not a small hit, that is, when it is determined that it is out (S430: No), a symbol indicating the removal of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37. The display is set (S433). Then, this process is completed.

In this way, even if the hit/no hit determination results of S423 and S424 are hits, if the jackpot flag 203o has already been set to ON, the jackpot is not decided by the processing of S425 but is forcibly decided as a miss. To be done. This prevents the first special symbol and the second special symbol from being changed to a big hit at the same time, and can prevent the big hit from continuing in a short time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be a big jackpot at the same time, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously a jackpot. The variation may be configured to be performed. In such a configuration, in the probability variation gaming state, by configuring the variation time that the hit determination result of the first special symbol is long, the period of the actual probability variation gaming state can be set long.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a small hit process (S431) which is one process in the first special symbol big hit determination process (FIG. 67, S319) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hitting process (S431).

In the small hitting process (FIG. 68, S431), first, the value of the transition counter is acquired (S441). Here, the transition counter (not shown) is set in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and is incremented by 1 and updated every time the main process (FIG. 41, S1250) is executed. The transition counter is a counter value that is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 198", and is set to "0" which is the initial value in the initialized state.

When the processing of S441 is executed, based on the value of the migration counter, the migration destination table is the migration counter from the small hit selection table 202f (see FIG. 63(b)), the migration counter, whether or not the first special symbol currently selected A selection is made based on the type of the variation pattern selection table 202d that is referred to when the determination result is out (S442). By S442, a migration command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the type of the selected migration destination table is set (S443). Then, this process is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a small win is won, a lottery is performed to switch the type of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the case where the result of the determination whether or not the first special symbol is won is out. When the change of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is determined, the change pattern selection table 202d is set for the number of transitions set. After that, when the set number of transitions is executed, a predetermined variation pattern selection table 202d (in the present embodiment, a deviation (probability variation) special figure 1 normal variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 63(c))) Can be switched to.

As a result, when the player wins the small hit, the player can expect not only the prize balls obtained by the small hit game but also the switching of the variation pattern selection table 202d. Further, since the magnitude of the obtained value is different depending on the type of the changed variation pattern selection table 202d, it is possible to be interested in the type and improve the interest of the game.

When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203o is off, that is, when it is determined that the variation of the jackpot in the second special symbol has not started (S425: No), it is executed in the process of S403 or S404. It is determined whether the lottery result is a big hit (S406). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S406: Yes), the big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S407). After that, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S408), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the jackpot type (S409). Then, this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S405, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203o is on (S405: Yes), or if the lottery result is determined to be out of the process of S406 (S406: No), the The symbol indicating the deviation of the first special symbol is set in the 1 special symbol display device 37 (S410).

In this way, even if the lottery result based on the value of the special symbol jackpot random number C1 actually obtained is a jackpot, the jackpot flag 203o is already set to ON, that is, by the second special symbol, When the variation that becomes a big hit has been started, the setting of the disengagement is forcedly executed with the first special symbol. As a result, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation that is a big hit is not executed at the same time, and in the short period, the variation that becomes a big hit is started continuously, and the game store side It is possible to suppress the problem of excessive damage.

All or a part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

<Characteristic A group> (It is difficult to win special figure 1 with electric support)
A first entrance through which a game ball can enter, and a second entrance different from the first entrance,
A first state in which the game ball is guided so that the game ball easily enters the second ball inlet, and a state in which the game ball is less likely to enter the second ball inlet than the first state There is a movable piece that can be moved to two states, and the movable piece is moved to the first state, so that the flow path through which the game ball can enter the first ball inlet is the second state. The gaming machine A1 is configured so as to be narrower than the case.

According to the gaming machine A1, a first ball entrance into which a game ball can enter and a second ball entrance are provided. Due to the movable change, a first state in which the game ball is guided so that the game ball can easily enter the second entrance, and a state in which the game ball is less likely to enter the second entrance than the first state To the second state. By moving the movable piece to the first state, the flow path into which the game ball can enter the first ball inlet is narrower than that in the second state. As a result, it becomes difficult to enter one of the entrances, so that the interest of the game can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired early.

In the gaming machine A1, a first flow path in which a game ball easily enters the first ball inlet, and a second flow path in which a game ball easily enters the second ball inlet than the first channel. By having the movable piece move to the first state, the game ball easily flows down the second flow path, and the first flow path has a game state more than that in the second state. A gaming machine A2, which regulates the amount of flow of the ball.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a first flow path through which the game ball easily enters the first ball inlet and a second flow path through which the game ball easily enters the second ball inlet than the first channel are provided. There is. By moving the movable variable to the first state, it is easy for the game ball to flow down the second flow path, and the flow down amount of the game ball flowing down the first flow path is regulated as compared with the case where the game ball is in the second state. .. Thereby, there is an effect that the amount of balls entering the first ball entrance can be efficiently reduced.

In the gaming machine A1 or the gaming machine A2, whether or not the first lottery game is successful is judged based on the game ball entering the first ball entrance, and the game ball enters the second ball entrance. On the basis of the fact that the win/loss judgment means for executing the win/no judgment of the second lottery game and the hit/damage determination means determine that the hit is successful, the player is more advantageous than the normal game state and the normal game state. It has a game state determining means for determining either one of the special game state and the game state setting means for setting the normal game state or the special game state determined by the game state determining means. A game machine A3.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the game ball entering the first ball entrance by the win/fail judgment means, the win/no judgment of the first lottery game is executed, and based on the game ball entering the second ball entrance. Then, the win/no determination of the second lottery game is executed. Based on the hit determination means, the game state determination means determines either the normal game state or the special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The normal game state or the special game state determined by the game state determining means is set by the game state setting means. As a result, a game can be played in the expectation that the special game state will be set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine A3, the game state setting means sets, as the special game state, a higher probability that the hit/miss determination means determines that the hit is higher than that in the normal game state. Machine A4.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3, the special game state is set to have a higher probability that the state setting means will determine the hit by the hit/miss determination means than in the normal game state. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the game state determining means determines whether the normal game state or the special game state is based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance. Either one is determined, and the first entrance and the second entrance are determined so that the ratios for determining the normal game state and the special game state are different. Characteristic game machine A5.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3 or A4, the gaming state determining means causes the gaming ball to enter the first entrance or the second entrance. And the special game state are determined, and the first entrance and the second entrance are determined so that the ratios for determining the normal game state and the special game state are different. There is an effect that it can be expected that the lottery will be executed at the ball entrance.

In the gaming machine A5, the game state determination means determines the normal game state when the game ball enters the first entrance, rather than when the game ball enters the second entrance. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being easy to play.

According to the gaming machine A6, when the game ball enters the first entrance, it is easier for the game state determining means to determine the normal game state than when the game ball enters the second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can continuously play the special game state.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6 has a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance. Then
The gaming machine A7, wherein the privilege granting means grants privilege of different sizes to the first entrance and the second entrance.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines A1 to A6, the following effect is obtained. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance, the benefit giving means gives a benefit to the player. Benefits of different sizes are provided by the privilege granting means at the first entrance and the second entrance. As a result, there is an effect that more benefits can be given to the player.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, a movable determining unit that determines whether to move the movable piece from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and the special game state are When set, the gaming machine A8 has a movability setting means for easily setting the movability determining means to move the movable piece from the second state to the first state. ..

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the satisfaction of the lottery conditions, the movement determining means determines whether or not the movable piece is moved from the second state to the first state. When the special game state is set, the movement rate setting means makes it easy to set the movement determining means to move the movable piece from the second state to the second state. Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be easily changed.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A8, based on a first operation by the player, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, an adjusting means for adjusting a launching force of the launching means based on an operation by the player. A first flow-down area in which a game ball shot with a firing force adjusted by the adjusting means flows down, and a game ball shot with a firing force adjusted by the adjusting means based on a second operation of the player flows down. And a game area in which a second flow-down area different from the first flow-down area is formed, and the game ball flowing down in the first flow-down area is configured to be able to enter only into the first inlet port. The gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow-down area is configured to be able to enter the first entrance and the second entrance, respectively.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effect is produced. That is, the game ball is launched by the launching means. The firing force of the launching means is adjusted by the adjusting means based on the operation of the player. A first flow-down area in which a game ball fired with a firing force that has been fired with a firing force adjusted by the adjusting means based on a first operation by the player flows down, and an adjusting means based on a second operation by the player The second flow-down area in which the game balls fired with the firing force adjusted by is flowed down is formed in the game area. The game ball flowing down the first flow-down area is configured to be able to enter the first entrance, and the game ball flowing down the second flow-down area enters the first entrance and the second entrance, respectively. Configured to be possible. This can provide the player with the joy of operating. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine A9, as the first inlet, a common first inlet that is arranged at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first downflow region or the second downflow region can enter, and the second downflow A gaming machine A10, in which at least a one-sided first ball entrance into which only game balls flowing down the area can enter is arranged.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A9, a common first position where a gaming ball that has flowed down the first downflow area or the second downflow area is placed as a first entrance hole is provided. Since at least the ball entrance and the one-side first ball entrance into which the game ball that has flowed down the second flow-down area can enter are arranged, it is possible to effectively change the interest depending on the game state.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the first entrance is arranged below the second entrance, and the movable piece is moved to the first state to thereby move the movable piece. The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the passage of the game ball through the passage into which the ball can enter the first ball inlet is restricted by one piece as compared with the second state.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines A1 to A10, the following effect is obtained. That is, the first ball entrance is arranged below the second ball entrance. By moving the movable piece to the first state, the passage of the game ball to the flow path that can enter the first ball entrance by the movable piece is restricted more than in the second state. Thereby, there is an effect that the inflow amount of the game ball can be easily changed.

In any of the gaming machines A3 to A11, based on that the special game state is set by the game state setting means, the movable piece is set to be easily moved to the second state rather than the normal game state. A gaming machine A12 having a setting means.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A3 to A11, the movable piece is set by the movable setting means more than the normal gaming state based on the fact that the special game state is set by the game state setting means. Since it is set to be easily movable to the second state, it is possible to set a period that is advantageous to the player and suppress an inconvenience that the player gets tired.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, the game ball has a passage opening through which the game ball can pass, and the game ball has a passage gate that satisfies a lottery condition by passing through the passage opening. In the case of the two states, a common flow path that is a flow path through which the game ball can enter is formed in the passage gate or the first entrance port, and by being moved to the first state, It is regulated by the movable piece that a game ball enters the first ball inlet, and a single channel that is a channel through which the game ball enters is formed in the passage gate. Playing machine A13.

According to the game machine A13, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines A1 to A12, the following effect is obtained. That is, the game ball has a passage opening through which the game ball can pass, and a passage gate is provided in which the lottery conditions are satisfied by the game ball passing through the passage opening. When the movable piece is in the second state, a common flow path that is a flow path through which the game ball can enter the passage gate or the first entrance is formed. When the movable piece is moved to the first state, the movable piece is regulated from entering the game ball into the first ball inlet, and the single passage, which is the passage through which the game ball enters the passage gate, is formed. It is formed. Thereby, there is an effect that the player can play the game advantageously.

In any of the gaming machines A3 to A12, the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game and the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game are displayed at the same time. A gaming machine A14 having display control means capable of being displayed on the means.

According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A3 to A13, the first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the determination means and the result of the second lottery determination are shown. Since the display control means simultaneously displays the second identification information on the display means, the player can efficiently play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

<Characteristic B group> (Freeze production produces a probabilistic period in time)
A win/loss determination means and a win/loss determination means for executing the win/no judgment of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first lottery condition and the win/no judgment of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second lottery condition. Display control means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means the first identification information indicating the result of judgment of the first lottery game and the second identification information indicating the result of judgment of the second lottery game. A dynamic determination of a first dynamic display period of the first identification information and a second dynamic display period of the second identification information which are dynamically displayed by the display control means from a plurality of dynamic display periods. For the player, at least one of the display period determining means, the first benefit that is advantageous to the player when the result of the hit/miss determination is a win, and the second benefit that is advantageous to the player over the first benefit. In a gaming machine having a privilege determination means for determining to be awarded, the privilege determination means determines the second privilege based on the hit of the second lottery game rather than the hit of the first lottery game. A gaming machine B1 which is easy and has an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means.

According to the gaming machine B1, the win/loss judgment means executes the win/no judgment of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first lottery condition, and the win/no judgment of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second lottery condition. To be done. The first identification information indicating the result of the determination of the first lottery game by the determination unit and the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game are dynamically displayed on the display unit at the same time by the display control unit. The first dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information that are dynamically displayed by the display control unit are determined from the plurality of dynamic display periods by the dynamic display period determining unit. Each is decided. It is determined that the player is provided with at least one of the first benefit that is advantageous to the player and the second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit when the result of the determination is a win. Determined by means. Based on the winning of the second lottery game rather than the winning of the first lottery game, the second benefit is more easily determined by the privilege determining means. The effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. As a result, a novel effect can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine B1, the dynamic display period determining means determines the first dynamic display period from a first dynamic display period group including a plurality of dynamic display periods, A gaming machine B2, wherein the second dynamic display period is determined from the configured second dynamic display period group.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the first dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determining means from the first dynamic display period group including a plurality of dynamic display periods. Since the second dynamic display period is determined from the second dynamic display period group including a plurality of dynamic display periods, it is possible to select a dynamic display period rich in changes. ..

In the gaming machine B2, a storage unit that stores a plurality of first dynamic display period groups configured by a plurality of the dynamic display periods, and one of the first movements based on establishment of a predetermined condition from the storage unit. Group determining means for determining a dynamic display period group, wherein the dynamic display period determining means is the first dynamic display period of 1 from the first dynamic display period group determined by the group determining means. A gaming machine B3, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the storage unit stores a plurality of first dynamic display period groups each including a plurality of dynamic display periods. Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the one first dynamic display period group is determined from the storage means by the group determination means. One first dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determining unit from the first dynamic display period group determined by the group determining unit. This has an effect that the game can be easily controlled.

In the gaming machine B3, in the plurality of first dynamic display period groups, the first dynamic display period having a long dynamic display period is configured to be easily determined by the dynamic display period determining means, and the long first dynamic period is configured. A gaming machine B4, which includes a dynamic display period group.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the first dynamic display period of the plurality of first dynamic display periods is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. Since the long first dynamic display period group that is configured easily is included, the number of first lottery games can be made smaller than the number of second lottery games, and a game that is more advantageous to the player can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be expected to shift to the special game state.

In the gaming machine B4, the group determination means is configured to be able to determine the long first dynamic display period group based on the determination of the second privilege. Machine B5.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4, the long first dynamic display period group is decided by the group deciding means based on the fact that the second privilege has been decided. There is an effect that it can be improved.

The gaming machine B6 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, wherein the effect performing means displays on the display means effect information based on the information of the second dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the performance information based on the information of the second dynamic display period is displayed on the display means by the performance executing means, so that the entertainment of the game is improved. There is an effect that can improve.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the normal gaming state in which the probability of being hit by the hit/miss determining means is set at the normal probability, and the probability of being hit is set to be higher than the normal gaming state. A gaming state setting means for setting at least one of a gaming state, and the privilege determination means, the normal gaming state as one of the first benefits and the special gaming state as one of the second benefits. A gaming machine B7 characterized by determining at least one of them.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines B1 to B6, the following effect is obtained. That is, either one of the normal game state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit by the hit/miss determining means is set to a normal probability and the special game state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit is set higher than that of the normal game state is a game. It is set by the state setting means. At least one of the normal gaming state as one of the first benefits and the special gaming state as one of the second benefits is determined by the privilege determination means. As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the dynamic display period determining means determines the second dynamic display when determining the first dynamic display period based on the setting of the special game state. A gaming machine B8, characterized in that it is easy to determine a dynamic display period having a longer dynamic display period than the period.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, when determining the first dynamic display period based on the setting of the special gaming state, the second dynamic display period Since the dynamic display period having a longer dynamic display period is more easily determined by the dynamic display period determining means, there is an effect that the player can be provided with an advantageous state by further reducing the number of times of the first lottery game. ..

In the gaming machine B7 or B8, based on the establishment of the first lottery condition or the second lottery condition, an acquisition unit that acquires the lottery information used for the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination unit, and the acquisition unit. Storage means for storing lottery information; advance win/fail judgment means for executing win/loss judgment in advance before the win/no judgment is made by the win/no judgment means for the lottery information stored in the storage means; Pre-dynamic display period determination means for determining in advance the dynamic display period determined by the display period determination means, and determined by the advance dynamic display period determination means when the special game state is determined Based on the determination result, it has a period determination means for determining the period until the normal game state is set, the effect execution means, the effect based on the information of the period determined by the period determination means A gaming machine B9 which is to be executed.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B7 or B8, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the establishment of the first lottery condition or the second lottery condition, the lottery information used for the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is acquired by the acquisition means. The lottery information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means. The advance/non-preferred/non-preferred determination unit executes the pre/non-preferred/non-preferred determination of the lottery information stored in the storage unit, before the pre/non-preferred/non-preferred determination unit determines the proper/non-preferred result. The dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means is previously determined by the advance dynamic display period determination means. When the special game state is determined, the period determination unit determines the period until the normal game state is set based on the determination result determined by the advance dynamic display period determination unit. The effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the information on the period determined by the period determining means. Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine B9, when it is determined that the winning lottery information is stored as a result of the determination made by the advance winning/disabling determination means, the game state determined by the game state determining means is set in advance. If the pre-game state determining means determines that the normal game state is determined, the normal game state is determined. A gaming machine B10, wherein an effect is executed based on information of a period until the dynamic display of the identification information is completed.

According to the gaming machine B10, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B9. That is, when it is determined that the winning lottery information is stored as a result of the determination by the advance hit determination means, the game state determined by the game state determination means is determined in advance by the advance game state determination means. It When it is determined by the pre-game state determination means that the normal game state is determined, performance is performed based on the information of the period until the dynamic display of the identification information for which the normal game state is determined is finished. The effect is executed by the means. As a result, it is possible to give a novel effect to the player and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B9, when it is determined that the winning lottery information is stored as a result of the determination made by the advance winning/disabling determination means, the game state determined by the game state determining means is set in advance. When it is determined that the lottery information to be in the normal game state is not stored, the lottery information stored in the storage means has pre-game state determination means for determining. A gaming machine B11, which produces an effect based on information of a period within a period until the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to is ended.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B9, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is determined that the winning lottery information is stored as a result of the determination by the advance hit determination means, the game state determined by the game state determination means is determined in advance by the advance game state determination means. It When it is determined that the lottery information in the normal gaming state is not stored, the information in the period within the period until the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the lottery information stored in the storage means is completed Based on the effect, the effect is executed by the effect executing means. As a result, there is an effect that a novel effect can be provided to the player.

In any one of the gaming machines B7 to B11, the group determination means determines the long first dynamic display period group when the special gaming state is set. B12.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B7 to B11, when the special gaming state is set, the first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determination means. There is an effect that a rich production can be performed.

In any of the gaming machines B4 to B12, the long first dynamic display period group is easier to be determined by the dynamic display period determining means than the plurality of second dynamic display period groups. A gaming machine B13 characterized in that it is configured.

According to the gaming machine B13, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machines B4 to B12, the dynamic display period longer than the plurality of second dynamic display period groups is long by the dynamic display period determining means. Since it is configured to be easily determined from the group, there is an effect that it is possible to easily set an advantageous state for the player.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B13, a state setting means for setting at least a first state in which the second lottery condition is easily established and a second state in which the second lottery condition is more difficult to be established than the first state. And, the first benefit is configured such that the second state is set more easily than the second benefit, the gaming machine B14.

According to the game machine B14, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines B1 to B13, the following effect is obtained. That is, the state setting means sets at least the first state in which the second lottery condition is easily established and the second state in which the second lottery condition is more difficult to be established than the first state. The first benefit is configured such that the second state is more easily set than the second benefit. As a result, it is possible to easily set the advantageous state for the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early.

<Characteristic C group> (Freeze effect can be selected by switching the table when the probability changes in small or medium)
Based on the establishment of the first lottery condition, the determination of the first lottery game is executed, and based on the establishment of the second lottery condition, the determination means for executing the determination of the second lottery game, and the first by the determination means. Display control means capable of simultaneously displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the lottery game and the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game on the display means, and dynamically by the display control means. A dynamic display period determining means for determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information and a second dynamic display period of the second identification information to be displayed from a plurality of dynamic display periods; After the first identification information or the second identification information is displayed with the determination result indicating the hit, at least the first benefit that is advantageous to the player and the second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit. In a gaming machine having a privilege determination means for determining whether to grant one of the two, the privilege determination means displays the second identification information as a hit, as compared with the case where the first identification information is displayed as a hit. In this case, the second privilege is configured to be easily determined, and the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means is configured by a plurality of dynamic display periods. Storage means for storing a plurality of first dynamic display period groups, and group determining means for determining one first dynamic display period group from the plurality of first dynamic display period groups stored in the storage means And a long first dynamic display period configured to facilitate the determination of the first dynamic display period having a long dynamic display period by the dynamic display period determination means in the plurality of first dynamic display period groups. The group determining means may determine the long first dynamic display period group based on the determination result determined by the determination means. A gaming machine C1 characterized by being configured as possible.

According to the gaming machine C1, the determination means performs the determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first lottery condition, and the determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second lottery condition. The display control means simultaneously displays the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game by the determination means and the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game on the display means. The first dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the display control unit are respectively selected from the plurality of dynamic display periods by the dynamic display period determining unit. It is determined. After the first identification information or the second identification information is displayed with the determination result indicating the hit, at least the first benefit that is advantageous to the player and the second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit. The privilege determination means determines whether or not to grant one of them. The second privilege is more easily determined by the privilege determination means when the second identification information is displayed as a hit than when the first identification information is displayed as a hit. A plurality of first dynamic display period groups configured by a plurality of dynamic display periods are stored in the storage unit as the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination unit. One first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determination unit from the plurality of first dynamic display period groups stored in the storage unit. The plurality of first dynamic display period groups includes a long first dynamic display period group configured so that the dynamic display period determining means can easily determine the first dynamic display period having a long dynamic display period. The long first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determination means based on the determination result determined by the determination means. Thereby, it is possible to provide a novel game play. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired early.

In the gaming machine C1, the dynamic display period determination means, when the first dynamic display start condition for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is satisfied, the first When the dynamic display period is determined and the second dynamic display start condition for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is satisfied, the second dynamic display period is set. A game machine characterized in that the game machine is determined individually and has a performance executing means for executing a performance based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are produced. That is, the dynamic display period determination means determines the first dynamic display period when the first dynamic display start condition for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is satisfied, The second dynamic display period is determined when the second dynamic display start condition for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is satisfied. The effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. Thereby, a novel effect can be given to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired early.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, there is provided a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player, based on the judgment result being judged as the hit or the specific judgment result. A gaming machine C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the bonus game which is advantageous to the player is determined by the determination means as the hit or the specific determination result is the bonus game execution means. Since it is executed by, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect other than winning.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a normal gaming state in which the probability of being judged as a hit by the judging means is set with a normal probability, and a special probability with a higher probability of being judged as a hit than the normal probability is set. The game state setting means for setting at least one of the special game state to be set, and when the second benefit is determined, the special game state is set by the game state setting means as one of the second benefits. Is configured to be set more easily than the first privilege, and the gaming machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effect is produced. That is, at least one of a normal game state in which the probability of being determined to be a hit by the determining means is set with a normal probability and a special game state in which a probability of being determined to be a hit is higher than the normal probability. Is set by the game state setting means. When the second privilege is determined, the special game state is set more easily than the first privilege by the game state setting means as one of the second benefits. As a result, it is possible to further set a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

In the gaming machine C4, the determination means is determined to be the specific determination result when the special gaming state is set, the gaming machine C5.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, when the special gaming state is set, the determination means determines that the result is a specific determination result, so that the value of the special gaming state can be further increased. There is an effect.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the plurality of first dynamic display period groups includes the first dynamic display period whose dynamic display period is longer than that of the long first dynamic display period group. A special length first dynamic display period group that is configured to be easily determined by the dynamic display period determination means, and the group determination means determines the long first dynamic display period group, The gaming machine C6, which is configured to be able to determine the special length first dynamic display period group when the determination unit executes the specific determination.

The gaming machine C6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5. That is, in the plurality of first dynamic display period groups, the first dynamic display period having a longer dynamic display period than the long first dynamic display period group is configured to be easily determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The special length first dynamic display period group is included. When the determination unit makes a specific determination while determining the long first dynamic display period group, the special length first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determination unit. As a result, the value of having a specific determination result can be further enhanced. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to expect that a specific determination result will be obtained in addition to the winning.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the group determination means determines the long first dynamic display period group, and then the predetermined first dynamic display is established based on that a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine C7 characterized by determining a period group.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, after the long first dynamic display period group is determined, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and then the predetermined time is determined by the group determination means. Since the determined first dynamic display period group is determined, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, a state setting means capable of setting a first state in which the second lottery condition is satisfied and a second state in which the second lottery condition is more easily satisfied than the first state A gaming machine C8, wherein the first benefit is configured so that the first status is set more easily by the status setting means than the second benefit.

The gaming machine C8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C7. That is, the state setting means sets the first state in which the second lottery condition is satisfied and the second state in which the second lottery condition is more easily satisfied than the first state. The first privilege is configured so that the first state can be set more easily by the state setting means than the second privilege. As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B14, C1 to C8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is moved to an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The gaming machine Z2, wherein any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B14, and C1 to C8 is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Any of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B14, and C1 to C8, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Other>
Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the winning or losing of the game is randomly selected, and a dynamic display of a special symbol for informing the result of the selection is displayed. Executed in. If the lottery result is a win, after the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, the lottery of whether or not to shift to the high-probability game state in which the probability of being judged to be high becomes a starting opening It is executed based on the fact that a game ball has entered. When the high probability game state is set, if it is decided in the high probability game state that it is decided to shift to the normal probability game state, it is proposed to shift to the normal probability game state. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-319221).
By the way, in such a gaming machine, in order to provide the player with a fair game, it is necessary to set a constant probability that the game state will shift to a high-probability gaming state when entering the starting opening. In the above case, since the probability of shifting to the high-probability game state is always constant, there is a problem that the game is not sharp and the player gets tired of the game early.
An object of the present technical idea is to provide, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, a gaming machine that can prevent the player from getting tired of playing the game at an early stage.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 executes the win/loss judgment of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first win/fail judgment condition, and the second win based on the satisfaction of the second win/fail judgment condition. A win/loss determination means for performing a win/loss determination of a lottery game, and first identification information indicating a win/loss determination result of the first lottery game by the win/loss determination means are dynamically displayed in the order in which the first win/loss determination condition is satisfied. The first display means and the second display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the result of the determination of the second lottery game by the determination means, in the order in which the second determination condition is satisfied, and The display control means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, respectively, and the hit determination result by the hit determination means. A bonus game that gives a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when the display control unit stops and displays the first or second identification information on the first or second display unit in a display mode indicating a hit Execution means, and until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the first win/loss determination condition. , A dynamic display start condition for holding the right to execute the first lottery game and starting the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the established win/loss determination condition based on the satisfaction of the second win/loss determination condition Until the establishment of the dynamic display start condition, the holding means for holding the right to execute the second lottery game and the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the first win/fail judgment condition are satisfied. Is determined on the basis of the number of holdings held in the holding means, and the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the second win/fail judgment condition is set to meet the dynamic display start condition. As a trigger, the dynamic display mode determining means for determining based on the number of holds held in the holding means, and each hold held in the holding means each time a predetermined determination condition is satisfied. And a case where the advance dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode based on the number of holdings by the holding means when the determination condition is satisfied and the first or second win/fail determination condition are satisfied. In addition, until the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, the order in which the win/fail judgment conditions that are the first win/fail judgment conditions and the second win/fail judgment conditions that have been met are met, and the pre-dynamic display mode determination means determines. Holding information storing means for storing holding information having at least information regarding the displayed dynamic display mode, and the holding information. While distinguishing the holding information of the first winning/disabling judgment condition and the second winning/failing judgment condition stored in the information storage means, the winning/damaging result in which the first winning/damaging condition and the second winning/damaging condition are combined for each holding information. Each time the determination condition is satisfied, the hold display means is displayed in a distinguishable hold display mode, and each time the determination conditions of the preliminary dynamic display mode determination means are satisfied, the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means. Based on the dynamic display mode determined by the advance dynamic display mode determination means for each hold information and the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed, for each hold information Start time information updating means for deciding or updating time information until the first or second identification information becomes the dynamic display start and storing it in the holding information storage means, and that a predetermined condition is satisfied. On the occasion, the hold display mode displayed on the hold display means is rearranged in the order of starting the dynamic display based on each time information stored in the hold information storage means by the start time information updating means. And rearranging means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the determination means executes the determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first lottery condition, and the determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second lottery condition. Is executed. The display control means simultaneously displays the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game by the determination means and the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game on the display means. The first dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the display control unit are respectively selected from the plurality of dynamic display periods by the dynamic display period determining unit. It is determined. After the first identification information or the second identification information is displayed with the determination result indicating the hit, at least the first benefit that is advantageous to the player and the second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit. The privilege determination means determines whether or not to grant one of them. The second privilege is more easily determined by the privilege determination means when the second identification information is displayed as a hit than when the first identification information is displayed as a hit. A plurality of first dynamic display period groups configured by a plurality of dynamic display periods are stored in the storage unit as the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination unit. One first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determination unit from the plurality of first dynamic display period groups stored in the storage unit. The plurality of first dynamic display period groups includes a long first dynamic display period group configured so that the dynamic display period determining means can easily determine the first dynamic display period having a long dynamic display period. The long first dynamic display period group is determined by the group determination means based on the determination result determined by the determination means.
Thereby, it is possible to provide a novel game play. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired early.
According to the gaming machine of the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the dynamic display period determination means determines the first dynamic display period when the first dynamic display start condition for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is satisfied, The second dynamic display period is determined when the second dynamic display start condition for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is satisfied. The effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means.
Thereby, a novel effect can be given to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired early.
According to the gaming machine of the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, it is advantageous to the player on the basis that the judging means judges that the hit or the specific judgment result is obtained. Since the bonus game to be executed is executed by the bonus game executing means, there is an effect that the player can expect more than hit.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
6 4 Left 1st starting port (first ball entry means) , Right 1st starting port ( 3rd ball entry means )
81 3rd symbol display device (a part of display means)
112 firing control device (launching means)
640 2nd starting opening (2nd entrance means)
S406 First determination means
S505 First dynamic display period determining means
Part of S612 game state setting means
S806 Second determination means
S905 Second dynamic display period determining means
S1072 A part of the game state setting means
S1414 production execution means

Claims (3)

Determination means for executing the determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first lottery condition, and determining the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second lottery condition,
Display control means capable of simultaneously displaying on the display means the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game and the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game by the determination means.
Dynamic display for determining a first dynamic display period of the first identification information and a second dynamic display period of the second identification information that are dynamically displayed by the display control means from a plurality of dynamic display periods. Period determination means,
After the first identification information or the second identification information is displayed with a determination result indicating a hit, a first benefit that is advantageous to the player and a second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit. In a gaming machine having a privilege determination means for determining to grant at least one of them,
The privilege determining means is configured to determine the second privilege more easily when the second identification information is displayed as a hit than when the first identification information is displayed as a hit. ,
A storage unit that stores a plurality of first dynamic display period groups configured by a plurality of dynamic display periods as the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination unit,
Group determining means for determining one of the first dynamic display period groups from the plurality of first dynamic display period groups stored in the storage means,
In the plurality of first dynamic display period groups, a long first dynamic display period group configured to facilitate determination of the first dynamic display period having a long dynamic display period by the dynamic display period determination means. Is included,
The group determination means is configured to be able to determine the long first dynamic display period group based on the determination result determined by the determination means. Amusement machine. The dynamic display period determination means determines the first dynamic display period when a first dynamic display start condition for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is satisfied. The second dynamic display period is individually determined when the second dynamic display start condition for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is established. And
The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a performance executing unit that executes a performance based on the information of the first dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining unit. 3. The privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game, which is advantageous to a player, on the basis of the judgment result being judged as the hit or the specific judgment result, 3. Game machine.

Images